All manuals and user guides at all-guides.

com

Operations Manual OM 920-6

Group: Applied Air Systems
Part Number: OM 920
Date: June 2015

m
MicroTech® III Unit Controller for
Commercial Rooftop, Applied Rooftop

.co
and Self-Contained Systems
Models: DPS, MPS, RAH, RCS, RDS, RDT, RFS, RPS, SWP and SWT
es
uid
-g
all
 All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Table of Contents

Table of Contents

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Dehum Set-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51

Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Energy Recovery Set-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Using the Keypad/Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Head Pressure Set-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Passwords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Evap Cond Set-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Navigation Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Alarm Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Edit Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Alarm Limits Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Service Timers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Alarm Output Config Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Rapid Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Alarm Delays Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Manual Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Manual Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Keypad/Display Menu Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Service Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Menu Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Timer Settings Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Quick Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Modbus Status Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
View/Set Unit Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 D3 Status Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Unit Status Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Sensor Offsets Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Occupancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Unit Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Temperatures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 BMS Communications Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Flow Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Unit Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
SAF Speed Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Trending Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
RF/EF Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Points 1-8 (Fixed) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Points 9-24 (From List) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Economizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Points 25-27 (With IDs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Min OA Damper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Points 28-30 (With IDs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Heating Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Trending Selection Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Dehumidification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Date/Time/Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 About this Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Time/Date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Commission Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 Alarm Clearing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Unit Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Timer Settings Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
SAF Set-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 Faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
RF/EF Set-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Heat/Cool Changeover Set-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Cooling Set-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Variable Compressor Set-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Econo Set-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Min OA Set-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Heating Set-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER 2 www.DaikinApplied.com

 All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Table of Contents

Operator’s Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Compressor Control for RoofPak . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113

Determining Unit State . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Compressor Control for Maverick II . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Off Operating State . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Condenser Fan Operation for Variable Speed
Start Up Operating State . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Compressor Low Ambient Option . . . . . . . . . . . . 122

Recirculating Operating State . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Variable Frequency Drive for VFD Compressor . 123

Fan Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Variable Speed Scroll Compressor . . . . . . . . . . . 124

Min DAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Condenser Fan Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126

Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 MPS Standard Condenser Fan Control . . . . . . . 127

Economizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Heating Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131

Mechanical Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 Modulating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132

Determining Unit Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 RTU Gas Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132

Determining Control Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 Min DAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132

Determining Cooling Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 MPS Gas Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134

Determining Heat Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 Indoor Air Fan - ON/OFF Control . . . . . . . . . . . . 136

Determining Economizer Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140

Determining Cooling Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 Fan Failure Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140

Determining Supply Air Fan Capacity . . . . . . . . . 90

Determining RF/EF Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Determining Occupancy Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Determining Occupancy Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Unoccupied Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Scheduling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Temperature Control Configurations . . . . . . . . . . 94
Heat/Cool Changeover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Control Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Dehumidification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Energy Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Outside Air Damper Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
100% Outside Air Damper Control,
Two Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Airside Economizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Economizer to Cooling Operating State . . . . . . . 105
Waterside Economizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Bypass Valve Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Water Pump Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Cooling: Multistage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Cooling: Modulating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Discharge Air Temperature Setpoint
Reset - Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112

www.DaikinApplied.com 3 OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER

 All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Introduction

Introduction

This manual provides information regarding the MicroTech

WARNING
III control system. It specifically describes the operation and
programmable options for units with constant air volume (CAV) Excessive moisture in the control panel can cause
control and variable air volume (VAV) control. hazardous working conditions and improper
equipment operation. When servicing this equipment
The MicroTech III Controller is a self contained device that during rainy weather, the electrical components in the
is capable of complete, standalone operation. Information main control panel must be protected from the rain.
in the controller can be displayed and modified by using the
keypad/display in the units main control panel. For installation
and startup instructions and general information regarding a CAUTION
particular unit, refer to the applicable model-specific installation Extreme temperature hazard. Can cause damage to
and maintenance manual. system components. The MicroTech III controller is
designed to operate in ambient temperatures from -20°F
For installation and startup instructions and general information
to 125°F. It can be stored in ambient temperatures from
regarding a particular rooftop unit, refer to the applicable
-40°F to 140°F. It is designed to be stored and operated
model-specific installation and maintenance manual (Table 1).
in relative humidity up to 95% (non-condensing).

Table 1: Installation and Maintenance Resources

CAUTION
Unit Manual
Static sensitive components. A static discharge
MicroTech III Rooftop Unit Controller -
BACnet IP Communications IM 916 while handling electronic circuit boards can cause
MicroTech III Rooftop Unit Controller -
damage to the components. Discharge any static
IM 917 electrical charge by touching the bare metal inside the
BACnet MSTP Communications
MicroTech III Rooftop Unit Controller - main control panel before performing any service work.
BACnet LON Communications IM 918
Never unplug any cables, circuit board terminal blocks,
MicroTech III Unit Controller IM 919 relay modules, or power plugs while power is applied to
MicroTech III Remote Unit Interface IM 1005 the panel.
RPS/RDT/RFS/RCS 015C-105C IM 926
RPS/RDT/RFS/RCS 015D-140D IM 893
SWP Self-Contained (012 to 130) IM 1032
RoofPak RAH/RDS IM 987 Getting Started
Maverick II Rooftop 62-75 ton IM 991 This manual contains information designed to assist the field
Maverick II Rooftop 15-50 ton IM 1058 technician with unit setup. The technician will need to be
familiar with the following topics at a minimum to successfully
set up unit operation.
NOTICE
This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate • Keypad navigation/editing/passwords
radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used • Control Mode
in accordance with this instruction manual, may cause • Occ Mode
interference to radio communications. It has been tested • DSP Setpoint
and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital
• BSP Setpoint
device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC rules. These
limits are designed to provide reasonable protection • Heat/Cool Changeover (Zone Setpoints)
against harmful interference when the equipment is • DAT Clg Setpoint
operated in a commercial environment. Operation of this • DAT Htg Setpoint
equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful
• Clg Enable (OAT/EWT lockout)
interference in which case the user is required to correct
the interference at his own expense. Daikin disclaims • Htg Enable (OAT lockout)
any liability resulting from any interference or for • Econo Enable (Changeover temp/Enthalpy switch)
the correction thereof. • Ventilation Limit/OA damper

WARNING
Electric shock hazard. Can cause personal injury or
equipment damage. This equipment must be properly
grounded. Connections and service to the MicroTech II
control panel must be performed only by personnel that
are knowledgeable in the operation of the equipment
being controlled.

OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER 4 www.DaikinApplied.com

 All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Using the Keypad/Display

Using the Keypad/Display

The keypad/display consists of a 5-line by 22 character display, The keypad/display Information is organized into Menu groups;
three keys and a “push and roll” navigation wheel. There is an Main Menu, Quick Menu, View/Set Unit Menu, Commission
Alarm Button, Menu (Home) Button, and a Back Button. The Unit Menu, Manual Control Menu, Service Menu, Unit
wheel is used to navigate between lines on a screen (page) Configuration Menu and Alarm list Menus.
and to increase and decrease changeable values when editing. NOTE: Only menus and items that are applicable to the
Pushing the wheel acts as an Enter Button. specific unit configuration are displayed.
The first line on each page includes the page title and the line The Main Menu allows the user to enter a password, access
number to which the cursor is currently “pointing”. The line the Quick Menu pages, view the current unit state, access the
numbers are X/Y to indicate line number X of a total of Y lines Alarm List Menu as well as access to information about this
for that page. The left most position of the title line includes an unit. The Quick Menu provides access to status information
“up” arrow to indicate there are pages “above” the currently indicating the current operating condition of the unit. The
displayed items, a “down” arrow to indicate there are pages View/Set Unit Menus include basic menus and items required
“below” the currently displayed items or an “up/down” arrow to setup the unit for general operation. These include such
to indicate there are pages “above and below” the currently things are control mode, occupancy mode and heating and
displayed page. cooling setpoints. The Commission Unit Menus include more
Each line on a page can contain status only information or advanced items for “tuning” unit operation such as PI loop
include changeable data fields. When a line contains status parameters and time delays. The Manual Control Menu allows
only information and the cursor is on that line all but the value service personnel to test unit specific operation manually.
field of that line is highlighted meaning the text is white with The Unit Configuration Menu allows the user to access to the
a black box around it. When the line contains a changeable unit specific configuration information. These generally do not
value and the cursor is at that line, the entire line is highlighted. needing changing or accessing unless there is a fundamental
Each line on a page may also be defined as a “jump” line, change to or a problem with the unit operation. The Alarm Lists
meaning pushing the navigation wheel will cause a “jump” to Menu includes active alarm and alarm log information.
a new page. An arrow is displayed to the far right of the line to
indicate it is a “jump” line and the entire line is highlighted when
the cursor is on that line.

Figure 1: Keypad Controls

www.DaikinApplied.com 5 OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER

 All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Using the Keypad/Display

Passwords
Various menu functions are accessible or inaccessible, Entering an invalid password has the same effect as continuing
depending on the access level of the user, and the password without entering a password. Once a valid password has been
they enter, if any. There are four access levels, including no entered, the controller allows further changes and access
password, Level 2, Level 4, and Level 6, with Level 2 having without requiring the user to enter a password until either the
the highest level of access. Without entering a password, the password timer expires or a different password is entered.
user has access only to basic status menu items. Entering The default value for this password timer is 10 minutes. It is
the Level 6 password (5321) allows access to the Alarm Lists changeable from 3 to 30 minutes via the Timer Settings menu.
Menu, Quick Menu, and the View/Set Unit Menus group.
Entering the Level 4 password (2526) allows similar access
as Level 6 with the addition of the Commission Unit Menu, Navigation Mode
Manual Control, and Service Menu groups. Entering the Level

m
In the Navigation Mode, when a line on a page contains no
2 password (6363) allows similar access as Level 4 with the editable fields all but the value field of that line is highlighted
addition of the Unit Configuration Menu. meaning the text is white with a black box around it. When the
NOTE: Alarms can be acknowledged without entering a line contains an editable value field the entire line is inverted
password. when the cursor is pointing to that line.

.co
The main password page is displayed when the keypad/display When the navigation wheel is turned clockwise, the cursor
is first accessed, the Home Key is pressed, the Back Key is moves to the next line (down) on the page. When the wheel is
pressed multiple times, or if the keypad/display has been idle turned counter-clockwise the cursor moves to the previous line
longer than the Password Timeout (default 10 minutes). The (up) on the page. The faster the wheel is turned the faster the
main password page provides access to enter a password, cursor moves.
access the Quick Menu, view the current Unit State, access the When the Back Button is pressed the display reverts back to
alarm lists or view information about the unit. the previously displayed page. If the Back button is repeated
es
pressed the display continues to revert one page back along
Figure 2: Password Main Page the current navigation path until the “main menu” is reached.

AHU 01 1/5 When the Menu (Home) Button is pressed the display reverts
to the “main page.”

Enter Password When the Alarm Button is depressed, the Alarm Lists menu is
displayed.
uid

Quick Menu
Unit State=________ Edit Mode
Alarm Lists The Editing Mode is entered by pressing the navigation wheel
while the cursor is pointing to a line containing an editable field.
About This AHU Once in the edit mode pressing the wheel again causes the
editable field to be highlighted. Turning the wheel clockwise
while the editable field is highlighted causes the value to be
-g

The password field initially has a value **** where each * increased. Turning the wheel counter-clockwise while the
represents an adjustable field. These values can be changed editable field is highlighted causes the value to be decreased.
by entering the Edit Mode described below. The faster the wheel is turned the faster the value is increased
or decreased. Pressing the wheel again cause the new value
to be saved and the keypad/display to leave the edit mode and
Figure 3: Password Entry Page
all

return to the navigation mode.

Enter Password 1/1

Enter Password ****

OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER 6 www.DaikinApplied.com

 All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Using the Keypad/Display

Service Timers Manual Control

A user may override timers for a period of up to 240 minutes A user may manually control outputs to check operation of
by setting the Service Timer to a non-zero number. When the components when Manual Control is set to ManCtrl. When
Service Timer is not zero, the times listed below are set to the Manual Control is set to ManCtrl, the unit is disabled and
Service Time (Default = 20 seconds) instead of the normal the unit is shut down in the normal manner if it is operating.
values. This allows the unit to be run through its operating Outputs listed in the Manual Control menu of the Keypad/
states without having to wait for the normal time delays to Display section can then be controlled directly until Manual
expire. These times revert to the standard values when the Control is set to Normal.
Service Time count down to zero or is set to zero by the user. NOTE: Manual Control will be set to No automatically after
The affected times are: 240 minutes so that a person could not put the unit
into Manual Mode control and walk away from the unit
• Cooling Stage Time and let it run at the manual settings.
• Heating Stage Time When Manual Control is set to Yes, the Control Mode is set to
• Start Initial Time Off so that the unit will not restart automatically.
• Recirculation When Manual Control is set to Normal all digital outputs in the
• ZeroOATime Manual Control menu are set to Off and all the analog outputs
are set to 0.0% so that all outputs are in the Off or minimum
Rapid Start position when Manual Control is set to ManCtrl.
All alarms except those listed below are overridden during
The user may elect to initiate a rapid startup sequence at unit
Manual Control.
power up by setting the Rapid Start flag to Yes. When this flag
is set to Yes, the Service Timer is set to 10 minutes whenever During manual control, the unit will respond in the normal
the power is reset to the controller. manner to the following alarms.
• Emergency Stop Fault
• Duct High Limit
• High Return Temperature
• High Discharge Temperature
• Low Discharge Temperature
• High Pressure - Circuit # 1
• High Pressure - Circuit # 2
• Low Pressure - Circuit # 1
• Low Pressure - Circuit # 2

www.DaikinApplied.com 7 OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER

 All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Keypad/Display Menu Structure

Keypad/Display Menu Structure

The following is a description of the MicroTech III menu structure. These menus and items can all be displayed with the keypad/
display. Menu items displayed will change based on the selected unit configuration.

Figure 4: Main Menu – Keypad/Display Menu Structure

See page 6 See page 21 – 22 See page 23 – 32

Main Menu Enter Password Quick Menu View/Set Unit
Enter Password ► Enter Password ******* ► Unit State=__________ DAT Clg Spt= 55.0°F Unit Status/Settings ►
Quick Menu ► Unit Status=_________ DAT Htg Spt= 85.0°F Occupancy ►
View/Set Unit ► MWU Status=_________ Min DAT Limit= 55.0°F Temperatures ►
Unit State=_________ Dehum Status=________ Unocc Clg Spt= 85.0°F Flow Status ►
Unit Status=________ Ctrl Mode= Off Unocc Htg Spt= 55.0°F SAF Spd Control ►
MWU Status= Occ Mode= Auto/Net SAF Speed= XXX% RF/EF Control ►
Dehum Status= HP Mode= Auto Duct Press= X.Xin Cooling ►
Ctrl Mode= Off Clg Capacity= XXX% DuctSP Spt= 1.0in Economizer ►
Occ Mode= Auto OAD/Econ Cap= XXX% RF/EF Cap= XXX% Min OA Damper ►
HP Mode= Htg Capacity= XXX% Bldg Press= X.XXin Heating ►
Commission Unit ► Supl Htg Cap= XXX% BldgSP Spt= 0.05in Dehumidification ►
Manual Control ► Reheat Cap= XXX% IAQ PPM= XXXXppm Date/Time/Schedules ►
Service Menus ► Control Temp= XXX% OA Flw= XXXXXCFM
Trending ► Occ Clg Spt= 72.0°F MinOAFlw Spt= 2000CFM
Unit Maintenance ► Occ Htg Spt= 68.0°F OA Temp= XXX°F
For more detail go to:
BMS Communications ► Disch Air= XXX°F EW Temp= XXX°F
Figure 5, page 10
Unit Configuration ► Rel Humidity= XXX%
Alarm Lists ►
About This Unit ►

See page 70 See page 71 – 73 See page 62 See page 78

BMS Communications Unit Configuration Alarm Lists About This Unit
LON Set-Up ► Apply Changes= No Active Alarms ► SO_Item= 123456_12345
BACnet MSTP Set-Up ► Unit Type= RTU(0) Alarm Log ► Unit SN= FBOU123456789
BACnet IP Set-Up ► Control Type= DAT(1) App Version= 2506017xxx
D-Net Set-Up ► Clg Type= Comp(1) Cf1-15= xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
Network Unit Set-Up ► Comp Config= 424(1)
For more detail go to:
Cf6-29= xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
Comm Slot 1= 0 Gen Clg Stgs=/VFDCmpCFG= 8 Main BSP= X.XX
Figure 7, page 16
Low Ambient= No(0) LON BSP= X.XX
Comm Slot 2= 0
Cond Ctrl= Std2(0) LON App Ver= X.XX
Comm Slot 3= 0
OA Dmpr/Econ= AirEc(3) BACnet BSP= X.XX
OA Flow Stn= None(0) D-Net BSP= X.XX
Htg Type= None(0) HMI GUID=
For more detail go to: Htg Stages= 1 xxxxxxxx-xxxx-xxxx-xxxx-
Figure 8, page 20 xxxxxxxxxxxx
Max Heat Rise= 100
OBH GUID=
SAF Type= CAV(0)
xxxxxxxx-xxxx-xxxx-xxxx-
RAF Type= CAV(0) xxxxxxxxxxxx
RF/EF Ctrl= Track(1)
2ndDSPSnsr= No(0)
EFT/LCT Snsr= No(0)
Energy Rcvy= None(0)
Clg Circ Type= 2Air(2)
Head P Ctrl= No(0)
Bypass Ctrl= Slave(0)
Unit Size= 050
Refrig Type= R410A(2)
Reheat Type= None(0)
Unit Voltage= 460/60(2)
EV Type= EVBSag
Apply Changes= No

OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER 8 www.DaikinApplied.com

 All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Keypad/Display Menu Structure

See page 33 – 58 See page 59 – 61 See page 62 – 68 See page 74 – 77 See page 69
Commission Unit Manual Control Service Menus Trending Unit Maintenance
Unit Set-Up ► Manual Control= Normal CFan Outpt 1= Off Timer Settings ► Trending Ena= No Operating Hours
Timer Settings ► Supply Fan= Off CFan Outpt 2= Off Operating Hours ► Apply Chgs= No
SAF Set-Up ► SAF Spd Cmd= 0% CFan Outpt 3= Off Save/Restore Settings ► Sample Time= 300s
RF/EF Set-Up ► Manual Ctrl= Normal BP/WR Valve= 0% Active Alarms ► TrendOnOff= Off
Htg/Clg ChgOvr Set-Up ► Supply Fan= Off CW Valve= 0% Alarm Log ► Export Data= No
Cooling Set-Up ► SAF Spd Cmd= 0% ExhFan Out 1= Off Alarm Configuration ► Clear Trend= Done
INV Cmp Set-Up ► INV/OF Ena= Off ExhFan Out 2= Off Analog Input Status ► Points 1–8 (Fixed) ►
Var Cmp Set-Up ► INV Cmp= Off ECond VFD= Off Universal I/O Status ► Points 9–24 (from List) ►
Econo Set-Up ► INV Cmp Cmd= 0% ECFan Spd Cmd= 0% Digital Input Status ► Points 25–27 (with IDs) ►
Min OA Set-Up ► Comp 3= Off EC Dm Valve= Close Digital Output Status ► Points 28–30 (with IDs) ►
Heating Set-Up ► OA Fan= Off Sump Pump= Off Network Input Status ►
OA Fan Set-Up ► OA Fan Cmd= 0% Sep Flsh Vlv= Off Modbus Status ►
Exp Valve Set-Up ► 4 Way Valve= Off SV1= Off D3 Status ► For more detail go to:
Defrost Set-Up ► RcvSol Valve=Off SV2= Off Sensor Offsets ► Figure 9, page 20
Dehum Set-Up ► BP Sol Valve= Off Gas Htg On/Off= Off Reset Counter= XXXX
Energy Rec Set-Up ► EVI Cmd= 0% Htg Valve= 0%
Head Pressure Set-Up ► EVO Cmd= 0% SCR Out= 0%
For more detail go to:
Evap Cond Set-Up ► RF/EF Fan= Off F&BP Damper= 0%
Figure 7, page 16
D3 Set-Up ► RF/EF Spd Cmd= 0% Htg Stg 1= Off
Alarm Configuration ► OAD/Econo= 0% SCR Ena 1= Off
OAD OpCl= Close Htg Stg 2= Off
Var Cmp= Off SCR Ena 2= Off
Var Cmp Cmd= 0% Htg Stg 3= Off
VCmp Emg Stop= Nrml Htg Stg 4= Off
Comp 1= Off Htg Stg 5= Off
For more detail go to:
Comp 2= Off Htg Stg 6= Off
Figure 6, page 12
Comp 3= Off Reheat Valve= 0%
Comp 4= Off RH Output= Off
Comp 5= Off LSCRH Valve= Off
Comp 6= Off HGBP Valve= Off
Comp 7= Off ERec Wheel= Off
Comp 8= Off ER Whl Cmd= 0%
U1 Comp 1= Off ERBP Dmpr Cl= Off
U1 Comp 2= Off ERBP Dmpr Op= Off
U2 Comp 1= Off Cond Wtr Pump= Off
U2 Comp 2= Off Alm Output= Off
Cond Sol 1= Off Fan Op Out= Off
Cond Sol 2= Off

www.DaikinApplied.com 9 OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER

 All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Keypad/Display Menu Structure

Figure 5: View/Set Unit – Keypad/Display Menu Structure

See page 23 – 32
View/Set Unit
Unit Status/Settings ►
Occupancy ►
Temperatures ►
Flow Status ►
SAF Spd Control ►
RF/EF Control ►
Cooling ►
Economizer ►
Min OA Damper ►
Heating ►
Dehumidification ►
Date/Time/Schedules ►

See page 23 – 24 See page 25 See page 26 See page 27 See page 27 and 35 See page 28 and 38
Unit Status/Settings Occupancy Temperatures Flow Status SAF Speed Control RF/EF Control
Unit State= ___________ Occupancy= __________ Control Temp= XXX°F Airflow= ______________ SAF Speed= XXX% RF/EF Cap= XXX%
Unit Status= __________ Occ Mode= Auto/Net Disch Temp= XXX°F Waterflow= ___________ Speed Cmd= XXX% Speed Cmd= XXX%
MWU Status= _________ OccSrc= _____________ Return Air= XXX°F Water Pump= _________ Duct Press= X.Xin Bldg Press- X.XXin
Dehum Status= ________ UnoccSrc= ___________ Space Temp= XXX°F Supply Fan= __________ DuctSP Spt= 1.0in BldgSP Spt= 0.050in
Ctrl Mode= Off Tnt Ovrde Tm= 0 min OA Temp= XXX°F Ret/Exh Fan= _________ IAQ PPM= XXXXPPM
Clg Status= ___________ EF/LC Temp= XXX°F OA Flw= XXXXXCFM
Htg Status= ___________ EW Temp= XXX°F MinOAFlw Spt= 2000CFM
SuplHtgStatus= ________ Mixed Air= XXX°F Bldg Press= X.XXin
Econo Status= _________ ER LAT= XXX°F BldgSP Spt= 0.05in
Clg Capacity= XXX% ER EAT= XXX°F
Htg Capacity= XXX% Sump Temp= XXX°F
Supl Htg Cap= XXX% PA Temp= XXX°F
Reheat Cap= XXX% DRT1= XXX°F
SAF Speed= XXX% DRT2= XXX°F
RF/EF Cap= XXX% DRT3= XXX°F
OAD/Econo Cap=XXX% SRT= XXX°F
Rel Humidiy= XXX% DFT= XXX°F
Net Emrg Ovrd= Normal IRT= XXX°F
Net App Mode= Auto ORT= XXX°F
INVCompTemp= XXX°F

www.DaikinApplied.com 10 OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER

 All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Keypad/Display Menu Structure

m
See page 28 and 41
Cooling
Occ Clg Spt= 72.0°F
Unocc Clg Spt= 85.0°F
DAT Clg Spt= 55.0°F
See page 28 and
44 – 45
Economizer
OAD/Econo Pos= XXX%
DAT Clg Spt= 55.0°F
Min OA Pos= XXX%
FreeClgStatus = _______
Min OA Damper

.co
See page 29 and 46

Min OA Pos= XXX%

Vent Limit= 20%
LoFlo V Lmt= 30%
DCV Limit= 10%
See page 29
and 46 – 48
Heating
Occ Htg Spt= 68.0°F
Unocc Htg Spt= 55.0°F
MWU Spt= 70.0°F
DAT Htg Spt= 85.0°F
See page 30 and
51 – 52
Dehumidification
Dehum Status= ________
Rel Humidity= XXX%
Dewpoint= XXX°F
Dehum Method= None
See page 31 and 93
– 96
Date/Time/Schedules
Time= hh:mm:ss
Date= MM/DD/YY
UTC Diff= -60min
DAILY SCHEDULE
es
Occ Clg Spt= 72.0°F Min OA Src= __________ RH Setpoint= 50% Mon= HH:MM-HH:MM
Unocc Clg Spt= 85.0°F Dewpoint Spt= 50°F Tue= HH:MM-HH:MM
Reheat Spt= XXX°F Wed= HH:MM-HH:MM
Reheat Cap= XXX% Thu= HH:MM-HH:MM
Fri= HH:MM-HH:MM
Sat= HH:MM-HH:MM
Sun= HH:MM-HH:MM
Hol= HH:MM-HH:MM
uid

HOLIDAY DATES
Hol 1=MMMDD/YY-MMMDD/YY
Hol 2=MMMDD/YY-MMMDD/YY
Hol 3=MMMDD/YY-MMMDD/YY
Hol 4=MMMDD/YY-MMMDD/YY
Hol 5=MMMDD/YY-MMMDD/YY
Hol 6=MMMDD/YY-MMMDD/YY
Hol 7=MMMDD/YY-MMMDD/YY
Hol 8=MMMDD/YY-MMMDD/YY
Hol 9=MMMDD/YY-MMMDD/YY
-g

Hol 10=MMMDD/YY-MMMDD/YY
ONE EVENT SCHEDULE
Beg= MMMDD/YY@HH:MM
End= MMMDD/YY@HH:MM
OPTIMAL START
Enable= No
all

Htg Range= 0.4 ºF/min

Htg OAT= 35 ºF
Des Htg OAT= 0 ºF
Clg Rate= 0.4 ºF/min
Clg OAT= 85 ºF
Des Clg OAT= 95 ºF
DAYLIGHT SAVINGS
DLS Strt Mon= Mar
DLS Strt Wk= 2nd Week
DLS End Mon= Nov
DLS End Wk= 1st Week
DLS Enable= Auto
PURGE
Max Purge= 0min

www.DaikinApplied.com 11 OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER

 All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Keypad/Display Menu Structure

Figure 6: Commission Unit – Keypad/Display Menu Structure

See page 33 – 58
Commission Unit
Unit Set-Up ►
Timer Settings ►
SAF Set-Up ►
RF/EF Set-Up ►
Htg/Clg ChgOvr Set-Up ►
Cooling Set-Up ►
INV Cmp Set-Up ►
Var Cmp Set-Up ► See page 33 See page 33 – 34 See page 35 – 37
Econo Set-Up ►
Min OA Set-Up ► Unit Set-Up Timer Settings SAF Set-Up
Heating Set-Up ► Apply Changes= No Service Time= 0min SAF Ctrl= DSP CO2 CONTROL BSP CONTROL
OA Fan Set-Up ► RAT Sensor= Yes Start Up= 180s AplyInputChgs= No Min PPM= 0PPM BSP DB= 0.01in
Exp Valve Set-Up ► OAT Sensor= Yes Recirculate= 180s CO2 Input= None Max PPM= 2000PPM BSP Period= 5s
Defrost Set-Up ► Space Sensor= Digtl/Net Zero OA Time= 0min CFM Input= None V/A @ Min PPM= 0V BSP Gain= 0.2
Dehum Set-Up ► Eng Units= English Tnt Override= 120min BSP Input= No V/A @ Max PPM= 10V Max Spd Chg= 4%
Energy Rec Set-Up ► Unit Name= xxxxxxxxxxxx Post Heat= 0s SPEED CONTROL Min SAF PPM= 800PPM SAF SETUP
Head Pressure Set-Up ► Rapid Start= No Pwd Timeout= 10min Rem SAF Cap= 33% Max SAF PPM= 1100PPM SAF Ctrl Dly= 30s
Evap Cond Set-Up ► Rapid Start Tm= 10min Low DAT= 6min DSP CONTROL Min PPM Spd= 50% Min Speed= 33%
D3 Set-Up ► DO10 Clg= FanOp ClgStateDelay= 300s DSP DB= 0.1in Max PPM Spd= 100% VAVBox Out= _________
Alarm Configuration ► Bypass Valve= 300s VFD Ramp Time= 60s CFM CONTROL Max SAF Hz=
Clg Stg Time= 5min Min Period= 5s Min CFM= 0CFM Max Vent Speed= 100%
Htg Stg Time= 5min Max Spd Chg= 15% Max CFM= 10000CFM Max SAF RPM= 2600
Air Flw Ign= 120s Duct Press 1= X.Xin V/A @ Min CFM= 0V ECM Status= __________
List continues
MinExStrtTm= 120s Duct Press 2= X.Xin V/A @ Max CFM= 10 V
on, page 14
MinExStopTm= 120s 1 ZONE VAV CONTROL SAF CFM DB= 3%
ER Whl Stg Tm= 5min Min Clg Spd= 40% SAF CFM Period= 30s
ER Whl Off Tm= 20min Max Clg Spd= 100% SAF CFM Gain= 0.1
EvCnd Stg Tm= 10min Min Htg Spd= 40% SAF CFM MxChg= 5%
WRV Init Tm= 60s Max Htg Spd= 100%
Min WRV Time= 60s Space Period= 60s
Htg Wrmup Tm= 240s Space Gain= 0.8
Htg Hld Period= 240s Space PAT= 400s
RH Srg Time= 10min Space Max Chg= 10%
Srvc Time Inc= 20s
OffHtCIDelay= 120s

See page 42 – 43 See page 44 – 45

INV Cmp Set-Up Var Comp Set-Up Econo Set-Up
COMPRESSOR STATUS COMPRESSOR SETUP COMPRESSOR STATUS EconChgovr= Enth&DB
Clg State= ____________ Clg Lo OAT Lk= Var Cmp Status= _______ Econo FDD= On
Htg State= ____________ 55°F (RTU/SCU) Var Spd Cmd= _________ Clg Stage Time= 5min
INV Cmp Spd= XXX.X% 0°F (MPS) Comp 1= _____________ Chgover Temp= 55.0°F
INV Spd Cmd= XXX.X% 25°F (DPS) Comp 3= _____________ Clg DB= 2.0°F
Comp 3=_____________ Htg Lo OAT Lk= Comp 5= _____________ Econo Period=
Prev Standby=_______ ► 0.0ºF REFRIG CIRCUIT STATUS 30/40s (air/water)
Compressor Limiting ► 45°F (100% OA w/o ER) PTD1= _______________ Econo Gain=
1-Oct (air/water)
Fault Code Details ►1 Htg Hi OAT Lk= 55.0ºF PTD2= _______________
Econo PAT=
INV Port Temp= XXX.XºF EffHtgOATLk= _______ºF VCmpDischSH= _______
60/40s (air/water)
INV Fin Temp= XXX.XºF OAT Diff= 2ºF C1DschSatTmp= _______
Econo Max Chg=
INV Cmp Amps= XX.XA INV Period= 20s C2DschSatTmp= _______ 10/15% (air/water)
REFRIG CIRCUIT STATUS INV Gain= 2.5 DRT1= _______________ Flush Econo= Yes
PTD= XXX.Xpsi INV PAT= 10s DRT2= _______________ Econo Diff= 2.0°F
PTS= XXX.Xpsi INV Max Chg= 15% Cond Sol 1= Off EWT Diff= 3.0°F
4 Way Valve=__________ IFB COMM STATUS ►2 Cond Sol 2= Off
COMPRESSOR SET-UP
Clg Reset= None
RcvrSol Valve=_________ Min Clg Spt= 55.0°F
Var Cmp Period= 20s Min Clg Spt @= 0/NA
BP Sol Valve=_________ Date/Time
Var Cmp Gain= 1 Max Clg Spt= 65.0°F
MM/DD/YYYY HH:MM:SS
Var Cmp PAT= 40s Max Clg Spt@= 100/NA
Compressor Limiting VarCmp MaxChg= 10% Max OAT Lmt= 75°F
Clg Press Lmtg=_______ OilBoost= Off Min OAT Lmt= 70°F
Htg Press Lmtg=_______ LowOilTime= 10min Calibrate OAD= No
1, 2 See the expansion C Ratio Lmtg=_________ OilBoostTime= 15min PosSwOpen= 97%
information on page 19 Ref DLT Lmtg=_________ LowTcOAT= 80°F Max Sw Diff= 3%
INV Brd Lmtg=_________ PosSwClose= 3%
INV Man Dsbl= Enable Min SW Diff= 5%
Comp3 ManDsbl= Enable OAD Sw Status= _______

OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER 12 www.DaikinApplied.com

 All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Keypad/Display Menu Structure

See page 28 and 38 – 39 See page 40 See page 41

RF/EF Set-Up Htg/Clg ChgOvr Set-Up Cooling Set-Up
RF/EF Ctrl= Tracking MinExStrtTm= 120s Ctlr Temp Src= RAT Clg Stage Time= 5min
Rem RAF Cap= 5% MinExStopTm= 120s AplyTstatchg= No Clg DB= 2.0°F
Rem ExhF Cap= 5% MinExOAPos= 5% Use Tstat Spt= No Clg Period= 20s
BSP DB= 0.01in MinExSAFCap= 10% Occ Clg DB= 2.0°F Clg Gain= 1
BSP Period= 5s ExhOnOAPos= 40% Clg Period= 60s Clg PAT= 40s
BSP Gain= 0.2s ExhMxOAPos= 100% Clg Gain= 0.1 CW Max Chg= 15%
Max Spd Chg= 4% Exh Stg 1 On= 40% Clg PAT= 600s Clg Lo OAT Lk=
Sup Fan Max= 100% Exh Stg 1 Off= 30% Max Clg Chg= 5.0°F 55ºF (RTU/SCU)
0°F (MPS)
RF @ SF Max= 95% Exh Stg 2 On= 55% Occ Htg DB= 2.0°F
25°F (DPS or RTU w/
Sup Fan Min= 30% Exh Stg 2 Off= 40% Htg Period= 60s VFD Cmps)
RF @ SF Min= 25% Exh Stg 3 On= 70% Htg Gain= 0.1 OAT Diff= 2.0°F
Lo Fan Diff= 75% Exh Stg 3 Off= 50% Htg PAT= 600s Min EWT= 55°F
Hi Fan Diff- 75% Max RF/EF Hz= 60Hz Max Htg Chg= 5.0°F Clg Reset= None
RFEF Ctrl Dly= 30s Max Vent Spd= 100% CalDRemSpt@10°C= No Min Clg Spt= 55.0°F
Min Speed= Max RFEF RPM= 2600 CalDRemSpt@50°F= No Min Clg Spt @= 0/NA
5% (with Exhaust Fan) CalDRemSpt@30°C= No
ECM Status= _________ Max Clg Spt= 65.0°F
33% (with Return Fan)
CalDRemSpt@86°F= No Max Clg Spt@= 100/NA
DemandShed= Ena Lead Circuit= #1
ClgDmdShdInc= 4°F Staging Type= Std
HtgDmdShdInc= 4°F CFanOut1 Spt= 55°F
ClgShedRate= 2.0°F/hr CFanOut2 Spt= 65°F
HtgShedRate= 2.0°F/hr CFanOut3 Spt= 75°F
Cond Fan Diff= 5°F
Unocc Diff= 3°F
DT Above Spt= ________
DT Below Spt= ________

See page 29 and 46 – 48

Min OA Set-Up
AplyMinOAChg= No (Uses CFM RESET FAN SPEED RESET
MinOAT Type Instance Name) OA Flow= XXXXXCFM Min Fan Diff= 20%
Min OA Reset= None MinOAFlwSpt= 2000CFM Max Fan Diff= 50%
BSPOAOvrd= No Field Stn Rst= No Min Clg Spd= 40%
RstLmtSnsr= None Field Stn Cfg= VDC Des Clg Spd= 100%
EXTERNAL RESET Min CFM= 0 CFM BSP RESET
OA @ MinV/mA= 0% Max CFM= 10000 CFM MinRFEFTm= 120s
OA @ MaxV/mA= 100% V/A @Min CFM= 0.0/V BSP OvdST= 5s
Min V/mA= 0.0/V V/A @Max CFM= 10.0/V BSP OvdGain= 0.2
Max V/mA= 10.0/V OA CFM DB= 3% BSP OvdMaxChg= 4%
CO2 RESET OA CFM Period= 30s DAMPER LIMITING
IAQ Reset= Yes OA CFM Gain= 0.1 RstTLmt= 32.0ºF
PPM@DCVLmt= 800PPM OA CFM Max Chg= 5% RstTSmplTm= 5s
PPM@VntLmt= 1000PPM Design Flow= Yes RstTGain= 0.2
IAQ PPM= XXXXPPM Des Flo DB= 3% RstPAT= 60s
Min PPM= 0 PPM DF Period= 30s RstTMaxChg= 4%
Max PPM= 2000 PPM Des Flo Gain= 0.1 0–30% OA Max= 30%
V/A @Min PPM= 0.0/V DF Max Chg= 5% Min Inc Rate= 0.03
V/A @Max PPM= 10.0/V RH Lvl Pos= ____________ Max Inc Rate= 1.0
LH Lvl Pos= ____________

www.DaikinApplied.com 13 OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER

 All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Keypad/Display Menu Structure

Figure 6 continued: Commission Unit – Keypad/Display Menu Structure

See page 33 – 58
Commission Unit
Unit Set-Up ►
Timer Settings ► See page 29 and
SAF Set-Up ►
RF/EF Set-Up ► 49 – 50
Htg/Clg ChgOvr Set-Up ► Heating Set-Up OA Fan Set-Up Exp Valve Set-Up
Cooling Set-Up ► Htg Stage Time= 5min OA FAN STATUS EXP VALVE STATUS EXP VALVE SETUP
Cooling Set-Up (2) ► Htg DB= 2.0°F OA Fan1 Spd= XXX% EVI Pos= XXX% SSH DB= 2.0ºF
INV Cmp Set-Up ► Htg Period= 60s OA Fan1 Cmd= XXX% EVO Pos= XXX% SH Lo Base=
Var Cmp Set-Up ► Htg Gain= 0.8 OA Fan1Amps= XX.XA EVStatus=____________ 6.0ºF/5.0ºF/2.0ºF
Econo Set-Up ► Htg PAT= 120s Fault Code Details ► 1 REFRIG CIRCUIT STATUS (15THP/3–12THP/ClgOnly)
Min OA Set-Up ► Htg Max Chg= 10% OA Fan2 Spd= XXX% PTS= XXX.Xpsi SH Hi Base= 9.0ºF
Heating Set-Up ► Htg Lo OAT Lk= OA Fan2 Cmd= XXX% PTD= XXX.Xpsi Htg EVI Meth= SbC
OA Fan Set-Up ► 0.0°F – 45.0°F
(100% OA w/o ER)
OA Fan2Amps= XX.XA Suction SH= XX.XºF IC SC Spt= 9.0ºF
Exp Valve Set-Up ► Htg Hi OAT Lk= 55.0°F
Fault Code Details ► 1 Discharge SH= XX.XºF IC SC DB= 2.0ºF
Defrost Set-Up ► EffHtgOATLk= 55.0°F
REFRIG CIRCUIT STATUS Subcooling= XX.X°F HtgSC EVI Min=
Dehum Set-Up ► SplHtgOATLk= 55.0°F
PTS= XXX.Xpsi Eff SSH Spt= XX.X°F 12% (Unit Size≤6)
Energy Rec Set-Up ► OAT Diff= 2.0°F
PTD= XXX.Xpsi EffSH Base= XX.X°F 50% (Unit Size>6)
Head Pressure Set-Up ► Htg Reset= None
Disch Sat Tmp= XXX.X°F Eff SC Spt= XX.X°F Clg EVO Meth= SbC
Evap Cond Set-Up ► Min Htg Spt= 55.0°F
EffDshSatTSpt= XXX.X°F Eff SC Lo Lmt= XXX% OC SC Spt= 9.0ºF
D3 Set-Up ► Min Htg Spt @= 0
OA Temp= XXX°F SRT= XXX°F OC SC DB= 2.0ºF
Alarm Configuration ► Max Htg Spt= 120.0°F
INV Fin Temp= XXX°F Disch Sat Tmp= XXX.X°F ClgSC EVO Min= 12%
OA FAN SET UP Sucn Sat Tmp= XXX.X°F ManCtrl EV Op= Auto
Max Htg Spt@= 100
DischSatTDiff= 15°F IRT= XXX°F
Min DAT Ctrl= Yes
DischSatTDB= 2.0°F ORT= XXX°F
Min DAT Limit= 55.0°F
OA Fan Period= 25s
F&BP Method= OpenVlv
OA Fan Gain= 2.5
F&BP ChgOvrT= 37°F
OA Fan PAT= 75s
Occ Heating= Yes
OA Fan Max= 90%
Unocc Diff= 55.0°F
Htg Wmup Tm= 60s
IFB COMM STATUS ► 2
Htg Hld Period= 240s
Max Purge Hld= 20s
1, 2 See the expansion
Gas Derate V= 10.0v
MWUSensor= RAT
information on page 19

See page 56 See page 57

Evap Cond Set-Up D3 Set-Up Alarm Configuration
Cond Fan Spd= XXX% Itouch Vers= __________ ALARM LIMITS
CFan Spd Cmd= XXX% Unit D3 Addr= Jan–00 Hi Disch Temp= 170°F
Min Fan Speed= 33% Set D3 Addr= No Lo Disch Temp= 40°F
EvCond Stg Tm= 10min OA Unit Num= 0 Hi Return Temp= 120°F
Sump Temp= XXX°F OA Unit Amps= 0 ALARM OUT CONFIG
Min Sump T= 75.0°F OA Unit Addr= 0 Faults= Fast
Max Sump T= 85.0°F Set OA Unit= No Problems= Slow
Sump Dump Spt= 35.0°F Rst All OA= No Warnings= Off
Cndtvy= XXXS/CM Min Load= 20% ALARM DELAYS
Hi Cndtvy Spt= XXXS/CM Max Load= 50% Frz Delay Time= 30s
SmpWtrLvDly= 5min HiCapReset= No LP Delay= 2s
PostClgTime= 10min DATLoDiff= 10.0ºF LP Comp Delay=
SepFlshtime= 1min Eco Method= None 5s (410A)
65s (R22)
Dolphin Sys= No DATHiDiff= 5.0ºF
Air Flw Ing=120s
OA Enth Max= 24.5 BTU/lb
Sens Alm Dly= 30s
OA Hum Max= 0.0107lb/lb
(Units not displayed on HMI) Temp AlmDly= 30s
OAT Max= 84ºF ALARM CONFIG
Temp Display= DAT Emerg Stop= ManClr
Low Speed= 33%
Med Speed= 60%
Hi Speed= 100%

OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER 14 www.DaikinApplied.com

 All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Keypad/Display Menu Structure

See page 30 and

51 – 52 See page 53 – 54 See page 55
Defrost Set-Up Dehum Set-Up Energy Rec Set-Up Head Pressure Set-Up
Defrost State= _________ Dehum Method= None Energy Rcvy= Yes Wtr Reg Vlv= XXX%
Manual DF= No RH DB= 2% ER Wheel= ___________ Head P Circ 1= XXXPSI
MinCmpOpTm= 10min Dewpoint DB= 2°F Wheel Speed= XXX% Head P Circ 2= XXXPSI
MinAccCmpTm= 40min RH Period= 30s Whl Spd Cmd= XXX% Setpoint= 260PSI
MaxFrostTm= 120min RH Gain= 1 ER LAT= XXX°F Head Press DB= 10PSI
Defrost Temp= XXºF RH PAT= 30s ER EAT= XXX°F WRV Period= 10s
Tdef Adj= 0.0ºF RH Max Chg= 10% Min ExhT Diff= 2.0°F WRV Gain= 3.6
CmpOpTm= XXXmin RH Stg Time= 10min Max ExhT Diff= 6.0°F WRV PAT= 10s
AccCmpOpTm= XXXmin Stg Rht DB= 5.0°F ER Whl Stg Tm= 5min WRV Max Chg=7%
LoFrstAccTm= XXXmin Dehum Ctrl= Occupied ER Whl Off Tm= 20min WRV Init Tm= 60s
HiFrstAccTm= XXXmin Sensor Loc= Return Rel Humidity= XXX% Min WRV Pos=10%
Mn Lvg Coil T= 45.0°F Min Whl Spd= 5% Min WRV Tmp= 58°F
Mx Lvg Coil T= 52.0°F Intersect Pt= XXX.XºF Max WRV Tmp= 150°F
Rht Cmp Lmtg= Yes Fst Mgnt Meth= Timed WRV Act Time= 60s
Min Rheat Spt= 55.0°F OA Frst Temp= -20.56°F Min WRV Time= 60s
Max Rheat Spt= 65.0°F Defrost Time= 5min
RH Sens Type= VDC Defrost Period= 60min
RH Min Sig= 0.0V Defrst On Tm= 1s
RH Max Sig= 10.0V Defrst Off Tm= 24s
Min Dehum Spd= 33% ER Whl Period= 30s
Max Dehum Spd= 100% ER Whl Gain= 1.0
Rht Min Pos= 10% (RPS) ER Whl PAT= 30s
15% (MPS) ER Max Chg= 10%
5% (DPS, DPH)
LoERLATCmpLk= 45.0°F
RH Dec Rate= 1
RHOutMaxV= 10

www.DaikinApplied.com 15 OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER

 All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Keypad/Display Menu Structure

Figure 7: Service Menu – Keypad/Display Menu Structure

See page 62 – 68
Service Menus
Timer Settings ►
Operating Hours ►
Save/Restore Settings ►
Active Alarms ►
Alarm Log ►
Alarm Configuration ►
Analog Input Status ►
Universal I/O Status ►
Digital Input Status ► See page 33 – 34 See page 69 See page 62 See page 62
►

m
Digital Output Status Timer Settings Operating Hours Save/Restore Active Alarms
Network Input Status ► Service Time= 0min Supply Fan= XXXXXh Settings Alm Count: xx Clr Alms= No
Modbus Status ► Start Up= 180s Ret/Exh Fan= XXXXXh Save Params= No +Alarm 1: Alarm Type ►
D3 Input Status ► Recirculate= 180s Exh Out1= XXXXXh Rstr Params= No +Alarm 2: Alarm Type ►
Sensor Offsets ► Zero OA Time= 0min Exh Out2= XXXXXh Rstr Factory= No ●
Reset Counte= XXXX Tnt Override= 120min Mech Cool= ___________ SaveToCard= No ●
LoadFromCard= No

.co
Post Heat= 0s Var Comp= ___________ ●
Pwd Timeout= 10min Comp # 1= XXXXXh CreateTrace= No
Trace To SD= No
+Alarm 10: Alarm Type ►
List continues Low DAT= 6min Comp # 2= XXXXXh
on, page 18 ClgStateDelay= 300s Comp # 3= XXXXXh
Clg Stg Time= 5min Comp # 4= XXXXXh
Htg Stg Time= 5min Comp # 5= XXXXXh
Air Flw Ign= 120s
MinExStrtTm= 120s
Comp # 6= XXXXXh
Comp # 7= XXXXXh
3
MinExStopTm= 120s Comp # 8= XXXXXh
ER Whl Stg Tm= 5min Cmp Cooling= _________
ER Whl Off Tm= 20min INV Comp= ___________
es
Srvc Time Inc= 20s Comp 3= _____________
OffHtCIDelay= 120s Heating= XXXXXh
Cmp Heating= _________
Economizer= XXXXXh
Tnt Override= XXXXXh
Dehumid= XXXXXh
Reheat= _____________
ER Wheel= XXXXXh
uid
-g
all

OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER 16 www.DaikinApplied.com

 All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Keypad/Display Menu Structure

See page 63 See page 57

Alarm Log Alarm Configuration
Log Count: xx Clr Log= No ► ALARM LIMITS
+/-Alarm 1: Alarm Type ► Hi Disch Temp= 170°F 3, 4 See connection on page 19
+/-Alarm 2: Alarm Type ► Lo Disch Temp= 40°F
● Hi Return Temp= 120°F
● ALARM OUT CONFIG
● Faults= Fast
+/-Alarm 10: Alarm Type ► Problems= Slow
● Warnings= Off
● ALARM DELAYS
● Frz Delay Time= 30s
+/-Alarm 50: Alarm Type ► LP Delay= 2s
LP Comp Delay= 5s
Air Flw Ing=120s
Sens Alm Dly= 30s
Temp AlmDly= 30s

4 ALARM CONFIG
Emerg Stop= ManClr

See page 63 See page 64 See page 65 See page 65

Analog Input Status Universal I/O Status Digital Input Status Digital Output Status
MCB Al1= XXXXXXXX MCB X1= XXXXXXXX EMC X1= XXXXXXXX MCB DI1= ____________ MCB DO1= __________ EMC DO1= __________
MCB Al2= XXXXXXXX MCB X2= XXXXXXXX EMC X2= XXXXXXXX MCB DI2= ____________ MCB DO2= __________ EMC DO2= __________
MCB Al3= XXXXXXXX MCB X3= XXXXXXXX EMC X3= XXXXXXXX MCB DI3= ____________ MCB DO3= __________ EMC DO3= __________
MCB X4= XXXXXXXX EMC X4= XXXXXXXX MCB DI4= ____________ MCB DO4= __________ EMC DO4= __________
MCB X5= XXXXXXXX EMC X5= XXXXXXXX MCB DI5= ____________ MCB DO5= __________ EMC DO5= __________
MCB X6= XXXXXXXX EMC X6= XXXXXXXX MCB DI6= ____________ MCB DO6= __________ EMC DO6= __________
MCB X7= XXXXXXXX EMC X7= XXXXXXXX EMD DLA1= __________ MCB DO7= __________ EMD DO1= __________
MCB X8= XXXXXXXX EMC X8= XXXXXXXX MCB DO8= __________ EMD DO2= __________
EMA X1= XXXXXXXX EMD X1= XXXXXXXX MCB DO9= __________ EMD DO3= __________
EMA X2= XXXXXXXX EMD X2= XXXXXXXX MCB DO10= __________ EMD DO4= __________
EMA X3= XXXXXXXX EMD X3= XXXXXXXX EMA DO1= __________ EMD DO5= __________
EMA X4= XXXXXXXX EMD X4= XXXXXXXX EMA DO2= __________ EMD DO6= __________
EMA X5= XXXXXXXX EMD X5= XXXXXXXX EMA DO3= __________ EME DO1= __________
EMA X6= XXXXXXXX EMD X6= XXXXXXXX EMA DO4= __________ EME DO2= __________
EMA X7= XXXXXXXX EMD X7= XXXXXXXX EMA DO5= __________ EME DO3= __________
EMA X8= XXXXXXXX EMD X8= XXXXXXXX EMA DO6= __________ EME DO4= __________
EMB X1= XXXXXXXX EME X1= XXXXXXXX EMB DO1= __________ EME DO5= __________
EMB X2= XXXXXXXX EME X2= XXXXXXXX EMB DO2= __________ EME DO6= __________
EMB X3= XXXXXXXX EME X3= XXXXXXXX EMB DO3= __________
EMB X4= XXXXXXXX EME X4= XXXXXXXX EMB DO4= __________
EMB X5= XXXXXXXX EME X5= XXXXXXXX EMB DO5= __________
EMB X6= XXXXXXXX EME X6= XXXXXXXX EMB DO6= __________
EMB X7= XXXXXXXX EME X7= XXXXXXXX
EMB X8= XXXXXXXX EME X8= XXXXXXXX

www.DaikinApplied.com 17 OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER

 All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Keypad/Display Menu Structure

Figure 7 continued: Service Menu – Keypad/Display Menu Structure

See page 62 – 68
Service Menus
Timer Settings ►
Operating Hours ►
Save/Restore Settings ►
Active Alarms ►
Alarm Log ►
Alarm Configuration ►
Analog Input Status ►
Universal I/O Status ► See page 66 See page 67 See page 67 See page 68
Digital Input Status ► Network Input Status Modbus Status D3 Status Sensor Offsets
Digital Output Status ► Net OAT In= XXX.XºF SF MB Status=_________ D3 Comm Sts= ________ Disch Air= 0.0ºF
Network Input Status ► Net Space In= XXX.XºF RF/EF MB Status=______ D3 Addr Err= __________ Return Air= 0.0ºF
Modbus Status ► NetCurrState= _________ ER MB Status=________ D3 On/Off= ___________ Space Temp= 0.0ºF
D3 Input Status ► NetNextState= _________ OF MB Status= ________ D3 Mode= ____________ OA Temp= 0.0ºF
Sensor Offsets ► NetTmToNxtSt= XXXXXmin IFB MB Status= ________ D3 Clg Spt= XXX.XºF EF/LC Temp= 0.0ºF
Reset Counte= XXXX Net App Mode= ________ D3 MB Status=_________ D3 Htg Spt= XXX.XºF EW Temp= 0.0ºF
Net Cl Ena Sw= X.X SAFVFD Ex Flt= _______ D3 Fan Spd= __________ Mixed Air= 0.0ºF
Net Cl Ena VI= XXX% RxFVFD Ex Flt= _______ D3 Min Load= XXX% MAT LON SCC= 0.0ºF
Net Ht Ena Sw= X.X ER VFD Ex Flt= ________ D3 Max Load= XXX% ER LAT= 0.0ºF
Net Ht Ena VI= XXX% OF VFD Ex Flt= ________ D3 Eco Ena= __________ ER EAT= 0.0ºF
Net Ec Ena Sw= X.X MB Resistance= Yes OA Enthalpy= XXXBTU/lb Sump Temp= 0.0ºF
Net Ec Ena VI= XXX% ECM Config= Done OA Hum Ratio= g/kg DRT1= 0.0ºF
Net SAF Cap= XXX% D3 SWVers= XXXXXXXXXX DRT3= 0.0ºF
Net RAF Cap= XXX% OAAdd1–16= __________ SRT= 0.0ºF
Net ExhF Cap= XXX% OAAdd17–32= _________ DFT= 0.0ºF
Net CFlw Sw= XXX% OAAdd33–49= _________ IRT= 0.0ºF
Net Flw Val= XXX% OAAdd50–64= _________ ORT= 0.0ºF
Net Space IAQ= XXXXPPM SetOAAddr= XX
Net Rel Humid= XXX% CurrOAAddr= XX
Net DATClgSpt= XXX.XºF CurrOAAmps= XXXA
Net DATHtgSpt= XXX.XºF CurrOARLA= XXXA
nviSetpoint= XXX.XºF
OccManCmd= _________
Net Min OA= XXX%
nvoEffSpt= XXX.XºF
nciOccClgSpt= XXX.XºF
nciOccHtgSpt= XXX.XºF
nciHVACType= _________

OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER 18 www.DaikinApplied.com

 All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Keypad/Display Menu Structure

3 4
See page 73 See page 62 See page 63
Alarm Lists Active Alarms Alarm Log Alarm Details
Active Alarms ► Alm Count: xx Clr Alms= No Log Count: xx Clr Log= No ► +/-Alarm 1: Alarm Type
Alarm Log ► +Alarm 1: Alarm Type ► +/-Alarm 1: Alarm Type ► MM/DD/YYYY HH:MM:SS
Event Log ► +Alarm 2: Alarm Type ► +/-Alarm 2: Alarm Type ►
LogCt:** Clr Log= -:No ● ●
+Event 1 ► ● ●
+Event 2 ► ● ●
● +Alarm 10: Alarm Type ► +/-Alarm 10: Alarm Type ►
● ●
● ●
●
+Event 49 ►
+Event 50 ► +/-Alarm 50: Alarm Type ►
Event Details ►
+Alarm: Alarm Type ►
Alarm Date
Alarm Time

Expansion Information
1 2
See page 117
Fault Code Details IFB Comm Status
ACTIVE FAULT CODES IFB SW Vers= VP0329008
INVAlarmCode=______ IFBCommStatus=____
Code Text PrvCommStatus=_______
OF1AlarmCode=_______ MM/DD/YYYY HH:MM:SS
Code Text ACS1 DataRcvd=_______
OF2AlarmCode=_______ ACS3 DataRcvd=_______
Code Text
PREVIOUS FAULT CODES
PrvINVAlmCode=_______
Code Text
MM/DD/YYYY HH:MM:SS
PrvOF1AlmCode=______
Code Text
MM/DD/YYYY HH:MM:SS
PrvOF2AlmCode=______
Code Text
MM/DD/YYYY HH:MM:SS

www.DaikinApplied.com 19 OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER

 All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Keypad/Display Menu Structure

Figure 8: BMS Communications – Keypad/Display Menu Structure

See page 70
BMS Communications
LON Set-Up ►
BACnet MSTP Set-Up ►
BACnet IP Set-Up ►
D-Net Set-Up ►
Network Unit Set-Up ►

IM 918 IM 917 IM 916 See page 70

LON Set-Up BACnet MSTP Set-Up BACnet IP Set-Up D-Net Set-Up Network Unit Set-Up
Neuron ID= xxxxxxxxxxxx ApplyMSTPChgs= No ApplyIPChgs= No ApplyD-NetChgs= No Space Sensor= Local/Net
SndHrtBT= 60s Name= xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx Name= xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx DHCP= On UNIT MODE SETTINGS
RcvHrtBT= 30s Dev Instance= xxxxxxxxxx Dev Instance= xxxxxxxxxx Act IP= 0.0.0.0 Ctrl Mode= Off
MinSndTm= 0s MSTP Address= XXX UDP Port= 47808 ActMsk- 0.0.0.0 Occ Mode= Auto/net
Comm Status=_________ Baud Rate= 76800 DHCP= On ActGwy= xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx RESET OPTIONS
LON BSP= X.XXX Max Master= 127 Act IP= 0.0.0.0 Gvn IP= 127.0.0.1 Clg Reset= None
LON App Ver= XXXX Max Info Frm= 10 ActMsk- 0.0.0.0 GvnMsk= 255.255.255.0 Htg Reset= None
Unit Support= English ActGwy= xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx GvnGwy= 127.0.0.1 AplyMinOAChg= No
Term Resistor= No Gvn IP= 127.0.0.1 Remote Srv En= Disable (Uses MinOA Type
Instance Name)
NC Dev 1= 0 GvnMsk= 255.255.255.0 Comm Status= ________
Min OA Reset= None
NC Dev 2= 0 GvnGwy= 127.0.0.1 D-net BSP= X.X.XX
Apply Changes= No
AHU Loc/Net= Network Unit Support= English
HEAT/COOL CHANGEOVER
Comm Status= ________ NC Dev 1= 0
Ctrl Temp SRC= RAT
RstOutofSrvc= Done NC Dev 2= 0
AplyTstatChg= No
BACnet BSP= X.X.XX Comm Status= ________
Use Tstat Spt= No
AHU Loc/Net= Network
Occ Clg Spt= 72°F
Comm Status= ________
Occ Htg Spt= 68°F
RstOutofSrvc= Done
FAN CONTROL OPTIONS
BACnet BSP= X.X.XX
SAF Ctlr= DSP
RF/EF Ctlr= Tracking

Figure 9: Trending – Keypad/Display Menu Structure

See page 74 – 77
Trending
Trending Ena= No
Apply Chgs= No
Sample Time= 300s
TrendOnOff= Off
Export Data= No
Clear Trend= Done
Points 1–8 (Fixed) ►
Points 9–24 (from List) ►
Points 25–27 (with IDs) ►
Points 28–30 (with IDs) ►

Points 1–8 (Fixed) Points 9–24 (from List) Points 25–27 (with IDs) Points 28–30 (with IDs)
Point 1= UnitSt Point 9= None Point 25 Point 28
Point 2= Clg% Point 10= None ID= F0AF0000 ID= F0AF0000
Point 3= Htg% Point 11= None Type= 0000 Type= 0000
Point 4= SAF% Point 12= None Mem Num= 0100 Mem Num= 0100
Point 5= OAD/Eco% Point 13= None Point 26 Point 29
Point 6= CtrlTmp Point 14= None ID= F0AF0000 ID= F0AF0000
Point 7= DAT Point 15= None Type= 0000 Type= 0000
Point 8= OAT Point 16= None Mem Num= 0100 Mem Num= 0100
Point 17= None Point 27 Point 30
Point 18= None ID= F0AF0000 ID= F0AF0000
Point 19= None Type= 0000 Type= 0000
Point 20= None Mem Num= 0100 Mem Num= 0100
Point 21= None
Point 22= None
Point 23= None
Point 24= None

OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER 20 www.DaikinApplied.com

 All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Menu Descriptions

Menu Descriptions

Quick Menu
Items in the Quick Menu contain basic unit operating status
and control set point parameters. The items shown in the Quick
Menu are Read Only if a valid password has not been entered.
The following are brief descriptions of the Quick Menu items.
No password is required to view the Quick Menu.

Table 1: Quick Menu

Menu Display Name Default Setting Range Password Level
Off

m
Start
Recirc
FanOnly
Unit State= — None
MinDAT
Htg
Econo
Clg

.co
Enable
OffMan
OffMnCtl
Unit Status= — 6
OffNet
OffAlm
OffFnRty
Inactive
MWU Status= — 6
Active
Dehum Status= — Active/Inactive 6
es
Off
HeatOnly
CoolOnly
Ctrl Mode= Off 6
FanOnly
HeatCool
Auto/Net
Occ
Unocc
uid

Occ Mode= Auto/Net 6

TntOvrd
Auto/Net
Clg Capacity= — 0–100% None
OAD/Econo Cap= — 0–100% None
Htg Capacity= — 0–100% None
Reheat Capacity= — 0–100% None
Control Temp= — -50.0–200.0°F None
Occ Clg Spt = 72.0°F 0.0–100.0°F None
-g

Occ Htg Spt = 68.0°F 0.0–100.0°F None

Disch Air= — -50.0–250.0°F None
DAT Clg Spt= 55.0°F 40.0–100.0°F None
DAT Htg Spt= 85.0°F 40.0–140.0°F None
Min DAT Limit= 55.0°F 0.0–70.0°F None
all

SAF Capacity= — 0–100% None

DSP — 0.2–4.0 in None
DuctSP Spt= 1.0 in 0.2–4.0 in None
RF/EF Capacity= — 0–100% None
BSP= — -0.25–0.25 in None
BldgSP Spt= 0.050 in -0.25–0.25 in None
OA Temp= — -50.0–200.0°F None
EW Temp= — -50.0–150.0°F None
Rel Humidity= — 0–100% None

www.DaikinApplied.com 21 OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER

 All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Menu Descriptions

Unit State is a status only item which indicates the state of DAT Htg Spt is a status only item which indicates the
operation in which the unit is currently operating. The unit can temperature that the DAT should be maintained at when in the
be in any of the operating states shown. heating mode of operation. Once a valid password has been
Unit Status is a status only item which indicates the status entered this item becomes an adjustable item.
of operation in which the unit is currently operating. The unit Min DAT Limit is a status only item which indicates the
status can be any of the status values shown. discharge air low limit temperature on CAV zone control
MWU Status is a status only item that indicates whether or not units. Heating will be activated to maintain this setting when
the unit is in the heating state due to MWU function. the discharge temperature falls below it during the Fan Only
operating state. On VAV or CAV discharge control units, the
Dehum Status is a status only item which indicates the status minimum discharge temperature limit is the DAT Clg Spt. Once
of operation of the dehumidifier. The dehumidifier can be active a valid password has been entered this item becomes an
or inactive. adjustable item.
Ctrl Mode is an adjustable item which sets the operating mode SAF Capacity is a status only item which indicates the
of the unit. The unit can be in any of the modes shown. capacity of the supply air fan.
Occ Mode is an adjustable item which sets the occupancy DSP is a status only item which displays the current duct static
mode of the unit. The unit can be in occupied, unoccupied, pressure reading.
tenant override, or auto modes.
DuctSP Spt= is a status only item which indicates the duct
Clg Capacity is a status only item which indicates the static pressure set point used for controlling the VFD for the
percentage of the unit maximum cooling capacity currently supply air fan. The VFD is modulated to maintain the duct
operating. pressure at this value. Once a valid password has been
OAD/Econo Cap is a status only item which indicates the entered this item becomes an adjustable item.
percentage that the outdoor damper or economizer valve is RF/EF Capacity is a status only item indicating the capacity of
currently open. the return fan/exhaust air fans.
Htg Capacity is a status only item which indicates the BSP is a status only item which displays the current building
percentage of the unit maximum heating capacity currently static pressure reading.
operating.
BldgSP Spt is a status only item which indicates the building
Reheat Capacity is a status only item which indicates the static pressure set point used for controlling the return/exhaust
percentage of the unit maximum reheat capacity currently fan VFD. The return/exhaust fan VFD is modulated to maintain
operating. the building static pressure sensor input to this value. Once
Control Temp is a status only item which displays the current a valid password has been entered this item becomes an
value of the “Control Temperature.” The “Control Temperature” adjustable item.
is defined as the temperature input selected by the Control OA Temp is a status only item which displays the current
Temperature Source parameter. For example, if the Control temperature reading from the unit mounted outdoor air
Temperature Source parameter is set to “Return,” then the temperature sensor. This sensor is standard on all units.
control temperature parameter reads the same value as the
Return Air parameter. EW Temp is a status only item that displays the current
temperature reading from the unit mounted entering water
Occ Clg Spt is a status only item which indicates the temperature sensor. The sensor is standard on all water-cooled
temperature in which the unit will go into the cooling mode of units.
operation. Once a valid password has been entered this item
becomes an adjustable item. Rel Humidity is a status only item that displays the current
relative humidity reading from the optional humidity sensor.
Occ Htg Spt is a status only item which indicates the
temperature in which the unit will go into the heating mode of
operation. Once a valid password has been entered this item
becomes an adjustable item.
Disch Air is a status only item which displays the current
temperature reading from the unit’s discharge air temperature
sensor (DAT). This sensor is standard on all units.
DAT Clg Spt is a status only item which indicates the
temperature that the DAT should be maintained at when it is
in the cooling mode of operation. Once a valid password has
been entered this item becomes an adjustable item.

OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER 22 www.DaikinApplied.com

 All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Menu Descriptions

View/Set Unit Menus

Unit Status Settings
The “Unit Status Settings” menu provides a summary of
basic unit status and control items. This menu summarizes
the current operating state of the unit, giving the operating
state the unit is in, along with the current capacity level of that
operating state.

Table 2: Unit Status/Settings

Item Display Name Default Setting Range Password Level
Off
Start
Recirc
FanOnly
Unit State= — 6
MinDAT
Htg
Econo
Clg
Enable
OffMan
OffMnCtl
Unit Status= — 6
OffNet
OffAlm
OffFnRty
Inactive
MWU Status= — 6
Active
Dehum Status — Active/Inactive 6
Off
HeatOnly
CoolOnly
Ctrl Mode= Off 6
FanOnly
HeatCool
Auto
Enabled
None
OffAmb
Clg Status= — 6
OffAlarm
OffNet
OffMan
Enabled
None
OffAmb
Htg Status= — 6
OffAlarm
OffNet
OffMan
Enabled
None
OffAmb
Econo Status= — OffAlarm 6
OffNet
OffMan
OffDehum
Clg Capacity= — 0–100% 6
Htg Capacity= — 0–100% 6
Reheat Cap — 0–100% 6
SAF Capacity= — 0–100% 6
RF/EF Capacity= — 0–100% 6
Rel Humidity= — 0–100% 6
Net Emrg Ovrd= Normal Normal, Off 6
Off
HeatOnly
Net App Mode= Auto CoolOnly 6
FanOnly
Auto

www.DaikinApplied.com 23 OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER

 All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Menu Descriptions

Unit State is a status only item which indicates the state of Htg Capacity is a status only item which indicates the
operation in which the unit is currently operating. The unit can percentage of the unit maximum heating capacity currently
be in any of the operating states shown. operating.
Unit Status is a status only item which indicates the status Reheat Capacity is a status only item which indicates the
of operation in which the unit is currently operating. The unit percentage of the unit maximum reheat capacity currently
status can be any of the status values shown. operating.
MWU Status is a status only item that indicates whether or not SAF Capacity is a status only item which indicates the
the unit is in the heating state due to MWU function. capacity of the supply air fan.
Dehum Status is a status only item which indicates the status RF/EF Capacity is a status only item indicating the capacity of
of operation of the dehumidifier. The dehumidifier can be active the return fan/exhaust air fans.
or inactive. Rel Humidity is a status only item that displays the current
Ctrl Mode is an adjustable item which sets the operating mode relative humidity reading from the optional humidity sensor.
of the unit. The unit can be in any of the modes shown. Net Emrg Ovrd is an adjustable item which indicates if the
Clg Status is a status only item which indicates whether or not unit was shut down in an emergency situation via a network
mechanical cooling is currently allowed. If cooling is disabled, command.
the reason is indicated. Net App Mode is a network adjustable item which indicates
Htg Status is a status only item which indicates whether or not that the unit is set for network off, cooling only, heating only,
heating is currently allowed. If heating is disabled, the reason fan only or auto heating/cooling operation via a network signal.
is indicated. This item has no affect on the unit operation unless the Ctrl
Econo Status is a status only item which indicates whether Mode item is set to “Auto.”
or not the economizer is currently enabled. If economizer is
enabled, the reason is indicated.
Clg Capacity is a status only item which indicates the
percentage of the unit maximum cooling capacity currently
operating.

OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER 24 www.DaikinApplied.com

 All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Menu Descriptions

Occupancy
Menus in the Occupancy menu contain status and control
items that relate to unit occupied/unoccupied operation.

Table 3: Occupancy Menu

Item Display Name Default Setting Range Password Level
Occ
Occupancy= Unocc 6
TntOvrd
Occ
Unocc
Occ Mode= Auto/Net 6
TntOvrd
Auto/Net
None
NetSchd
IntSchd
OneEvnt
OccSrc= - RemoteSw 6
OccManCmd
OccMode
TStatTO
ManTO
UnoccDehum
UnoccClg
UnoccHtg
UnoccSrc= - 6
IntOptStrt
NetOptStrt
None
Tnt Ovrde Time= 0 0–300min 6

Occupancy is a status only item which indicates whether the UnoccSrc is a status only item which indicates the input
unit is currently in an occupied, unoccupied, or tenant override source or function that is responsible for running the unit while
mode of operation. the Occupancy parameter to “Unocc.”
OccMode is an adjustable item which allows the unit to be Tnt Ovrd Time is an adjustable item which indicates the
set for manual occupied or unoccupied operation, automatic amount of time remaining for unit operation since tenant
operation based on a time schedule input or manual tenant override operation was activated.
override operation.
OccSrc is a status only item which indicates the input source
or function that is responsible for setting the Occupancy
parameter to “Occ” or “TntOvrd.”

www.DaikinApplied.com 25 OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER

 All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Menu Descriptions

Temperatures
Menus in the Temperatures menu contain unit temperature
status information.

Table 4: Temperature Menu

Item Display Name Default Setting Range Password Level
Control Temp= — -50.0–200.0°F 6
Disch Air= — -50.0–250.0°F 6
Return Air= — -20.0–200.0°F 6
Space Temp= — -0.0–150.0°F 6
OA Temp= — -50.0–200.0°F 6

m
EF/LC Temp= — -50.0–250.0°F 6
EW Temp= — -50.0–150.0°F 6
Mixed Air= — -50.0–250.0°F 6
ER LAT — -50.0–200.0°F 6
ER EAT — -50.0–200.0°F 6

.co
Sump Temp — -50.0–150.0°F 6
PA Temp — -50.0–200.0°F 2
DRT2= — -50.0–392.0°F 6
DRT3= — -50.0–392.0°F 6

Control Temp is a status only item which indicates the current EW Temp is a status only item that displays the current
Control Temperature value. temperature reading from the unit mounted entering water
temperature sensor. The sensor is standard on all water-cooled
es
Disch Air is a status only item which displays the current
temperature reading from the unit’s discharge air temperature units.
sensor (DAT). This sensor is standard on all units. Mixed Air is a status only item that displays the current
Return Air is a status only item which displays the current temperature reading from the unit mounted mixed air
temperature reading from the unit’s return air temperature temperature sensor. The sensor is standard on all Self
sensor (RAT). Contained units.
uid

ER LAT is status only item which displays the current

Space Temp is a status only item which displays the current
discharge air temperature leaving the optional energy recovery
space (or zone) temperature reading from the optional unit
wheel.
space air temperature sensor input. If an optional space
temperature sensor is not installed and space temperature ER Exh T is status only item which displays the current
value is not supplied by a network, the SpaceT Present= exhaust air temperature leaving the optional energy recovery
item in the Setup menu should be set to “No” to disable the wheel.
alarm function associated with an open circuit at the space Sump Temp is a status only item that displays the current
temperature sensor input.
-g

evaporative condenser sump temperature.

OA Temp is a status only item which displays the current DRT2 is a status only item which displays the current
temperature reading from the unit mounted outdoor air
discharge refrigerant line temperature sensor reading for
temperature sensor. variable speed compressor on circuit #2.
EF/LC Temp is a status only item which displays the current DRT3 is a status only item which displays the current
all

entering fan/leaving coil temperature reading from the unit discharge refrigerant line temperature sensor reading for
mounted temperature sensor. This sensor is available on
variable speed compressor on circuit #3.
RTU units with dehumidification capability. This sensor is also
installed on RTU units equipped with either gas or electric
heat and is used by the controller to calculate the heat rise
across the heat exchanger by comparing it to the discharge
air temperature input. The controller uses this information to
protect the heat exchanger against overheating.

OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER 26 www.DaikinApplied.com

 All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Menu Descriptions

Flow Status
Table 5: Flow Status Menu
Item Display Name Default Setting Range Password Level
NoFlow
Airflow= — 6
Flow
NoFlow
Waterflow= — 6
Flow
Off
Water Pump= — 6
On
Off
Supply Fan= 6
On

Airflow is a status only item that indicates whether or not supplied pump when water flow is required. For field wiring
discharge airflow is detected. Airflow status is sensed by a requirements for using this output refer to “Field Wiring” in the
binary input delivered to the controller by a differential pressure MicroTech III Installation Manual (IM 919). The Pump Start
switch (PC7). On VAV units duct static pressure is also a factor Output is turned on whenever the economizer bypass valve
in the indication of airflow. is open, the unit is in the Econo or Cooling operating state,
Waterflow is a status only item that indicates whether or not economizer flush mode is active or a Freeze fault or Freeze
water flow is detected on a water cooled unit. Water flow status problem alarm is active or has been active within the past 10
is sensed by a binary input delivered to the controller by an minutes. Otherwise the Pump Start Output is off.
optional water flow sensor (WF1) or from a network supplied Supply Fan is a status only item which indicates whether or
water flow input. not the controller is commanding the unit supply fan on.
Water pump is a status only item that indicates whether or Ret/Exh Fan is a status only item which indicates whether or
not the Pump Start Output is active on a water cooled unit. not the controller is commanding the unit RF/EF fan on.
The pump start output is available for field use to start a field

SAF Speed Control

Table 6: Supply Fan Speed Menu
Item Display Name Default Setting Range Password Level
SAF Speed= — 0–100% 6
Speed Cmd= — 0–100% 6
Duct Press= — 0.0–5.0 in 6
DuctSP Spt= 1.0 in 0.2–4.0 in 6
IAQ PPM = 6
OA Flow = 6
Bldg Press = 6
BldgSP Spt 6

SAF Speed is a status only item that indicates the current OA Flow = is a status only item that indicates the current CFM
supply fan speed. value when the supply fan control method is set to CFM. Note:
Speed Cmd is a status only item that indicates the current CFM option only available on 100% OA units that have the unit
supply fan VFD commanded speed. control type set to Zone or DAC.

Duct Press is a status only item which indicates the current Bldg Press = is a status only item which indicates the current
pressure of the supply air ductwork. The duct pressure is building static pressure when the supply fan control method is
measured at the location in which the duct static pressure tap set to BSP. Note: BSP option only available on 100% OA units
was field installed. This device is not factory installed. that have the unit control type set to Zone or DAC.

DuctSP SPT is an adjustable item which sets the duct static BldgSP Spt is an adjustable item which sets the building
pressure set point used for controlling the VFD for the supply static pressure set point used for controlling the VFD when the
air fan. The VFD is modulated to maintain the duct pressure at supply fan control method is set to BSP. Note: BSP option only
this value. available on 100% OA units that have the unit control type set
to Zone or DAC.
IAQ PPM = is a status only item that indicates the current CO2
level when the supply fan control method is set to CO2.
Note: CO2 option only available on 100% OA units that have
the unit control type set to Zone or DAC.

www.DaikinApplied.com 27 OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER

 All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Menu Descriptions

RF/EF Control
Table 7: Return/Exhaust Fan Speed Menu
Item Display Name Default Setting Range Password Level
RF/EF Speed= - 0–100% 6
Speed Cmd= - 0–100% 6
Bldg Press= - -0.25–0.25 in 6
BldgSP Spt= 0.050 in -0.25–0.25 in 6

RF/EF Speed is a status only item that indicates the current BldgSP Spt is an adjustable item which sets the building static
return/exhaust fan VFD speed. pressure set point used for controlling the VFD for the return/
Speed Cmd is a status only item that indicates the current exhaust air fan. The VFD is modulated to maintain the building
return/exhaust fan VFD commanded speed. pressure at this value.

Bldg Press is a status only item which indicates the building

static pressure at the building static pressure sensor location.

Cooling
Table 8: Cooling Menu
Item Display Name Default Setting Range Password Level
Occ Clg Spt = 72.0°F 0.0–100.0°F 6
Unocc Clg Spt= 85.0°F 40.0–100.0°F 6
DAT Clg Spt= 55.0°F 40.0–100.0°F 6

Occ Clg Spt an adjustable item which sets the temperature DAT Clg Spt is an adjustable item used by the controller to
above which the unit will go into the cooling mode of operation. set the DAT cooling setpoint. This value is adjustable only on
DAC units when it is not being set by a reset schedule. It is not
Unocc Clg Spt is an adjustable item which sets the zone
adjustable on CAV units.
temperature above which the unit starts up and provides
unoccupied cooling (night setup) during unoccupied periods.
NOTE: Setting this to its maximum value will disable
unoccupied cooling.

Economizer
Table 9: Economizer Menu
Item Display Name Default Setting Range Password Level
OAD/Econo Pos= — 0–100% 6
DAT Clg Spt= 55.0°F 40.0–100.0°F 6
Min OA Pos= — 0–100% 6
Unavail
FreeClgStatus= — 6
Avail
Occ Clg Spt = 72.0°F 0.0–100.0°F 6
Unocc Clg Spt= 85.0°F 40.0–100.0°F 6

OAD/Econo Pos is a status only item that is used to FreeClg Status is a status only item that indicates whether
indicate percentage that the economizer dampers/waterside airside economizer free cooling is available or unavailable
economizer valve is open. based on a definable ambient temperature range.
DAT Clg Spt is an adjustable item used by the controller to Occ Clg Spt an adjustable item which sets the temperature
set the DAT cooling setpoint. This value is adjustable only on above which the unit will go into the cooling mode of operation.
DAC units when it is not being set by a reset schedule. It is not Unocc Clg Spt is an adjustable item which sets the zone
adjustable on CAV units. temperature above which the unit starts up and provides
Min OA Pos is a status only item which indicates the current unoccupied cooling (night setup) during unoccupied periods.
minimum position of the outdoor air damper. NOTE: Setting this to its maximum value will disable
unoccupied cooling.

OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER 28 www.DaikinApplied.com

 All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Menu Descriptions

Min OA Damper
Table 10: Min OA Damper Menu
Item Display Name Default Setting Range Password Level
Min OA Pos= - 0–100% 6
Vent Limit= 20% 0–100% 6
LoFlo V Lmt= 30% 0–100% 6
DCV Limit= 10% 0–100% 6
VentLmt
DesFlw
FldFlw
Network
Ext VDC
Min OA SCR= — Ext mA 4
IAQ VDC
BSPOvrd
FanDiff
DCVLmt
ZeroOA

Min OA Pos is a status only item which indicates the current Vent Limit is an adjustable item that sets the value of the
minimum position of the outdoor damper. This value does not Ventilation Limit on a CAV unit or when a VAV unit is at 100%
go above a value called the Ventilation Limit and does not go discharge fan speed.
below a value called the Demand Control Ventilation Limit.
LoFlo Vent Limit is an adjustable item that sets the maximum
On CAV units the Ventilation Limit and the Demand Control value for the Ventilation Limit on a VAV unit. The ventilation
Ventilation Limit are fixed values set equal to the Vent Limit= limit is raised toward this value as the discharge fan speed
and DCV Limit= parameters. On VAV units the OA Damper decreases toward the Min Clg Spd value.
Position increases from the Vent Limit= value to the LoFloVent DCV Limit is an adjustable item that sets the value of the
Limit= value as the VFD speed goes from 100% down to the Demand Control Ventilation Limit on a CAV unit or when a
Min Clg Spd= value. The Demand Control Ventilation Limit in VAV unit is at 100% discharge fan speed. This item is only
this VAV case is determined by the Ventilation Limit X DVC used when the “Min OA Reset=” is set to something other than
Limit=/Vent Limit=. When the Min OA Reset= parameter is “None.”
set to “None” the Min OA Pos= value is set to the Ventilation
Limit. If Min OA Reset= is set to Network, Ext VDC, Ext mA, Min OA Src = is a status only item that indicates the action that
IAQ VDC, or IAQ mA, the Min OA Pos= varies between the is winning for control of the OA damper position.
Ventilation Limit and the Demand Control Ventilation Limit as
the reset signal varies from its maximum to minimum value.

Heating Menu
The Heating menu provides a summary of the control The control temperature can be return temperature, space
parameters for units with heating. The unit’s heating mode temperature or outside air temperature. The unit goes into the
of operation is controlled by the control temperature and the heating mode of operation when the control temperature is
heating setpoint temperature. The unit goes into the heating below the heating setpoint by more than ½ the deadband.
mode of operation by analyzing the control temperature.

Table 11: Heating Menu

Item Display Name Default Setting Range Password Level
Occ Htg Spt = 68.0°F 0.0–100.0°F 6
Unocc Htg Spt= 55.0°F 40.0–100.0°F 6
MWU Spt= 70.0°F 40.0–100.0°F 6
DAT Htg Spt= 85.0°F 40.0–140.0°F 6

Occ Htg Spt is an adjustable item which sets the control MWU Spt is an adjustable item which sets the heating
temperature below which the unit will go into the heating mode setpoint to be used during morning warm up on a discharge
of operation. temperature control unit. CAV units use the Occ Htg Spt for
Unocc Htg Spt is an adjustable item which sets the zone morning warmup operation.
temperature below which the unit starts up and provides DAT Htg Spt is an adjustable parameter which sets the
unoccupied heating (night setback) during unoccupied periods. heating discharge set point.

www.DaikinApplied.com 29 OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER

 All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Menu Descriptions

Dehumidification
Table 12: Dehumidification Menu

Item Display Name Default Setting Range Password Level

Disabled
Dehum Status= — 6
Enabled
Rel Humidity= — 0–100% 6
Dewpoint= — -50–150°F 6
None
None
Dehum Method= Rel Hum 6
Always
DewPt
RH Setpoint= 50% 0–100% 6
Dewpoint Spt= 50°F 0–100°F 6
Reheat Spt= — 40.0–100.0°F 6
Reheat Cap= — 0–100% 6

Dehum Status is a status only item that indicates whether RH Setpoint is an adjustable item used to set the relative
dehumidification is enabled or disabled. humidity value at which the relative humidity will be controlled
Rel Humidity is a status only item that indicates the current to during dehumidification operation.
relative humidity reading of the sensor. Dewpoint Spt is an adjustable item used to set the dewpoint
DewPoint is a status only item that indicates the current value at which the dewpoint with will be controlled to during
dew point value that is calculated by the controller using the dehumidification operation.
Rel Humidity= value and either the Space Temp= or Return Reheat Spt is a status only item which is used to indicate
Air= value, depending on the setting of the Humidity Sensor the DAT temperature to which the HGRH valve will be
Location. This parameter can either be set to “Space” or controlled in the Cooling and Fan Only operating states while
“Return.” dehumidification operation is active. The Reheat Spt= equals
Dehum Method is an adjustable item used to set the the DAT Cooling Setpoint for DAT controlled units and will vary
dehumidification method to either “RH” or “DewPt.” When in between the Min Reheat Spt= and Max Reheat Spt= for
this parameter is set to “RH,” dehumidification operation Zone Controlled units.
is controlled to maintain the Rel Humidity= value at the Reheat Cap is a status only item that indicates the current
RH Setpoint=. When this parameter is set to “DewPt,” reheat capacity value.
dehumidification operation is controlled to maintain the Dew
Point value at the Dewpoint Spt=. When this parameter is
set to “Always” dehumidification will be active as long as
mechanical cooling is not disabled.

OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER 30 www.DaikinApplied.com

 All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Menu Descriptions

Date/Time/Schedules
Time/Date
Table 13: Time/Date
Item Display Name Default Setting Range Password Level
Time= HH:MM:SS 6
Date= MM/DD/YYYY 6
UTC Diff= 6

Time is an adjustable item that sets the current time. UTC Diff is an adjustable parameter that can be set to indicate

m
Date is an adjustable item that sets the current date. how the local time where the unit is situated differs from the
Coordinated Universal Time (UTC).

Daily Schedule Menu

.co
The Daily Schedule sets the start and stop times for each of
the days of the week. One start and one stop time can be set
for each day.

Table 14: Daily Schedule Menu

Item Display Name Default Setting Range Password Level
Mon= HH:MM — HH:MM 00:00 — 23:59 6
es
Tue= HH:MM — HH:MM 00:00 — 23:59 6
Wed= HH:MM — HH:MM 00:00 — 23:59 6
Thu= HH:MM — HH:MM 00:00 — 23:59 6
Fri= HH:MM — HH:MM 00:00 — 23:59 6
Sat= HH:MM — HH:MM 00:00 — 23:59 6
Sun= HH:MM — HH:MM 00:00 — 23:59 6
uid

Hol= HH:MM — HH:MM 00:00 — 23:59 6

Holiday Schedule Menu

The Holiday Schedule is used to set the start and stop times
for up to 10 different holidays.
-g

Table 15: Holiday Schedule Menu

Item Display Name Default Setting Range Password Level
Hol 1= MMMDD/99–MMMDD/99 00/00/00–12/31/99 6
Hol 2= MMMDD/99–MMMDD/99 00/00/00–12/31/99 6
Hol 3= MMMDD/99–MMMDD/99 00/00/00–12/31/99 6
all

Hol 4= MMMDD/99–MMMDD/99 00/00/00–12/31/99 6

Hol 5= MMMDD/99–MMMDD/99 00/00/00–12/31/99 6
Hol 6= MMMDD/99–MMMDD/99 00/00/00–12/31/99 6
Hol 7= MMMDD/99–MMMDD/99 00/00/00–12/31/99 6
Hol 8= MMMDD/99–MMMDD/99 00/00/00–12/31/99 6
Hol 9= MMMDD/99–MMMDD/99 00/00/00–12/31/99 6
Hol 10= MMMDD/99–MMMDD/99 00/00/00–12/31/99 6

www.DaikinApplied.com 31 OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER

 All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Menu Descriptions

One Event Schedule Menu

The One Event Schedule is used to set the start and stop times for one event.
Table 16: One Event Schedule Menu
Item Display Name Default Setting Range Password Level
Beg= MMMDD/99 @ HH:MM 00/00/00-12/31/99 @ 00:00 – 23:59 6
End= MMMDD/99 @ HH:MM 00/00/00-12/31/99 @ 00:00 – 23:59 6

Optimal Start Menu

The Optimal Start menu is used to set up the unit so it starts at the most efficient time before building occupancy.
Table 17: Optimal Start Menu
Item Display Name Default Setting Range Password Level
Enable= No No, Yes 6
Htg Rate= 0.4°F/min 0.0–1.0°F/min 2
Htg OAT= 35°F -40–60°F 2
Des Htg OAT= 0°F -40–60°F 2
Clg Rate= 0.4°F/min 0.0–1.0°F/min 2
Clg OAT= 85°F -60–140°F 2
Des Clg OAT= 95°F -60–140°F 2

Enable is an adjustable item that turns on the optimal start Clg Rate is an adjustable item that sets the rate of temperature
feature. Setting the value to yes will activate this function. drop in degrees per minute when the unit last started optimally
Htg Rate is an adjustable item used by the controller in in cooling.
determining the amount time before occupancy to start when Clg OAT is an adjustable item that sets the outdoor air
the Optimal Start parameter is set to “ON.” temperature when the unit was last started optimally in cooling.
Htg OAT is an adjustable item used by the controller in Design Clg OAT is an adjustable item that sets the outdoor
determining the amount time before occupancy to start when air temperature at which the cooling system could just hold the
the Optimal Start parameter is set to “ON.” load. Rate of temperature rise would equal zero.
Design Htg OAT is an adjustable item that sets the outdoor
air temperature at which the heating system could just hold the
load. The rate of temperature rise would equal zero.

Daylight Savings Menu

Table 18: Daylight Savings Menu
Item Display Name Default Setting Range Password Level
NA
DLS Strt Mon= Mar 2
Jan-Dec
1stSun
2ndSun
DLS Strt Wk= 2ndWeek 3rdSun 2
4thSun
5thSun
NA
DLS End Mon= Nov 2
Jan-Dec
1stSun
2ndSun
DLS End Week= 1stWeek 3rdSun 2
4thSun
5thSun
DLS Enable= Auto Off/Auto 2

DLS Strt Mon is an adjustable item that sets the month for DLS End Week is an adjustable item that sets the week of the
daylight savings time to begin. month for daylight savings time to end.
DLS Strt Wk is an adjustable item that sets the week of the DLS Enable is an adjustable item that sets whether or not
month for daylight savings time to begin. daylight savings time is enabled.
DLS End Mon is an adjustable item that sets the month for
daylight savings time to end.

OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER 32 www.DaikinApplied.com

 All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Menu Descriptions

Commission Unit
Unit Setup
Table 19: Unit Setup Menu
Item Display Name Default Setting Range Password Level
Apply Changes= No No, Yes 4
RAT Sensor= Yes No, Yes 4
OAT Sensor= Yes No, Yes 4
None
Space Sensor Digtl/Net Anlog/Net 4
Digtl/Net
Eng Units= English English, SI 4
Unit Name= — — 4
Rapid Start= No No, Yes 2
Rapid Start Tm= 10 min 0–20 min 2
FanOp
DO10 Cfg= FanOp 2
VAVBox

100% OA SCU is an adjustable item used to select whether or Unit Name is an adjustable item that allows each controller
not a self contained unit will be configured for 100% outside air to be given a unique name. This may be useful when multiple
operation. units are connected to a single remote HMI.
Space Sensor is an adjustable item to indicate if a space Rapid Start is an adjustable item that allows the user to select
sensor is connected to the unit controller, or provided via a to initiate a rapid startup sequence at unit power up.
network signal. Rapid Start Tm is an adjustable item that allows the user to
Eng Units is an adjustable item to indicate if the unit is to set the Rapid Start timing whenever the power is reset to the
display English or Metric units of measure. controller and the controller finishes its startup sequence.
DO10 Cfg is an adjustable item that redefines the functionality
of the digital output (DO10) on the main control board. The
output is either a supply fan operation indication or a VAV box
signal depending on how this parameter is set.

Timer Settings Menu

Table 20: Timer Settings Menu
Item Display Name Default Setting Range Password Level
Service Time 0 min 0–240min 4
Start Up 180s 1800s 4
Recirculate 180s 3600s 4
Zero OA Time 0 min 0–240min 4
Tnt Override 120 min 0–300min 4
Post Heat 0s 0–180s 4
Pwd Timeout 10 min 3–30min 4
Low DAT 6 min 0–60min 4
ClgStateDelay 300s 0–600s 4
Clg Stg Time 5 min 5–60min 4
Htg Stg Time 5 min 2–60min 4
Min Ex Strt Tm 120s 60–300s 4
Min Ex Stop Tm 120s 60–300s 4
ER Whl Stg Tm 5 min 1–100min 4
ER Whl Off Tm 5 min 1–100min 4
Air Flw Ign 120s 0–999S 2
Htg Wrmup Tm 240s 0–999s 2
Htg Hld Period 240s 0–999s 2
Srvc Time Inc 20s 0–300s 2
Off HtCl Delay 120s 0–999s 2

www.DaikinApplied.com 33 OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER

 All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Menu Descriptions

Service Time is an adjustable item that sets the amount of Clg Stg Time is an adjustable item used to set a minimum time
time the internal control timers can be temporarily sped up. period between compressor stage changes.
Startup is an adjustable item that sets the time in seconds that Htg Stg Time is an adjustable item used to set a minimum
the unit will perform its startup operation. time period between heating stage changes.
Recirculate is an adjustable item that sets the time in seconds MinExStrtTime is an adjustable item that sets the minimum
that the unit operates with only the fan, recirculating the exhaust fan on time (Default = 120 seconds).
building air upon unit start up.
MinExStopTime is an adjustable item that sets the minimum
Zero OA Time is an adjustable item that sets the time in exhaust fan stop time (Default = 120 seconds).
minutes that the outdoor air damper stays at a zero position ER Whl Stg Tm is an adjustable item used to set a minimum
upon unit start up. time period for operating at either the minimum or maximum
Tnt Override is an adjustable item that sets the amount of time speed before action is taken to change speed during the frost
that the unit will go into operation when the tenant override protect mode of operation.
function is activated. Tenant override can be activated by the ER Whl Off Tm is an adjustable item used to set the minimum
space sensor button, the network occupancy mode parameter amount of time the energy wheel will remain off after being
or the keypad Occ Mode= parameter. turned off due to a frosting/condensation condition.
Post Heat is an adjustable item that sets the duration of the Air Flw Ign is an adjustable item that sets the amount of time
post heat function available on VAV units. the air proving switch is ignored after the supply fan is started.
Pwd Timeout is an adjustable item that sets the amount Htg Wrmup Tm is an adjustable item which is used to set the
of time in minutes that the controller will allow access to amount of time the gas burner will remain at a low fire position
applicable menus without re-entering the necessary password. on 100% OSA units (default 240 seconds).
If the keypad display remains idle for this time period, the
display will revert to the “main menu” requiring a re-enter of the Htg Hld Period is an adjustable item used to set the amount of
password. time that the gas heating valve remains at its calculated value
on units equipped with 100% OA (default 240 seconds). This
Low DAT is an adjustable item that sets the duration of a time is to allow the temperature to approach equilibrium with the
period upon unit start up during which the Low Discharge modulating gas heating valve at a fixed position.
Temperature fault is ignored. This may be particularly important
in colder climates when a unit has been off for a significant Srvc Time Inc is an adjustable item used to set the internal
time period during which the unit, including the discharge air stage time delay when the Service Timer is not zero, the times
temperature sensor, has become very cold. This time period listed below are set to the ServiceTime (Default = 20 seconds)
allows the unit to run long enough to turn the unit heat on and instead of the normal values.
warm the discharge sensor above the alarm limit, preventing • Cooling Stage Time
nuisance unit alarm shutdown. This time period begins when
• Heating Stage Time
the supply fan starts.
• Start Initial Time
ClgStateDelay is an adjustable item that sets the amount of
• Recirculation
time between the fan only operating state and the mechanical
cooling state. The unit will not enter the mechanical cooling • ZeroOATime
state until this time has passed. This only applies on discharge OffHtClDelay is an adjustable item that sets a delay in turning
control units following morning warm up heating operation. off the supply air fan when the unit is shut off while cooling or
heating operation is active.

OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER 34 www.DaikinApplied.com

 All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Menu Descriptions

SAF Set-up

Table 21: Supply Fan Speed Menu

Item Display Name Default Setting Range Password Level Item Display Name Default Setting Range Password Level
DSP CO2 CONTROL
Spd/Net Min PPM= 0ppm 0–5000ppm 2
1ZnVAV Max PPM= 2000ppm 0–5000ppm 2
SAF Ctrl= DSP 4
BSP V/A @ Min PPM= 0.0/V 0.0–20.0/V/mA 2
CO2 V/A @ Max PPM= 10.0/V 0.0–20.0/V/mA 2
CFM Min SAF PPM= 800 0–5000ppm 4
No Max SAF PPM= 1100 0–5000ppm 4
AplyInputChgs= No 2
Yes Min PPM Spd= 50 0–100% 4
None Max PPM Spd= 100 0–100% 4
CO2 Input= None VDC 2 CFM CONTROL
MA Min CFM= 0CFM 0–60000CFM 2
None Max CFM= 10000CFM 0–60000CFM 2
CFM Input= None VDC 2 V/A @Min CFM= 0.0/V 0.0–20.0/V/mA 2
MA V/A @Max CFM= 10.0/V 0.0–20.0/V/mA 2
No SAF CFM DB= 3% 0–100% 4
BSP Input= No 2
Yes SAFCFM Period= 30s 0–999s 4
SPEED CONTROL SAF CFM Gain= 0.1 0.0–100.0 4
Rem SAF Cap= 33% 0–100% 4 SAF CFM MxChg= 5% 0–100% 4
DSP CONTROL BSP CONTROL
DSP DB= 0.1in 0–0.5in 4 BSP DB= 0.01in 0.0–0.1in 4
SAF Ramp Time= 60s 0–999s 4 BSP Period= 5s 0–999s 4
Min Period= 5s 0–999s 4 BSP Gain= 0.2 0.0–100.0s 4
Max Spd Chg= 15% 0–100% 4 Max Spd Chg= 4% 0–100% 4
DuctPress1= — 0.0–5.0in 2 SAF SETUP
1 ZONE VAV CONTROL SAF Ctrl Dly= 30s 0–999s 4
Min Clg Spd= 40% 0–100% 4 Min Speed= 33% 0–100% 4
Max Clg Spd= 100% 0–100% 4 Heat
VAVBox Out= — 2
Min Htg Spd= 40% 0–100% 4 Cool
Max Htg Spd= 100% 0–100% 4 MaxVentSpd= 100% 0–100% 2
Space Period= 60s 0–999s 4 Max SAF RPM= 2600 0–5000 2
Space Gain= 0.8 0.0–100.0s 4
Space PAT= 400s 0–999s 4
Space Max Chg= 10% 0–100% 4

SAF Ctrl is an adjustable parameter used to select how the AplyInputChgs is the Apply Input Changes flag must be
supply fan is to be controlled. The supply fan can normally be changed from no to yes in order for the controller to recognize
controlled by duct pressure, space temperature (single zone the changes. Setting the Apply Input Changes flag to YES will
VAV or 1ZnVAV) or by a percentage of supply air fan speed automatically reset the controller.
from 33% to 100%. On 100% OA unit applications the fan can CO2 Input is an adjustable item used to select the type of
be controlled to maintain building static pressure, space carbon input for a field installed CO2 sensor. If this is set to None the
dioxide level or and airflow based on a field supply airflow controller ignores any CO2 sensor input. If CO2 control and/
station. The speed option is typically used with a building
or monitoring is desired this parameter is set to VDC or mA
automation system. When single zone VAV control is selected,
to match the input type of the field supplied CO2 sensor input.
the supply fan is controlled with a PI_Loop to maintain the
This parameter applies only to 100% OA unit configurations.
Control Temperature input at the Occupied Cooling Set Point or
Occupied Heating Set Point. When BSP is selected the supply CFM Input is an adjustable item used to select the type of
fan is controlled with a PI_Loop to maintain the building static input for a field installed airflow station. If this is set to None the
pressure at a building static pressure Set Point. controller ignores any field airflow station input. If CFM control
and/or monitoring is desired this parameter is set to VDC or mA
When CO2 is selected the supply fan is controlled to maintain to match the input type of the field supplied airflow input. This
the CO2 ppm between adjustable limits by varying the supply parameter applies only to 100% OA unit configurations.
fan speed between an adjustable range. When CFM is
selected the supply fan is controlled with a PI_Loop to maintain
the measured CFM at a CFM set point.

www.DaikinApplied.com 35 OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER

 All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Menu Descriptions

BSP Input is an adjustable item used to select whether on Min Htg Spd is an adjustable item that sets the minimum
not a building static pressure sensor is connected to the unit supply fan speed used for heating operation when 1ZnVAV is
controller. If this is set to No the controller ignores any building selected as the method of supply fan control.
static pressure input. If BSP control of the supply fan is desired Max Htg Spd is an adjustable item that sets the maximum
this parameter must be set to Yes. This parameter applies only supply fan speed used for heating operation when 1ZnVAV is
to 100% OA unit configurations. selected as the method of supply fan control.
Remote SF Cap is an adjustable item for setting the supply fan Space Period is an adjustable item that sets the “sampling
speed by the keypad or by a network control signal. time” used in the PI control function to vary the supply fan
DSP DB is an adjustable item which sets a dead band around speed when 1ZnVAV supply fan control is selected.
the DuctSP Spt= parameter. No duct static pressure control
Space Gain is an adjustable item that sets the “gain” used
action is taken when the current duct static pressure input is
in the PI control function to vary the supply fan speed when

m
within this dead band.
1ZnVAV supply fan control is selected.
SAF Ramp Time is an adjustable item that sets the amount Space PAT is an adjustable item that sets the “project ahead
of time it will take for the variable speed fan to drive from time” used in the PI control function to vary the supply fan
its minimum to maximum speed as well as its maximum to speed when 1ZnVAV supply fan control is selected.
minimum speed. The SAF Ramp Time= value on the keypad

.co
must be changed whenever the ramp time of the variable Space Max Chg is an adjustable item that sets the maximum
speed fan is changed. The ramp up time must equal the ramp value of increase or decrease of the supply fan speed each
down time, and both must equal the SAF RampTime value to period used in the PI control function to vary the supply fan
provide stable operation. speed when 1ZnVAV supply fan control is selected.
Min Period is an adjustable item that sets the duration of the Min PPM is an adjustable item that sets the minimum PPM
sample time between speed changes. The sample time must value of the field supplied CO2 input signal.
be long enough to allow the static pressure to get very close to Max PPM is an adjustable item that sets the maximum PPM
its steady state value before another calculation is made.
es
value of the field supplied CO2 input signal.
Max Spd Chg is an adjustable item that sets the maximum V/mA @ Min PPM is an adjustable item that sets the DC
value for a speed increase or decrease. This speed change voltage or mA value at the minimum PPM value of the field
(either a positive or negative value) is added to the current supplied CO2 input signal.
fan speed whenever the duct static pressure is outside of the
deadband, and the Min Period time has passed since the V/mA @ Max PPM is an adjustable item that sets the DC
voltage or mA value at the maximum PPM value of the field
uid

previous speed change.

supplied CO2 input signal.
DuctPress1 is a status only item that indicates the current
value for the duct status pressure sensor. Min SAF PPM is an adjustable item that sets the PPM value at
which the supply fan speed is controlled to minimum when CO2
Min Clg Spd is an adjustable item that sets the minimum supply fan control is selected.
supply fan speed used for cooling operation when 1ZnVAV is
selected as the method of supply fan control. Max SAF PPM is an adjustable item that sets the PPM value
at which the supply fan speed is controlled to maximum when
Max Clg Spd is an adjustable item that sets the maximum CO2 supply fan control is selected.
-g

supply fan speed used for cooling operation when 1ZnVAV is

selected as the method of supply fan control. Min PPM Spd is an adjustable item that sets the supply fan
speed when the CO2 input signal is at minimum when CO2
supply fan control is selected.
Max PPM Spd is an adjustable item that sets the supply fan
all

speed when the CO2 input signal is at maximum when CO2

supply fan control is selected.

OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER 36 www.DaikinApplied.com

 All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Menu Descriptions

Min CFM is an adjustable item that sets the minimum CFM DSP Ctrl Dly is an adjustable item that sets the duration of
value of the field supplied airflow station input signal. time that the minimum speed signal is sent to the variable
Max CFM is an adjustable item that sets the maximum CFM speed supply air fan after the supply fan is started via a digital
value of the field supplied airflow station input signal. output. Control reverts to either duct pressure or speed after
the fan has been on for the DSPCtrlDelay (default 30 seconds).
V/mA @ Min CFM is an adjustable item that sets the DC
voltage or mA value at the minimum CFM value of the field Min Speed is an adjustable item which is used to set the
supplied airflow station input signal. minimum supply fan speed (default 33%).
VAVBox Out is a status only item that indicates the current
V/mA @ Max CFM is an adjustable item that sets the DC
value of the VAV output. The VAV output is only available to the
voltage or mA value at the maximum CFM value of the field
field via network communications.
supplied airflow station input signal.
SAF CFM DB is an adjustable item that sets the “deadband” Max Vent Speed is an adjustable item that sets the supply fan
used in the PI control function to vary the supply fan speed speed when an external ventilation override input to the supply
when airflow (CFM) supply fan control is selected. fan is present.

SAF CFM Period is an adjustable item that sets the “sample Max SAF RPM is an adjustable item that sets the maximum
time” used in the PI control function to vary the supply fan RPM value for the supply air fan. Note this is set based on the
speed when airflow (CFM) supply fan control is selected. supply fan model size and the system specifications.

Space Gain is an adjustable item that sets the “gain” used

in the PI control function to vary the supply fan speed when
airflow (CFM) supply fan control is selected.
Space Max Chg is an adjustable item that sets the maximum
value of increase or decrease of the supply fan speed each
period used in the PI control function to vary the supply fan
speed when airflow (CFM) supply fan control is selected.
BSP DB is an adjustable item that sets the “deadband” used
in the PI control function to vary the supply fan speed when
building static pressure (BSP) supply fan control is selected.
BSP Period is an adjustable item that sets the “sample time”
used in the PI control function to vary the supply fan speed
when building static pressure (BSP) supply fan control is
selected.
BSP Gain is an adjustable item that sets the “gain” used in the
PI control function to vary the supply fan speed when building
static pressure (BSP) supply fan control is selected.
Max Spd Chg is an adjustable item that sets the maximum
value of increase or decrease of the supply fan speed each
period used in the PI control function to vary the supply fan
speed when building static pressure (BSP) supply fan control is
selected.

www.DaikinApplied.com 37 OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER

 All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Menu Descriptions

RF/EF Set-Up

Table 22: Return Fan/Exhaust Fan Set-up Menu

Item Display Name Default Setting Range Password Level
None
Tracking
RF/EF Ctrl= Tracking BldgP 4
Spd/Net
OA Damper
Rem RAF Cap= 5% 0-100% 4
Rem ExhF Cap= 5% 0-100% 4
BSP DB= 0.01in 0.0-0.1in 4
BSP Period= 5s 0-999s 4
BSP Gain= 0.2 0.0-100.0s 4
Max Spd Chg= 4% 0-100% 4
Sup Fan Max= 100% 0-100% 4
RF @ SF Max 95% 0-100% 4
Sup Fan Min= 30% 0-100% 4
RF @ SF Min= 25% 0-100% 4
Lo Fan Diff= 75% 0-100% 4
Hi Fan Diff= 75% 0-100% 4
RFEF Ctrl Dly= 30s 0-999s 4
5% With Exhaust Fan
Min Speed= 0-100% 4
33% With Return Fan
MinExStrtTime= 120s 60-300s 4
MinExStopTime= 120s 60-300s 4
MinExhOAPos= 5% 0-100% 4
MinExhSAFCap= 10% 0-100% 4
ExhOnOAPos= 40% 0-100% 4
ExhMxOAPos= 100% 0-100% 4
Exh Stg 1 On= 40% 0-100% 4
Exh Stg 1 Off= 30% 0-100% 4
Exh Stg 2 On= 55% 0-100% 4
Exh Stg 2 Off= 40% 0-100% 4
Exh Stg 3 On= 70% 0-100% 4
Exh Stg 3 Off= 50% 0-100% 4
Max RF/EF Hz= 60Hz 0-100Hz N/A
Max RF/EF Hz= 60Hz 0-100Hz N/A
Max RF/EF Hz= 60Hz 0-100Hz N/A
MaxVentSpd= 100% 0-100% 2
Max RFEF RPM= 2600 0-5000 2
ECM Status= — OK 2

OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER 38 www.DaikinApplied.com

 All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Menu Descriptions

RF/EF Ctrl is an adjustable parameter used to select how the RFEF Ctrl Delay is an adjustable item that sets the duration
return/exhaust fans are to be controlled. The exhaust fans of time that the minimum speed signal is sent to the variable
can be controlled by the building pressure or by a percentage speed supply air fan after the return fan is started via a
of return/exhaust air fan speed from 5% to 100%. The speed digital output. Control reverts to either building pressure
option is typically used with a building automation system. or speed after the fan has been on for the BSPCtrlDelay
Remote RAF Cap is an adjustable item for setting the return (default 30 seconds).
fan speed by the keypad or by a network control signal. Min Speed is an adjustable item the sets the minimum of the
Remote ExhF Cap is an adjustable item for setting the exhaust RF/EF fan
fan speed by the keypad or by a network control signal. MinExStopTime is an adjustable item that sets the Minimum
Exhaust Fan Stop Time (Default = 120 seconds). Once
BSP DB is an adjustable item which sets a dead band around
stopped, the exhaust fan must remain off for a minimum of this
the BldgSP Spt parameter. No building static pressure control
time before it can be re-started.
action is taken when the current building static pressure input
is within this dead band. MinExhOAPos is an adjustable item that sets the Minimum
BSP Period is an adjustable item which sets the ding stat Exhaust OA Position (default 5%). The outdoor air dampers
periodadjustable item which sets the ding static pressure must be open more that this value for prop exhaust fan
return air or exhaust fan speed. operation.

BSP Gain is an adjustable item which sets the ding static in MinExhSAFCap is an adjustable item that sets the Minimum
the PI control function that modulates the return air or exhaust Exhaust SAF capacity (default 10%). The supply air fan speed
fan speed. must be higher than this value for prop exhaust fan operation.
Exh On OA Pos is an adjustable item that turns on the exhaust
Max Spd Chg is an adjustable item that sets the maximum
fan when the OA damper position reaches this setting.
value for a exhaust speed increase or decrease. This speed
change (either a positive or negative value) is added to the Exh Mx OA Pos is an adjustable item that sets the OA damper
current fan speed whenever the building static pressure is position at which the exhaust fan will be at is maximum speed.
outside of the deadband, and the BSP Period= time has Exh Stage 1,2,3 On is an adjustable setting that sets the
passed since the previous speed change. damper positions at which point the staged exhaust fans are
Sup Fan Max is an adjustable item used to set the supply turned ON.
fan maximum speed when the RF/EF control method is set Exh stage 1,2,3 Off is an adjustable setting that sets the
to tracking. damper positions at which point the staged exhaust fans are
RF @ SF Max is an adjustable setting used to set the return fan turned OFF.
speed when the supply fan is operating at its maximum speed. Max RF/EF Hz is an adjustable item that sets the maximum
Sup Fan Min is an adjustable item used to set the supply fan return/exhaust fan value. The maximum value settings must
minimum speed when the RF/EF control method is set to tracking also be changed in the VFD’s to match this setting.
RF @ SF Min is an adjustable setting used to set the return fan MaxVentSpd is an adjustable item that sets the exhaust
speed when the supply fan is operating at its minimum speed. fan speed when an external ventilation override input to the
exhaust fan is present.
Lo Fan Diff is an adjustable setting used to set the differential
value between supply fan speed and return fan speed. The Max RFEF RPM is an adjustable item that sets the maximum
return fan will not modulate below the current supply fan speed RPM value for the exhaust air fan. Note: This is set based on
minus the low fan differential. the exhaust fan model size.
Hi Fan Diff is an adjustable setting used to set the differential ECM Status is a status only item that indicates the current
value between supply fan speed and return fan speed. The status of the return/exhaust fan motor
return fan will not modulate above the current supply fan speed
plus the low fan differential.

www.DaikinApplied.com 39 OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER

 All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Menu Descriptions

Heat/Cool Changeover Set-Up

Table 23: Heat/Cool Changeover Setup Menu
Item Display Name Default Setting Range Password Level
RAT
Space
Ctrl Temp Src= RAT MAT 4
OAT
None
Use Tstat Spt= No No, Yes 4
Occ Clg DB= 2.0°F 0.0–10.0°F 4
Clg Period= 60s 0–999s 4
Clg Gain= 0.1 0.0–100.0 4
Clg PAT= 600s 0–999s 4
Max Clg Chg= 5.0°F 0.0–50.0°F 4
Occ Htg DB= 2.0°F 0.0–10.0°F 4
Htg Period= 60s 0–999s 4
Htg Gain= 0.1 0.0–100.0 4
Htg PAT= 600s 0–999s 4
Max Htg Chg= 5.0°F 0.0–50.0°F 4
AplyTstatChg= No No, Yes 4
CalRemSpt@10°C= No No, Yes 4
CalRemSpt@50°F= No No, Yes 4
CalRemSpt@30°C= No No, Yes 4
CalRemSpt@86°F= No No, Yes 4

Ctrl Temp Src is an adjustable item which selects the Htg Period is an adjustable item which sets the “sampling
temperature sensor input to be used for the unit heating/ time” used in the PI control function to vary the DAT Htg Spt in
cooling changeover or occupied cooling and heating capacity zone control applications.
change decisions. For example, if the CtrlTemp Src parameter Htg Gain is an adjustable item which sets the “gain” used in
is set to “Return,” then the Control Temp parameter reads the the PI control function to vary the DAT Htg Spt in zone control
same value as the Return Air parameter. applications.
Use Tstat Spt is an adjustable item used to set whether or not Htg PAT is an adjustable item which sets the “project ahead
to use the Tstat set point adjustment value for the Occ Clg Spt time” used in the PI control function to vary the DAT Htg Spt in
and Occ Htg Spt. zone control applications.
Occ Clg DB is an adjustable item which sets a dead band Max Htg Chg is an adjustable item that sets the maximum
around the Occ Cooling Set Point parameter. For example, if value for an increase or decrease of the DAT Htg Spt in zone
the Occ Cooling Set Point parameter is set to 75ºF and the Clg control applications.
Deadband parameter is set to 2ºF the dead band around the
set point would be from 76.0ºF to 74.0ºF. AplyTstatChg is an adjustable item that resets the controller.
This is required to affect changes to the Use TstatSpt
Clg Period is an adjustable item which sets the “sampling
parameter.
time” used in the PI control function to vary the DAT Clg Spt in
zone control applications. CalRemSpt@10°C is an adjustable item used to calibrate
the digital space sensor minimum setpoint input when the
Clg Gain is an adjustable item which sets the “gain” used in engineering units set to SI.
the PI control function to vary the DAT Clg Spt in zone control
applications. CalRemSpt@50°F is an adjustable item used to calibrate
the digital space sensor minimum setpoint input when the
Clg PAT is an adjustable item which sets the “project ahead engineering units set to English.
time” used in the PI control function to vary the DAT Clg Spt in
zone control applications. CalRemSpt@30°C is an adjustable item used to calibrate
the digital space sensor maximum setpoint input when the
Max Clg Change is an adjustable item that sets the maximum engineering units set to SI.
value for an increase or decrease of the DAT Clg Spt in zone
control applications. CalRemSpt@86°F is an adjustable item used to calibrate
the digital space sensor maximum setpoint input when the
Occ Htg DB is an adjustable item which sets a dead band engineering units set to English.
around the Occ Heating Set Point parameter. For example, if
the Occ Heating Set Point parameter is set to 70ºF and the Htg
Deadband parameter is set to 2ºF the dead band around the
set point would be from 69.0ºF to 71.0ºF.

OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER 40 www.DaikinApplied.com

 All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Menu Descriptions

Cooling Set-Up
Table 24: Cooling Set-up Menu
Item Display Name Default Setting Range Password Level
Clg Stage Time= 5min 5–60min 4
Clg DB= 2.0°F 1.0–10.0°F 4
Clg Lo OAT Lk= 55°F 0–100°F 4
OAT Diff= 2°F 0–10°F 4
None
Ntwrk
Space

m
Return
Clg Reset= None 6
OAT
ExtmA
ExtV
Airflow

.co
Min Clg Spt= 65.0°F 40.0–100.0°F 6
0–100/
NA
°F
Min Clg Spt @= 0/NA 6
°C
mA
%
es
Max Clg Spt= 65.0°F 40.0–100.0°F 6
0–100/
NA
°F
Max Clg Spt @= 100/NA 6
°C
uid

mA
%
Unocc Diff= 3°F 0–10°F 2

Clg Stage Time is an adjustable item used to set a minimum Clg Reset is an adjustable item that is used to set the type of
time period between compressor stage changes. cooling reset to be used.
Clg DB is an adjustable item which sets a dead band around Min Clg Spt is an adjustable item which sets the minimum
-g

the discharge cooling set point parameter. For example, if the cooling discharge set point for use with a cooling discharge air
discharge cooling set point parameter is set to 55ºF and the temperature set point reset schedule.
Clg Db parameter is set to 2ºF the dead band around the set Min Clg Spt @ is an adjustable item which sets the value of
point would be from 56.0ºF to 54.0ºF. the sensor input, selected with the Cooling Reset parameter,
Clg Lo OAT Lk is an adjustable item which sets the low at which the DAT cooling set point parameter is reset to the
all

outdoor air temperature mechanical cooling lockout point. minimum DAT cooling set point value.
Mechanical cooling operation is disabled when the outdoor air Max Clg Spt is an adjustable item which sets the maximum
temperature sensor input falls below this set point. cooling discharge set point for use with a cooling discharge air
OATDiff is an adjustable item which sets a differential above temperature set point reset schedule.
the OAT Clg Lock parameter. Mechanical cooling operation is Max Clg Spt @ is an adjustable item which sets the value of
re-enabled when the outdoor air temperature sensor input rises the sensor input, selected with the Cooling Reset parameter,
above the OAT Clg Lock value by more than this differential. at which the DAT cooling set point parameter is reset to the
maximum DAT cooling set point value.

www.DaikinApplied.com 41 OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER

 All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Menu Descriptions

Variable Compressor Set-up

Table 25: Variable Compresor Setup Menu

Item Display Name Default Setting Range Password Level
Compressor Status
OFF
Var Cmp Status= — 4
ON
Var Spd Cmd= — 0–100% 4
OFF
Comp 1= — 4
ON
OFF
Comp 3= — 4
ON
OFF
Comp 5= — 4
ON
Refrig Circuit Status
PTD1= — 0–5000kPa 4
PTD2= — 0–5000kPa 4
VCmpDischSH= — -100.0–100.0°F 4
C1DschSatTmp= — -50.0–212.0°F 4
C2DschSatTmp= — -50.0–212.0°F 4
DRT1= — -50.0–392.0°F 6
DRT2= — -50.0–392.0°F 6
OFF
Cond Sol 1= OFF 4
ON
OFF
Cond Sol 2= OFF 4
ON
Compressor Setup
Var Cmp Period= 20s 1–300s 4
Var Cmp Gain= 1 0.0–100.0 4
Var Cmp PAT= 40s 0–999s 4
VarCmp MaxChg= 10% 0–50% 4
OFF
OilBoost= OFF 2
ON
LowOilTime= 10m 1–30m 2
OilBoostTime= 15m 1–15m 2
LowTcOAT= 80°F 50–122°F 2

OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER 42 www.DaikinApplied.com

 All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Menu Descriptions

Var Cmp Status is a status only item that indicates whether VarCmp Period is an adjustable item that sets the sample
variable speed compressor on circuit # 2 is ON or OFF. period for the PI loop used to control the variable speed
Var Spd Cmd is a status only item that indicates the current compressor capacity to maintain the effective discharge air
commanded speed of variable speed compressor on circuit # 2 temperature setpoint.

Comp 1 is a status only item that indicates whether the fixed Var Cmp Gain is an adjustable item that sets the Gain for the
speed compressor# 1 is ON or OFF. PI loop used for the PI loop used to control the variable speed
compressor capacity to maintain the effective discharge air
Comp 3 is a status only item that indicates whether the fixed temperature setpoint.
speed compressor# 3 is ON or OFF.
Var Cmp PAT is an adjustable item that sets the project ahead
Comp 5 is a status only item that indicates whether the fixed time for the PI loop used for the PI loop used to control the
speed compressor# 5 is ON or OFF variable speed compressor capacity to maintain the effective
PTD 1 is a status only item which displays the current value of discharge air temperature setpoint.
the discharge line refrigerant pressure for circuit #1. Var Cmp MaxChg is an adjustable item that sets the maximum
PTD 2 is a status only item which displays the current value of change value for the PI loop used for the PI loop used to
the discharge line refrigerant pressure for circuit #2. control the variable speed compressor capacity to maintain the
effective discharge air temperature setpoint.
VCmpDischSH is a status only item that indicates the current
discharge superheat value for the variable compressor OilBoost is an item that indicates whether the l variable speed
circuit based on discharge refrigerant temperature minus the compressor oil boost sequence is On or Off and also allows
discharge saturation temperature. the sequence to be manually initiated or terminated.

DRT 2 is a status only item which displays the current LowOilTime is an adjustable item that sets the amount of
discharge refrigerant line temperature sensor reading for time a low oil level signal must be detected before the variable
variable speed compressor on circuit #2. speed compressor low oil boost sequence is initiated.

C1DschSatTmp is a status only item which displays the OilBoostTime is an adjustable item that sets the amount of
current discharge pressure equivalent saturation temperature time the oil boost sequence remains active once initiated.
for circuit #1. LowTcOAT is an adjustable item that sets the OAT solenoid
C2DschSatTmp is a status only item which displays the valve setpoint used with condenser coil splitter valve control.
current discharge pressure equivalent saturation temperature
for circuit #2.
Cond Sol 1 is a status only item that indicates whether the
condenser coil splitter valve for circuit #1 is ON or OFF.
Cond Sol 2 is a status only item that indicates whether the
condenser coil splitter valve for circuit #2 is ON or OFF.

www.DaikinApplied.com 43 OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER

 All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Menu Descriptions

Figure 10 graphically shows the cooling reset operation. The Unocc Diff is an adjustable item that sets the unoccupied
normal DAT cooling set point is 55.0 F. The cooling reset cooling differential.
scheme is set to airflow. The unit is to adjust the DAT from 55.0
F to 65.0 F. When the unit is at 35% of the design airflow the Figure 10: Cooling Setpoint
discharge temperature is to be 65.0 F. When the unit is at 80%
of its airflow the DAT is to be 55.0F. This example would give
the following inputs:
• Min Clg Spt= 55.0 F
• Min Clg Spt @= 80%
• Max Clg Spt= 65.0 F
• Max Clg Spt @= 35%
Based on the above, the unit will have a discharge air
temperature set point of 55.0 F from 80% to 100% of the
airflow.

Econo Set-up
Table 26: Economizer Setup Menu
Item Display Name Default Setting Range Password Level
None
OAT
EconChgovr= Enth&DB 4
OAT/RAT
Enth&OAT
OFF
Econo FDD= ON 2
ON
Clg Stg Time= 5min 5–60min 4
Clg Stg Time= 5min 2–60min 4
Chgover Temp= 55.0°F 0.0–100.0°F 4
Clg DB= 2.0°F 1.0–10.0°F 4
Econo Period= 30/40s (air/water) 0-999s 4
Econo Gain= 1-Oct (air/water) 0.0–100.0 4
Econo PAT= 60/40s (air/water) 0–999s 4
Econo Max Chg= 10/15% (air/water) 0–100% 4
No
Flush Econo= Yes 4
Yes
Econo Diff= 2°F 0–10°F 4
EWT Diff= 3.0°F 0.0–10.0°F 4
None
Network
Space
Return
Clg Reset= None 4
OAT
ExtmA
ExtV
Airflow
Min Clg Spt= 55.0°F 40.0–100.0°F 4
0–100/
NA
°F
Min Clg Spt @= 0/NA 4
°C
mA
%
Max Clg Spt= 65.0°F 40.0–100.0°F 4
0–100/
NA
°F
Max Clg Spt @= 100/NA 4
°C
mA
%
Max OAT Lmt= 75.0°F 50.0–100.0°F 2
Min OAT Lmt= 70.0°F 50.0–100.0°F 2
No
Calibrate OAD= No 2
Yes
PosSwOpen= 97% 0–100% 2
Max Sw Diff= 3% 0–100% 2
PosSwClose= 3% 0–100% 2
Min Sw Diff= 5% 0–100% 2
Open
OAD Sw Status= — 2
Closed

OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER 44 www.DaikinApplied.com

 All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Menu Descriptions

EconChangover is an adjustable item used to set how Max Clg Spt is an adjustable item which sets the maximum
economizer operation will be enabled cooling discharge set point for use with a cooling discharge air
Econo FDD is an adjustable item used to enable or disable the temperature set point reset schedule.
Economizer Fault Detection and Diagnostics function Max Clg Spt @ is an adjustable item which sets the value of
Clg Stage Time is an adjustable item used to set a minimum the sensor input, selected with the Cooling Reset parameter,
time period between compressor stage changes. at which the DAT cooling setpoint parameter is reset to the
maximum DAT cooling setpoint value.
Chgover Temp is an adjustable item which sets the OA dry
Max OAT Lmt is an adjustable item which sets the maximum
bulb temperature at which the units changes over to the
outdoor air temperature for the applicable climate zone above
economizer operation.
which economizer should not be enabled.
Clg DB is an adjustable item which sets a dead band around
the discharge cooling setpoint parameter. For example, if the Min OAT Lmt is an adjustable item which sets the minimum
discharge cooling setpoint parameter is set to 55ºF and the Clg outdoor air temperature for the applicable climate zone below
DB parameter is set to 2ºF the dead band around the set point which economizer should be enabled. .
would be from 56.0ºF to 54.0ºF. Calibrate OAD is an adjustable item used to initiate the
Econo Period is an adjustable item which sets the “sampling calibration function that captures the command position at which
time” used in the PI control function of the economizer actuator. the outdoor damper position end switches open and close at the
closed and open ends of the damper modulation range.
Econo Gain is an adjustable item which sets the “Gain” used
PosSwOpen is an item that indicates the captured command
in the PI control function of the economizer actuator.
position at which the outdoor damper position end switch
Econo PAT is an adjustable item which sets the “project ahead closes at the open end of the damper modulation range. This
time” used in the PI control function of the economizer actuator. parameter can also be manually adjusted.
Econo Max Chg is an adjustable item that sets the maximum Max Sw Diff is an item that indicates the captured switch
value for an increase or decrease of the economizer actuator. differential at the open (maximum) end of the damper
Flush Econo is an adjustable item used to enable the modulation. This parameter can also be manually adjusted.
waterside economizer flush mode sequence. PosSwClose is an item that indicates the captured command
Econo Diff is an adjustable item which sets a differential position at which the outdoor damper position end switch
above the EconChgovrT parameter. Economizer operation is closes at the closed end of the damper modulation range. This
disabled when the OA Temp parameter indicates a value above parameter can also be manually adjusted.
the EconChgovrT= parameter by more than this differential. Min SW Diff is an item that indicates the captured switch
EWT Diff is an adjustable item that sets a differential below differential at the closed (minimum) end of the damper
the MAT at which waterside economizer operation is enabled modulation. This parameter can also be manually adjusted.
based on entering water temperature. OAD Sw Status is a status only item that indicates the
Min Clg Spt is an adjustable item which sets the minimum current condition of the damper end switch position input
cooling discharge set point for use with a cooling discharge air (Open/Closed).
temperature set point reset schedule.
Min Clg Spt @ is an adjustable item which sets the value of
the sensor input, selected with the Cooling Reset parameter,
at which the DAT cooling setpoint parameter is reset to the
minimum DAT cooling setpoint value.

www.DaikinApplied.com 45 OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER

 All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Menu Descriptions

Min OA Set-Up
Table 27: Min OA Damper Menu
Item Display Name Default Setting Range Password Level
Apply Changes No No, Yes 4
None
Network
Ext VDC
Min OA Reset= None 4
Ext mA
IAQ VDC
IAQ mA
BSP OA Ovrd No No/Yes 2
None
DAT
Rst Lmt Snsr None 2
EFT

m
MAT
OA @ MinV/mA= 0% 0–100% 4
OA @ MaxV/mA= 100% 0–100% 4
0.0–20.0/
0.0/
Min V/mA= V 4
V
mA
0.0–20.0/
10.0/

.co
Max V/mA= V 4
V
mA
PPM @DCV Lmt= 800ppm 0–5000ppm 4
PPM @Vnt Lmt= 1000ppm 0-5000ppm 4
IAQ PPM= - 0–5000ppm 4
Min PPM= 0ppm 0–5000ppm 4
Max PPM= 2000ppm 0–5000ppm 4
0.0–20.0/
0.0/
V/A @Min PPM= V 4
V
mA
10.0/
es
V/A @Max PPM= 0.0–20.0/
V
V
mA 4
Min CFM 0CFM 0–60000CFM 4
Max CFM 10000CFM 0–60000CFM 4
0.0–20.0/
0.0/
V/A @ Min CFM V 4
V
mA
uid

0.0–20.0/
10.0/
V/A @ Max CFM V 4
V
mA
Min Fan Diff= 20% 0–100% 4
Max Fan Diff= 50% 0–100% 4
Min Clg Spd= 40% 0–100% 4
Des Clg Spd 100% 0–100% 4
DesignFlow= Yes Yes, No 4
None
Field AO Stn None VDC 4
mA
-g

OA Flow= - 0–60000CFM 4
Min OA Flw Spt= 2000CFM 0–60000CFM 4
Des Flo DB= 3% 0–100% 4
DF Period= 30s 0–999s 4
Des Flo Gain= 0.1 0.0–100.0 4
DF Max Chg= 5% 0–100% 4
OA CFM DB 3% 0–100% 4
all

OA CFMPerod 30s 0–999s 4

OA CFM Gain 0.1 0.0–100.0 4
OA CFM Max Chg 5% 0–100% 4
LH Lvl Pos= - 0.00–100.00% 4
RH Lvl Pos= - 0.00–100.00% 4
MinRFEFTm= 120sec 0–3600sec 2
BSPOvdST= 5sec 0–999sec 2
BSPOvdGain= 0.2 0–999 2
BSPOvdMxChg= 4% 0–100% 2
ResetTLmt= 32.0°F 0–100°F 2
RstTSmplT= 5sec 0–999sec 2
RstTGain= 0.2 0–999 2
RstTPAT= 60sec 0-999sec 2
RstTMaxChg= 4% 0–100% 2
Min Inc Rate= 0.03 0.0–100.0 2
Max Inc Rate= 1.0 0.0–100.0 2
0-30% OA Max= 30% 0–100% 2

OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER 46 www.DaikinApplied.com

 All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Menu Descriptions

Apply Changes - the Apply Changes flag must be changed Min PPM is an adjustable item that sets the minimum PPM
from no to yes in order for the controller to recognize value.
the changes. Setting the Apply Changes flag to YES will Max PPM is an adjustable item that sets the maximum PPM
automatically reset the controller. value.
Min OA Reset is an adjustable item that sets the type of V/mA @ Min PPM is an adjustable item that sets the
minimum OA damper position reset to be used. When this minimum PPM value at the minimum DC voltage or mA value
is set to “None” the Min OA Pos= parameter is set to the of the CO2 sensor used when Min OA Reset= is set to “IAQ
Ventilation Limit. When this is set to “Network,” “Ext VDC,” “Ext VDC” or “IAQ mA.”
mA,” “IAQ VDC,” or “IAQ mA” then the Min OA Pos= parameter
varies from the Ventilation Limit down to the Demand Control V/mA @ Max PPM is an adjustable item that sets the
Ventilation Limit as the reset signal goes from its maximum to maximum PPM value at the maximum DC voltage or mA value
minimum value. of the CO2 sensor used when Min OA Reset= is set to “IAQ
VDC” or “IAQ mA.”
NOTE: When the Min OA Reset type is set to Network and
the Apply changes flag is set to yes, the value of the Min CFM is an adjustable item that sets the minimum CFM
Vent Limit is automatically set to 100%, the value of value of the field supplied flow station.
the DCV limit is set to 0% and the LoFlo V Lmt is set
to 0%. Max CFM is an adjustable item that sets the maximum CFM
value of the field supplied flow station.
BSP OA Ovrd is an adjustable item used to enable/disable the
building static pressure override feature. V/A @ Min CFM is an adjustable item that sets the sensor
input value at minimum CFM reading.
Rst Lmt Snsr is an adjustable item used to set the sensor to
be used in conjunction with the OA reset limit function. V/A @ Max CFM is an adjustable item that sets the sensor
input value at maximum CFM reading.
OA @ MinV/mA is an adjustable item used when Min OA
Reset= is set to “Ext VDC” or “Ext mA” to define the Min OA Min Fan Diff is an adjustable item which sets a differential
Pos= is when the field signal is at minimum value. between the discharge and return fan capacities above which
the minimum allowable Min OA Pos= begins to be reset
NOTE: Min OA Pos= is limited above the Demand Control upwards from the Demand Control Ventilation Limit toward the
Ventilation Limit.
Ventilation Limit.
OA @ MaxV/mA is an adjustable item used when Min OA
Max Fan Diff is an adjustable item which sets a differential
Reset= is set to “Ext VDC” or “Ext mA” to define the Min OA
between the discharge and return fan capacities at which
Pos= when the field signal is at the minimum value.
the minimum allowable Min OA Pos= is fully reset up to the
NOTE: Min OA Pos= is limited below the ventilation limit. Ventilation Limit.
Min V/mA is an adjustable item used to set the minimum value Min Clg Spd is an adjustable item that sets the discharge fan
of the field input signal. speed on a VAV unit at which the Ventilation Limit reaches the
Max V/mA is an adjustable item used to set the maximum LoFloVent= value.
value of the field input signal. Des Clg Spd is an adjustable item used to adjust the design
PPM @ DCV Limit is an adjustable item used when Min OA cooling speed setpoint.
Reset= is set to “IAQ VDC” or “IAQ mA” to define at what Design Flow is an adjustable item used to turn the optional
PPM value the Min OA Pos= is to be at the Demand Control DesignFlow outdoor airflow measuring reset function on and
Ventilation Limit value. off. This is one of several available methods of automatically
PPM @ Vent Limit is an adjustable item used when Min OA resetting the Min OA Pos parameter.
Reset= is set to “IAQ VDC” or “IAQ mA” to define at what PPM Field OA Stn is an adjustable item used to turn the optional
value the Min OA Pos= is to be at the Ventilation Limit value. field supplied outdoor airflow measuring station function ON
IAQ PPM is a status only item which indicates the current and OFF.
reading from the CO2 sensor.

www.DaikinApplied.com 47 OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER

 All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Menu Descriptions

OA Flow is a status only item which indicates the current BSPOvdST an adjustable item which sets the “sampling time”
outdoor airflow based on an optional OA airflow sensor input used in the PI control function used for the building static
used when the unit is equipped the DesignFlow OA control pressure override feature.
feature, or a field supplied OA measuring station. BSPOvdGain is an adjustable item which sets the “Gain” used
Min OAFlw Spt is an adjustable item that is used to set the in the PI control function used for the building static pressure
minimum design flow CFM’s when the unit is equipped with the override feature.
optional DesignFlow OA control feature, or a field supplied OA BSPOvdMxChg is an adjustable item that sets the maximum
measuring station. value for an increase or decrease of the outside air damper
OA CFM DB is an adjustable item which sets the “deadband” position due to the building static pressure override feature.
used in the control function that modulates Min OA Pos
ResetTLmt is an adjustable item which sets a temperature low
parameter to maintain the OA Flow parameter at the MinOA
limit which overrides functions that reset the outside air damper
Flow set point when a unit is equipped with the optional
position if the temperature gets too cold.
DesignFlow outdoor airflow measuring feature, or a field
supplied OA measuring station. RstTSmplT an adjustable item which sets the “sampling time”
used in the PI control function used for the Reset Temperature
OA CFMPeriod is an adjustable item which sets the “sampling Limit feature.
time” used in the PI control function that modulates the Min
OA Pos parameter to maintain the OA Flow parameter at the RstTGain is an adjustable item which sets the “Gain” used in
MinOA Flow set point when a unit is equipped with the optional the PI control function used for the Reset Temperature Limit
DesignFlow outdoor airflow measuring feature, or a field feature.
supplied OA measuring station. RstTPAT is an adjustable item which sets the “project ahead
OA CFM Gain is an adjustable item which sets the “Gain” time” used in the PI control function used for the Reset
used in the PI control function that modulates the Min OA Pos Temperature Limit feature.
parameter to maintain the OA Flow parameter at the MinOA RstTMaxChg is an adjustable item that sets the maximum
Flow set point when a unit is equipped with the optional change value PI loop used for the Reset Temperature Limit
DesignFlow outdoor airflow measuring feature, or a field feature.
supplied OA measuring station.
Min Inc Rate is an adjustable item used to set the minimum
OA CFM Max Chg is an adjustable item which sets the increase rate for the outside air damper “cold start” sequence.
“maximum step” used in the control function that modulates
the Min OA Pos parameter to maintain the OA Flow parameter Max Inc Rate is an adjustable item used to set the maximum
at the MinOA Flow set point when a unit is equipped with the increase rate for the outside air damper “cold start” sequence.
optional DesignFlow outdoor airflow measuring feature, or a 0-30% OA Max is an adjustable item used to set the maximum
field supplied OA measuring station. outside air damper position when the unit is configured for a
LH Lvl Pos is a status item which is used to calibrate the left- 30% damper.
hand side (unit opposite drive side) of the optional DesignFlow
outdoor measuring apparatus. For details regarding calibration
of the DesignFlow apparatus, refer to the applicable model-
specific installation and maintenance manual.
RH Lvl Pos is a status item which is used to calibrate the right-
hand side (unit drive side) of the optional DesignFlow outdoor
measuring apparatus. For details regarding calibration of the
DesignFlow apparatus, refer to the applicable model-specific
installation and maintenance manual.
MinRFEFTm is an adjustable item used to set the time period
for which the return/exhaust fan must operate at the minimum
speed before the building static pressure override function is
activated.

OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER 48 www.DaikinApplied.com

 All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Menu Descriptions

Heating Set-Up
The Heating menu provides a summary of the control The control temperature can be return temperature, space
parameters for units with heating. The unit’s heating mode temperature or outside air temperature. The unit goes into the
of operation is controlled by the control temperature and the heating mode of operation when the control temperature is
heating setpoint temperature. The unit goes into the heating below the heating setpoint by more than ½ the deadband.
mode of operation by analyzing the control temperature.

Table 28: Heating Set-Up Menu

Item Display Name Default Setting Range Password Level
Htg Stage Time 5min 2–60min 4
Htg DB 2.0°F 1.0–10.0°F 4
Htg Period= 60s 0–999s 4
Htg Gain= 0.1 0.0–100.0 4
Htg PAT= 600s 0–999s 4
Htg Max Chg 10% 0–100% 4
Htg Hi OAT Lock 55°F 0–100°F 4
OAT Diff 2°F 0–10°F 4
None
Ntwrk
Space
Htg Reset= None Return 6
OAT
ExtmA
ExtV
Min Htg Spt= 55.0°F 40.0–140.0°F 6
0–100/
NA
Min Htg Spt @ 0/NA °F 6
°C
mA
Max Htg Spt= 55.0°F 40.0–140.0°F 6
0–100/
NA
Max Htg Spt @ 100.0°F °F 6
°C
mA
Min DAT Ctrl= Yes Yes, No 6
Min Dat Limit 55.0°F 0.0–70.0°F 4
OpenVlv
F&BP Method= OpenVlv 4
ModVlv
F&BP ChgOvrT= 37°F 0–60°F 4
Occ Heating= Yes Yes, No 6
Unocc Diff= 3°F 0–10°F 2
Htg Warmup Tm= 240s 0–999s 2
Htg Hld Period= 240s 0–999s 2
Max Purge Hld= 20s 10–180s 2
Gas Derate V= 10.0V 0–10.0V 2
RAT
MWU Sensor RAT Space 2
None

www.DaikinApplied.com 49 OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER

 All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Menu Descriptions

Htg Stage Time is an adjustable item used to set a minimum Min DAT Limit is a status only item which indicates the
time period between heating stage changes. discharge air low limit temperature on CAV zone control
Htg DB is an adjustable item which sets a dead band around units. Heating will be activated to maintain this setting when
the discharge heating setpoint parameter. For example, if the the discharge temperature falls below it during the Fan Only
discharge heating setpoint parameter is set to 100ºF and the operating state. On VAV or CAV discharge control units, the
Htg DB= parameter is set to 2ºF, the dead band around the set minimum discharge temperature limit is the DAT Clg Spt.
point would be from 101.0ºF to 99.0ºF. F&BP Method is an adjustable item used to set the face and
Htg Period an adjustable item which sets the “sampling time” bypass control method. When a unit equipped with steam or
used in the PI control function that modulates the heating valve hot water and face and bypass damper, there are two methods
or face & bypass dampers. available for controlling the heating arrangement. These are
the “Open Valve” and “Modulating Valve” methods.
Htg Gain is an adjustable item which sets the “Gain” used in
F&BP ChgOvrT is an adjustable item used to set the face and
the PI control function that modulates the heating valve or face
bypass changeover temperature.
& bypass dampers.
Htg PAT is an adjustable item which sets the “project ahead Htg Warmup Tm is an adjustable item which is used to set the
time” used in the PI control function that modulates the heating amount of time the gas burner will remain at a low fire position
valve or face & bypass dampers. on 100% OSA units (default 240 seconds) during the special
cold start sequence.
Htg Max Chg is an adjustable item that sets the maximum
value for an increase or decrease of the heating valve or face Htg Hld Period is an adjustable item used to set the amount
& bypass damper position. of time that the gas heating valve remains at its calculated
value on units equipped with 100% OA (default 240 seconds)
Htg Hi OAT Lock is an adjustable item which sets the high during the special cold start sequence. This is to allow the
outdoor air temperature heating lockout point. Heating temperature to approach equilibrium with the modulating gas
operation is disabled when the outdoor air temperature sensor heating valve at a fixed position.
input rises above this set point.
Occ Heating is an adjustable item which enables and disables
OAT Diff is an adjustable item which sets a differential below the “daytime” heating mode of operation. If the Occ Heating
the OATHtg Lock parameter. Heating operation is re-enabled parameter is set to No, the unit will only go into heating during
when the outdoor air temperature sensor input falls below the the initial morning warm-up cycle. If the Occ Heating parameter
OATHtg Lock value by more than this differential. is set to Yes, the unit can go into the heating mode of operation
Htg Reset is an adjustable item used to set the type of heating any time during the day.
reset to be used. Unocc Diff is an adjustable item that sets the unoccupied
Min Htg Spt is an adjustable item which sets the minimum heating differential.
heating discharge set point for use with a heating discharge air Max Purge Hld is an adjustable item that sets the value of the
temperature set point reset schedule. maximum purge hold timer.
Min Htg Spt @ is an adjustable item which sets the value of Gas Derate V is an adjustable item used to set the maximum
the sensor input, selected with the heating reset parameter, at analog output value for controlling the modulating gas valve
which the heating setpoint is reset to the Min Htg Spt value. actuator.
Max Htg Spt is an adjustable item which sets the maximum MWU Sensor is an adjustable item that sets the temperature
heating discharge set point for use with a heating discharge air sensor input to be used for morning warmup heating operation
temperature set point reset schedule. on discharge air control units. Setting this parameter to none
Max Htg Spt @ is an adjustable item which sets the value of disables morning warm up operation.
the sensor input, selected with the heating reset parameter, at
which the heating setpoint is reset to the Max Htg Spt value.
Min DAT Ctrl is an adjustable item used on VAV or CAV
discharge control units to activate or deactivate the low
discharge temperature limit function available on units
equipped with modulating or multistage heat.

OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER 50 www.DaikinApplied.com

 All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Menu Descriptions

Dehum Set-Up

Table 29: Dehumidification Menu

Item Display Name Default Setting Range Password Level
None
Rel Hum
Dehum Method= None 4
DewPt
Always
RH DB= 2% 0–10% 4
Dewpoint DB= 2.0°F 2–10°F 4
RH Period= 30s 0–999s 4

m
RH Gain= 1 0.0–100.0 4
RH PAT= 30s 0–999s 4
RH Max Chg= 10% 0–100% 4
LSC Lo Gain= 0.2 0.0–100.0 2
RH Stg Time= 10min 0–60min 4

.co
Stg Rht DB= 5°F 0–20°F 4
Occupied
Dehum Ctrl= Occupied 4
Always
Return
Sensor Loc= Return OAT 4
Space
Mn Lvg Coil T= 45.0°F 40–100°F 4
Mx Lvg Coil T= 52.0°F 40–100°F 4
es
No
Rht Cmp Lmtg= Yes 2
Yes
Min Rheat Spt= 55.0°F 40.0–100.0°F 4
Max Rheat Spt = 65.0°F 40.0–100.0°F 4

RH Sens Type= VDC VDC 2

mA
0.0–20.0
RH Min Sig= 0.0V 2
uid

V/mA
0.0–20.0
RH Max Sig= 10.0V 2
V/mA
Min Dehum Spd= 33% 0–100% 2
Max Dehum Spd= 100% 0–100% 2
10% (RPS)
Rht Min Pos= 0–100% 2
15% (MPS, DPS, DPH)
RH Dec Rate= 1 0–10.00%/s 2
-g
all

www.DaikinApplied.com 51 OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER

 All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Menu Descriptions

Dehum Method is an adjustable item used to set the Sensor Loc is an adjustable item which is used to select the
dehumidification method to either “RH” or “DewPt.” When location of the humidity sensor. The location is selected by
this parameter is set to “RH,” dehumidification operation is setting the Sensor Location value on the keypad to Return,
controlled to maintain the Rel Humidity value at the Relative Space, or OAT. The significance of the sensor location is that
Humidity Set Point. When this parameter is set to “DewPt,” this determines which temperature sensor is use to calculate the
dehumidification operation is controlled to maintain the Dew Dewpoint. OAT can only be selected for units with DAT control.
Point= value at the Dew Point Set Point. When this parameter Mn Lvg Coil T is an adjustable item which is used to set the
is set to “Always” dehumidification will be active as long as minimum leaving coil temperature (Default = 45°F).
mechanical cooling is not disabled.
Mx Lvg Coil T is an adjustable item which is used to set the
RH DB is an adjustable item that sets a dead band around maximum leaving coil temperature (Default = 52°F).
the relative humidity set point. For example, if the RH Setpoint
parameter is set to 50% and the RH Db parameter is set to 2% Rht Cmp Lmtg is an adjustable item used to enable or
the dead band around the set point would be from 49% to 51%. disable the Compressorized Reheat Cooling Capacity
Limiting Function.
Dewpoint DB is an adjustable item that sets a dead band
around the dew point set point. For example, if the DewPoint Min Reheat Spt is an adjustable item which is used to set the
Spt parameter is set to 50ºF and the DewPntDb parameter is minimum DAT during dehumidification.
set to 2ºF the dead band around the set point would be from Max Reheat Spt is an adjustable item which is used to set the
49ºF to 51ºF. maximum DAT during dehumidification.
RH Period is an adjustable item which sets the “sampling time” RH Sen Type is an adjustable item used to define the field
used in the PI control function for controlling the reheat valve. supplied humidity sensor input signal type.
RH Gain is an adjustable item which sets the “Gain” used in RH Min Signal is an adjustable item used to define the
the PI control function for controlling the reheat valve. minimum value of the field supplied humidity sensor current or
RH PAT is an adjustable item which sets the “project ahead voltage signal.
time” used in the PI control function for controlling the RH Max Signal is an adjustable item used to define the
reheat valve. maximum value of the field supplied humidity sensor current or
RH Max Chg an adjustable item that sets the maximum value voltage signal.
for an increase or decrease for controlling the reheat valve. Min Dehum Spd is an adjustable item used to set the
LSC Lo Gain - is an adjustable item which sets the “Gain” minimum supply fan VFD speed during dehumidification.
used in the PI control function for controlling the liquid Max Dehum Spd is an adjustable item used to set the
subcooling reheat valve. maximum supply fan VFD speed during dehumidification.
RH Stg Time is an adjustable item is an adjustable item Rht Min Pos is an adjustable item used to set the minimum
which sets a stage time period for controlling reheat on units position of the reheat valve when the PI loop is active.
equipped with a single stage of hot gas reheat.
RH Dec Rate is an adjustable item used to set the rate of
Stg Rht DB is an adjustable item which sets a dead band decrease for the reheat valve, where the unit leaves the
around the reheat setpoint parameter. dehumidification operation.
Dehum Ctrl is an adjustable item used to select whether
dehumidification as “always” allowed or only during “occupied”
modes of operation.

OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER 52 www.DaikinApplied.com

 All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Menu Descriptions

Energy Recovery Set-up

The Energy Recovery Set-up menu contains parameters that
relate to or are used to control the enthalpy wheel and exhaust
fan when a unit is equipped with an optional energy recovery
wheel system.

Table 30: Energy Recovery

Item Display Name Default Setting Range Password Level
Energy Rvcy= Yes Yes, No 4
ER Wheel= — On, Off 4
Wheel Speed= — 0–100% 4
Whl Spd Cmd= — 0–100% 4
ER LAT= — -50.0–200.0°F 4
ER EAT= — –50.0–200.0°F 4
Min ExhT Diff= 2.0°F 1.0–20.0°F 4
Max ExhT Diff= 6.0°F 1.0–20.0°F 4
ER Whl Stg Tm= 5min 1–100min 4
ER Whl Off Tm= 20min 1–100min 4
Rel Humidity= — 0–100% 4
Min Whl Spd 5% 0–100% 4
Intersect Pt= — -146.2.0–150.0°F 2
Fst Mgmt Meth= Timed Timed ExhAir 4
OA Fst Temp= -20.56°C -40.0 – 37.78°C 4
Defrost Time= 5min 0–60min 4
Defrst Period= 60min 0–1440min 4
Defrst On Tm= 1s 0–999s 2
Defrst Off Tm= 24s 0–999s 2
ER Whl Period= 30.0s 0–999.0s 2
ER Whl Gain= 1.0 0–100 2
ER Whl PAT= 30.0s 0–999.0s 2
ER Max Chg= 10% 0–100% 2
Yes
Capacity Limiting Yes 2
No

www.DaikinApplied.com 53 OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER

 All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Menu Descriptions

Energy Rvcy is an adjustable item which turns the optional Rel Humidity is a status only item that indicates the current
energy recovery system ON /OFF. relative humidity reading of the sensor.
ER Wheel is a status only item used to indicate whether the Min Whl Spd is an adjustable item used to set the energy
energy recovery wheel is currently ON or OFF. recovery minimum wheel speed.
Wheel Speed is a status only item that indicates the energy Intersect Pt is a status only item used to indicate the current
wheel variable speed supply air fan speed. intersection point value from the psychometric chart where
Wheel Spd Cmd is a status only item that indicates the current potential for wheel frosting exists.
energy wheel variable speed supply air fan commanded speed. Fst Mgmt Meth is an adjustable item used to select the frost
ER LAT is status only item which displays the current discharge protection method to be used on a constant speed energy
air temperature leaving the optional energy recovery wheel. wheel application.

ER EAT is status only item which displays the current exhaust OA Fst Temp is an adjustable item used to set the outside air
air temperature leaving the optional energy recovery wheel. frost temperature.

Min Exh T Diff is an adjustable item that sets a differential Defrost Time is an adjustable item used to set the duration of
below the calculated potential energy recovery exhaust air a defrost cycle.
frosting point. When the ER Exh T falls below the calculated Defrst Period is an adjustable item used to set how often a
frosting point by more that this value, the energy wheel will be defrost cycle will be initiated.
driven to its minimum speed, or turned OFF, to prevent frosting.
Defrst On Tm is an adjustable item used to select how long
Max Exh T Diff is an adjustable item that sets a differential the constant speed energy wheel is energized during defrost.
above the calculated potential energy recovery exhaust air
Defrst Off Tm is an adjustable item used to select how long the
frosting point. Once the wheel is driven to minimum speed,
constant speed energy wheel is de-energized during defrost.
or turned off, to prevent frosting, it is driven back to maximum
speed, or turned ON, only when ER Exh T rises back above ER Whl Period an adjustable item which sets the “sampling
the calculated frosting point by more that this value. time” used in the PI control function.
ER Whl Stg Tm is an adjustable item used to set a minimum ER Whl Gain is an adjustable item which sets the “Gain” used
time period for operating at either the minimum or maximum in the PI control function.
speed before action is taken to change speed during the frost ER Whl PAT is an adjustable item which sets the “project
protect mode of operation. ahead time” used in the PI control function.
ER Whl Off Tm is an adjustable item used to set the minimum ER Max Chg is an adjustable item that sets the maximum value
amount of time the energy wheel will remain off after being for an increase or decrease of the energy recovery wheel speed.
turned OFF due to a frosting/condensation condition.
Capacity Limiting is an adjustable item used to turn ON and
OFF the energy wheel capacity limiting function.

OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER 54 www.DaikinApplied.com

 All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Menu Descriptions

Head Pressure Set-Up

The Head Pressure Set-Up menu contains parameters that are used to maintain head pressure control.

Table 31: Head Pressure Setup Menu

Item Display Name Default Setting Range Password Level
Wtr Reg Vlv= — 0–100% 6
Head P Circ 1= — 0–750psi 6
Head P Circ 2= — 0–750psi 6
Setpoint= 260psi 230–340psi 6
Head Press DB= 10psi 0–50psi 4
WRV Period= 10s 0–999s 4
WRV Gain= 3.6 0.0–100.0 4
WRV PAT= 10s 0–999s 4
WRV Max Chg= 7% 0–100% 4
WRV Init Tm= 60s 0–3600s 2
Min WRV Pos= 10% 0–100% 2
Min WRV Tmp= 58°F 20–150°F 2
Max WRV Tmp= 105°F 20–150°F 2
WRV Act Time= 130s 0–300s 2
Min WRV Time= 60s 0–3600s 2

Wtr Reg Vlv is a status only item that indicates the current WRV Init Tm is an adjustable item that sets a minimum time
water regulating valve position. period that the WRV remains at an initial startup position
Head P Circ 1 is a status only item that indicates the current (InitPos) during the WRV start sequence..
refrigerant pressure for circuit 1. Min WRV Pos is an adjustable item used which sets the
minimum WRV position used in the WRV start sequence
Head P Circ 2 is a status only item that indicates the current
(default 10%).
refrigerant pressure for circuit 2.
Setpoint is an adjustable item that sets the refrigerant setpoint Min WRV Tmp is an adjustable item which is used to set the
used for controlling the water regulating valve. The water- edited temperature where WRV at a minimum position does
regulating valve is modulated to maintain the refrigerant not result in a high pressure condition.This is used in the WRV
pressure. start sequence.

Head Press DB is an adjustable item that sets a deadband Max WRV Tmp is an adjustable item which is used to set the
around the Head Pressure Setpoint parameter. edited temperature where WRV at 100% does not result in a
low pressure condition.This is used in the WRV start sequence.
WRV Period is an adjustable item which sets the “sampling
time” used in the PI control function of the water regulating WRV Act Time is an adjustable item which is used to set the
valve. time required for the WRV to be driven from 0 to 100%.

WRV Gain is an adjustable item which sets the “Gain” used in Min WRV Time is an adjustable item which sets the minimum
the PI control function of the water regulating valve. WRV time (default 60 seconds) used in the WRV start
sequence.
WRV PAT is an adjustable item which sets the “project ahead
time” used in the PI control function of the water regulating
valve.
WRV Max Chg is an adjustable item that sets the maximum
value for an increase or decrease of the water regulating valve.

www.DaikinApplied.com 55 OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER

 All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Menu Descriptions

Evap Cond Set-Up

Table 32: Evap Condensing Menu

Item Display Name Default Setting Range Password Level
Cond Fan Spd= — 0–100% 4
CFan Spd Cmd= — 0–100% 4
Min Fan Speed= 33% 0–100% 4
EvCond Stg Tm= 10min 0–100min 4
Sump Temp= — -50.0–150.0°F 4
Min Sump T= 75.0°F 0.0–100.0°F 4
Max Sump T= 85.0°F 0.0–100.0°F 4

m
Sump Dump Spt= 35.0°F 0.0–100.0°F 4
Cndtvy= — 0–5000S/cm 4
Hi Cndtvy Spt= 1100 S/cm 0–5000S/cm 4
SmpWtrLvlDly= 5mim 0–60min 4
PostClgTime= 10min 0–60min 4

.co
SepFlshTime= 1min 0–60min 4
No
Dolphin Sys= No 4
Yes

Cond Fan Speed is a status only item that displays the current Smp Pmp Delay adjustable item used to set the amount of
VFD speed when the evaporative condenser option includes a time the sump pump fail alarm is delayed. If the Sump Pump
VFD to control the first condenser fan on each circuit. status remains Off after the Sump Pump Output has been
Cond Fan Spd Cmd is a status only item that indicates the turned on for more than the Sump Pump Delay time, a Sump
es
current condenser fan VFD commanded speed. Pump fail alarm is initiated.

Min Fan Speed is an adjustable item used to set the minimum Conductivity is a status only item that displays the
speed for the VFD speed when the evaporative condenser conductivity level of the water in the sump of an evaporative
option includes a VFD to control the first condenser fan on cooled condenser on rooftop units.
each circuit. Hi Cndtvy Spt is an adjustable item that sets the alarm value
setpoint used to generate a conductivity problem alarm
uid

EvCond Stg Tm is an adjustable item used to set a minimum

time period between condenser fan stage changes. SmpWtrLvlDly is an adjustable item that sets the amount of
Sump Temp is a status only item that displays the current time sump water level input is ignored once the unit enters the
evaporative condenser sump temperature. cooling state

Min Sump T is an adjustable item used to set a minimum PostClgTime is an adjustable item that sets the amount of
evaporative condenser sump temperature set point. This value time the sump pump output remains on after the unit leaves
is used to determine when condenser fans are turned off. the cooling state.
SepFlshTime is an adjustable item that sets the amount of
-g

Max Sump T is an adjustable item used to set a maximum

evaporative condenser sump temperature set point. This value time the Purge Valve Binary Output is turned on to flush the
is used to determine when condenser fans should be turned on. solids out of the system separator.
Dolphin System is an adjustable parameter that indicates to
Sump Dump Spt is an adjustable item used to set a minimum
the controller whether or not a Dolphin water treatment method
sump temperature. The sump is emptied to prevent freezing if
all

is being used. When set to “yes” the controller assures the

the sump temperature drops below this set point.
sump pump is run every three days to reduce scaling.
Sump Pump Status is a status only item that displays the
current evaporative condenser sump pump status.

OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER 56 www.DaikinApplied.com

 All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Menu Descriptions

Alarm Configuration
Alarm Limits Menu
The Alarm Limits menu is used to set the limits of the discharge
air temperature sensor and the return air temperature sensor.

Table 33: Alarm Limits Setup Menu

Item Display Name Default Setting Range Password Level
Hi Disch Temp= 170°F 90–250°F 4
Lo Disch Temp= 40°F -50–50°F 4
Hi Return Temp= 120°F 90–150°F 4

Hi Disch Alm is an adjustable item that sets the high

temperature limit for the DAT sensor. When the discharge air
temperature sensor reaches this set point the unit will go into
the high discharge air alarm.
Lo Disch Alm is an adjustable item that sets the low
temperature limit for the DAT sensor. When the discharge air
temperature sensor reaches this set point the unit will go into
the low discharge air alarm.
Hi Return Alm is an adjustable item that sets the high
temperature limit for the return air temperature. When the RAT
sensor reaches this set point the unit will go into the high return
air temperature alarm.

Alarm Output Config Menu

Table 34: Alarm Out Configuration Setup Menu

Item Display Name Default Setting Range Password Level
ON
OFF
Faults= Fast 4
Fast
Slow
ON
OFF
Problems= Slow 4
Fast
Slow
ON
OFF
Warnings= OFF 4
Fast
Slow

The digital alarm output indicates the alarm group that contains The default values for the three groups of alarms are:
the highest priority active alarm. This output is ON when no • Warnings - OFF
alarms are active. The options for the action of this output
when an alarm in a group occurs are ON, Fast Blink, Slow • Problems - Slow Blink
Blink, or OFF. These can be edited via the keypad/display. • Faults - Fast Blink
A user could eliminate any signal of a particular group of
alarms through this output by selecting ON for that alarm group
in the keypad/display.

www.DaikinApplied.com 57 OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER

 All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Menu Descriptions

Alarm Delays Menu

The Alarm Delays Setup Menu can be accessed when a level 2
password has been entered. The default settings are the result
of many years of testing and should not be changed.

Table 35: Alarm Delays Setup Menu

Item Display Name Default Setting Range Password Level
OffHtClDelay= 120s 0–999s 2
Frz DelayTime= 30s 0–180s 2
LP Delay= 2s 0–10s 2
5s (410A)
LP Comp Delay= 0–300s 2
65s (R22/407C)
Aflw Ignr Tm= 120s 0–999s 2
Sens Alm Dly= 30s 0–300s 2
Temp Alm Dly= 30s 0–300s 2
Alarm Config
Man Clr
Emerg Stop= Man Clr 2
Auto Clr

OffHtClDelay is an adjustable item that is used to set the

duration the supply fan will remained energized when a unit
transitions to the off state while DX cooling or staged heating is
active.
Frz DelayTime is an adjustable item used to set the freeze
alarm delay time.
LP Delay is an adjustable item used to set the low pressure
switch delay time.
LP Comp Delay is an adjustable item used to set the low
pressure compressor delay time.
Aflw Ignr Tm is an adjustable item that sets the amount of
time the air proving switch is ignored after the supply fan is
started.
Sens Alm Dly is an adjustable item used to set the sensor
alarm delay time.
Temp Alm Dly is an adjustable item used to set the
temperature alarm delay time
Emerg Stop is an adjustable item used to set the emergency
shutdown to either manual or automatic restart.

OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER 58 www.DaikinApplied.com

 All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Menu Descriptions

Manual Control
The manual control of operation is a function that is used for operating the unit during a service call only. The unit must not be
operated in this mode for any extended period of time.
Table 36: Manual Control Menu
Item Display Name Default Setting Range Password Level
Normal
Manual Ctrl= Normal 4
ManCtrl
Supply Fan= OFF
OFF 4
ON
SAF Spd Cmd= 0% 0–100% 4
OFF
RF/EF VFD= OFF 4
ON
RF/EF Spd Cmd= 0% 0–100% 4
OAD/Econo= 0% 0–100% 4
Close
OAD OpCl= Close 4
Open
OFF
Var Cmp= OFF 4
ON
Var Cmp Cmd= 0% 0–100% 4
Stop
VCmp Emg Stop= Nrml 4
Normal
OFF
Comp 1 = OFF 4
ON
OFF
Comp 2 = OFF 4
ON
OFF
Comp 3 = OFF 4
ON
OFF
Comp 4 = OFF 4
ON
OFF
Comp 5 = OFF 4
ON
OFF
Comp 6 = OFF 4
ON
OFF
Comp 7 = OFF 4
ON
OFF
Comp 8 = OFF 4
ON
OFF
U1 Comp 1= OFF 4
ON
OFF
U1 Comp 2= OFF 4
ON
OFF
U2 Comp 1= OFF 4
ON
OFF
U2 Comp 2= OFF 4
ON
OFF
Cond Sol 1= OFF 4
ON
OFF
Cond Sol 2= OFF 4
ON
OFF
Cfan Outpt 1= OFF 4
ON
OFF
Cfan Outpt 2= OFF 4
ON
OFF
Cfan Outpt 3= OFF 4
ON
BP/WR Valve= 0% 0–100% 4
CW Valve= 0% 0–100% 4
OFF
ExhFan Out 1= OFF 4
ON
OFF
ExhFan Out 2= OFF 4
ON
OFF
ECond VFD= OFF 4
ON
ECFan Spd Cmd= 0% 0–100% 4
Close
EC Drn Valve= Close 4
Open
OFF
Sump Pump= OFF 4
ON
OFF
Sep Flsh Vlv= OFF 4
ON
OFF
SV1= OFF 4
ON
OFF
SV2= OFF 4
ON

www.DaikinApplied.com 59 OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER

 All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Menu Descriptions

Table 36 continued: Manual Control Menu

Item Display Name Default Setting Range Password Level
OFF
GasHtg OnOff= OFF 4
ON
Htg Valve= 0% 0–100% 4
SCR Out= 0% 0–100% 4
F&BP Damper= 0% 0–100% 4
OFF
Htg Stg 1= OFF 4
ON
OFF
SCR Ena 1= OFF 4
ON
OFF
Htg Stg 2= OFF 4
ON
OFF
SCR Ena 2= OFF 4
ON
OFF
Htg Stg 3= OFF 4
ON
OFF
Htg Stg 4= OFF 4
ON
OFF
Htg Stg 5= OFF 4
ON
OFF
Htg Stg 6= OFF 4
ON
Reheat Valve= 0% 0–100% 4
OFF
RH Output= OFF 4
ON
LSCRH Valve= 0% 0–100% 4
OFF
HGBP Valve= OFF 4
ON
OFF
ERec Wheel= OFF 4
ON
ER Whl Cmd= 0% 0–100% 4
OFF
ERBP Dmpr Cl= OFF 4
ON
OFF
ERBP Dmpr Op= OFF 4
ON
OFF
Cond Wtr Pump= OFF 4
ON
OFF
Alm Output= OFF 4
ON
OFF
Fan Op Out= OFF 4
ON

Manual Ctrl is an adjustable item that puts the unit into manual Var Cmp is an adjustable item used in manual control to turn on
control. Major components of the unit are turned on and off by the variable speed compressor
this control. The units normal control sequences are overridden Var Cmp Cmd is an adjustable item used in manual control to sets
in this state with the exception of all the “fault” alarms and the the speed of the variable speed compressor
cooling circuit high pressure and low pressure alarms.
VCmp Emg Stop is an adjustable item used in manual control to
Supply Fan is an adjustable item that turns on the supply fan. test the variable speed compressor Emergency Stop function
RF/EF is an adjustable item that turns ON the return/exhaust fan. Comp 1 OnOff is an adjustable item that turns on compressor #1.
SAF Spd Cmd is an adjustable item only on VAV units that Comp 2 OnOff is an adjustable item that turns on compressor #2.
sets the speed of the supply air fan.
Comp 3 OnOff is an adjustable item that turns on compressor #3.
RF/EF Spd Cmd is an adjustable item for units with VFD
on the return/exhaust fans that sets the speed of the return/ Comp 4 OnOff is an adjustable item that turns on compressor #4.
exhaust fan. Comp 5 OnOff is an adjustable item that turns on compressor #5.
OAD/Econo is an adjustable item which is used to set the Comp 6 OnOff is an adjustable item that turns on compressor #6.
economizer damper position.
Comp 7 OnOff is an adjustable item that turns on compressor #7.
OAD OpCl is an adjustable item which is used to turn the
OA damper output ON. This output is available only on self Comp 8 OnOff is an adjustable item that turns on compressor #8.
contained units.

OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER 60 www.DaikinApplied.com

 All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Menu Descriptions

U1 Comp 1 is an adjustable item the turns ON unloader 1 on Htg Valve is an adjustable item used to manually drive the
compressor 1. modulating heating valve open and closed.
U1 Comp 2 is an adjustable item the turns ON unloader 1 on SCR Out is an adjustable item used to manually drive the
compressor 2. output signal to the SCR.
U2 Comp 1 is an adjustable item the turns ON unloader 2 on F&BP Damper is an adjustable item used to manually drive
compressor 1. the F&BP damper open and closed.
U2 Comp 2 is an adjustable item the turns ON unloader 2 on Htg Stg 1 is an adjustable item that turns on the first stage of
compressor 2. heat on units equipped with staged heating.
CFan Outpt 1 is an adjustable item that turns ON the SCR Ena 1 is an adjustable item that enables the SCR heater.
condenser fan output #1. Htg Stg 2 is an adjustable item that turns on the second stage

m
CFan Outpt 2 is an adjustable item that turns ON the of heat on units equipped with staged heating.
condenser fan output #2. SCR Ena 1 is an adjustable item that enables the SCR heater.
Cond Sol 1 is an adjustable item used in manual control to Htg Stg 3 is an adjustable item that turns on the third stage of
turn ON/OFF the circuit 1 condenser coil splitter solenoid valve heat on units equipped with staged heating.

.co
Cond Sol 2 is an adjustable item used in manual control to Htg Stg 4 is an adjustable item that turns on the fourth stage of
turn ON/OFF the circuit 2 condenser coil splitter solenoid valve heat on units equipped with staged heating.
CFan Outpt 3 is an adjustable item that turns ON the Htg Stg 5 is an adjustable item that turns on the fifth stage of
condenser fan output #3. heat on units equipped with staged heating.
NOTE: Turning on any one of the compressors will
Htg Stg 6 is an adjustable item that turns on the sixth stage of
automatically turn ON the first condenser fan on
the circuit. Other condenser fans must be manually heat on units equipped with staged heating.
turned ON to control the head pressure of the unit. Reheat Valve is an adjustable item used to manually drive the
es
Refrigerant gauges must be connected to the unit reheat valve open and closed.
for observation of the head pressure in the manual
control mode of operation. Additional condenser fans RH Output is adjustable output that turns on the Reheat valve
must be turned ON to maintain the head pressure. output.
BP/WR Valve is an adjustable item used to manually drive the LSCRH Valve is adjustable output that turns on the Liquid
bypass/water regulating valve open and closed. Subcooler Reheat Valve output
uid

CW Valve is an adjustable item used to manually drive the HGBP Valve is an adjustable item used to manually drive the
chilled water valve open and closed. HGBP Valve open and closed.
Exh Fan Out 1 is an adjustable item that turns ON Exhaust fan ERec Wheel is an adjustable item which is used to turn on/off
output # 1. the energy recovery wheel output.
Exh Fan Out 2 is an adjustable item that turns ON Exhaust fan ERec Whl Cmd is an adjustable item is an adjustable item
output # 2. which is used to set the energy recovery wheel VFD speed.
ERBP Dmpr Cl is an adjustable item which is used to close the
-g

ECond VFD is an adjustable item which is used to turn ON/

OFF the evaporative cooling condenser fan VFD. energy recovery bypass damper.
ECFan Spd Cmd is an adjustable item which is used to set the ERBP Dmpr OP is an adjustable item which is used to open
evaporative cooling condenser fan VFD speed position. the energy recovery bypass damper.
EC Drn Valve is an adjustable item which is used to open/ Cond Wtr Pump is an adjustable item which is used to turn on/
all

close the evaporative cooling drain valve. off the condenser water pump output.
Sump Pump is an adjustable item which is used to turn on/off Alm Output is an adjustable item which is used to turn on/off
the evaporative cooling sump pump. the alarm output.
Sep Flsh Vlv is an adjustable item that turns on the Separator FanOp is an adjustable item which is used to turn on/off the
Flush Valve output. fan operation output.
SV1 is an adjustable output that turns on the circuit 1 liquid line NOTE: When Manual Control is set to ManCtrl, the Control
solenoid valve. Mode is set to OFF so that the unit will not restart
automatically. When Manual Control is set to Normal
SV2 is an adjustable output that turns on the circuit 2 liquid line all digital outputs in the Manual Control menu are set
solenoid valve. to OFF and all the analog outputs are set to 0.0% so
GasHtgOnOff is an adjustable item used to manually turn the that all outputs are in the OFF or minimum position
when Manual Control is set to ManCtrl.
main gas valve output ON/OFF.

www.DaikinApplied.com 61 OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER

 All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Menu Descriptions

Service Menus
Timer Settings Menu
The Timer Settings Menu is also available from the
Commission Unit Menu, and is described on page 33

Save/Restore Menu
The Save/Restore menu can be used to save or restore the
user configured parameters as well as reset the controller back
to the factory default parameters.

Table 37: Save/Restore Menu

Item Display Name Default Setting Range Password Level
Save Params= No No/Yes 2
Rstr Params= No No/Yes 2
Rstr Factory= No No/Yes 2
SaveToCard= No No/Yes 2
LoadFromCard No No/Yes 2

Save Params is an adjustable item used to save the current SaveToCard is an adjustable item used to save the current
parameters and configuration. parameters and configuration to an SD card.
Rstr Params is an adjustable item used to restore the current LoadFromCard is an adjustable item used to restore the
parameters and configuration. current parameters and configuration from an SD card.
Rstr Factory is an adjustable item used to restore the factory NOTE: The controller will automatically perform a reset when
parameters and configuration. the value of Load From Card is changed from No to
Yes and the enter button is pushed.

Active Alarms Menu

All active alarms as well as the date and time that they were
detected are displayed on the Active Alarm menu. These
alarms are displayed in order of group priority: Faults first,
Problems second, and Warnings last. Within each group,
alarms are displayed in the order that they were detected.

Table 38: Active Alarm Menu

Item Display Name Default Setting Range Password Level
Active Alm Count= — 0–10 None
No
ClrFlts
ClrAlms= No ClrPrblms None
ClrWrngs
ClrAllAlms
+Alarm 1:Alarm Type — None
+Alarm 2:Alarm Type — None

Event Log Menu

The last fifty events (such as variable compressor unloading
events, both detection and return to normal) as well as the
date and times that they were detected are displayed on the
Event Log menu. These events are displayed in the order
that they were detected. The event that was detected most
recently is displayed first. Multiple occurrences of the same
event may appear.

OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER 62 www.DaikinApplied.com

 All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Menu Descriptions

Alarm Log Menu

The last fifty alarm events (alarm detection and return to
normal) as well as the date and times that they were detected
are displayed on the Alarm Log menu. These alarm events are
displayed in the order that they were detected. The alarm event
that was detected most recently is displayed first. Multiple
occurrences of the same alarm may appear.

Table 39: Alarm Log Menu

Item Display Name Default Setting Range Password Level
Log Alm Count= — 0–50 None
No
ClrLog= No None
Yes
+Alarm 1:Alarm Type — None
+Alarm 2:Alarm Type — None

Once an alarm is cleared there will be two entries in the Alarm

Log. A (+) sign will be shown next to the entry added when the
alarm became active and a (-) sign will be shown next to the
entry added when the alarm has been cleared.

Alarm Configuration Menu

The Alarm Configuration menu is also available under the
Commission Unit menu. Refer to page 57.

Analog Input Status Menu

The Analog Input Status Menu provides diagnostic information
to qualified service personnel. The items listed in this menu will
provide current status information of the unit’s analog inputs.
The value shown is the input resistance shown in 1/10th of an
ohm scale. Example: MCB-AI1 (DAT sensor) shows a value
of 181380, the actual resistance would be 18,138 ohms. This
would translate to a temperature of 53.5 ºF.

Table 40: Analog Input Status Menu

Item Display Name Default Setting Range Password Level
MCB-AI1= — 0–99999999 2
MCB AI2= — 0–99999999 2
MCB AI3= — 0–99999999 2

www.DaikinApplied.com 63 OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER

 All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Menu Descriptions

Universal I/O Status Menu

The Universal I/O Status Menu provides diagnostic information configured for mA, the value will be displayed in micro amps
to qualified service personnel. The items listed in this menu (1 mA = 1000 micro amps). If I/O is configured for voltage, the
will provide current status information of the Universal inputs value is displayed in 1/1000th volt scale. Example: MCB-X7
and outputs. If the universal I/O is configured for resistance, (OA Damper analog output) shows a value of 3000, this would
the value will be displayed in 1/10th ohm scale. If the I/O is translate into 3 VDC.

Table 41: Universal I/O Status Menu

Item Display Name Default Setting Range Password Level Item Display Name Default Setting Range Password Level
MCB X1= — 0–9999999 2 EMC X1= — 0–9999999 2
MCB X2= — 0–9999999 2 EMC X2= — 0–9999999 2
MCB X3= — 0–9999999 2 EMC X3= — 0–9999999 2
MCB X4= — 0–9999999 2 EMC X4= — 0–9999999 2
MCB X5= — 0–9999999 2 EMC X5= — 0–9999999 2
MCB X6= — 0–9999999 2 EMC X6= — 0–9999999 2
MCB X7= — 0–9999999 2 EMC X7= — 0–9999999 2
MCB X8= — 0–9999999 2 EMC X8= — 0–9999999 2
EMA X1= — 0–9999999 2 EMD X1= — 0–9999999 2
EMA X2= — 0–9999999 2 EMD X2= — 0–9999999 2
EMA X3= — 0–9999999 2 EMD X3= — 0–9999999 2
EMA X4= — 0–9999999 2 EMD X4= — 0–9999999 2
EMA X5= — 0–9999999 2 EMD X5= — 0–9999999 2
EMA X6= — 0–9999999 2 EMD X6= — 0–9999999 2
EMA X7= — 0–9999999 2 EMD X7= — 0–9999999 2
EMA X8= — 0–9999999 2 EMD X8= — 0–9999999 2
EMB X1= — 0–9999999 2 EME X1= — 0–9999999 2
EMB X2= — 0–9999999 2 EME X2= — 0–9999999 2
EMB X3= — 0–9999999 2 EME X3= — 0–9999999 2
EMB X4= — 0–9999999 2 EME X4= — 0–9999999 2
EMB X5= — 0–9999999 2 EME X5= — 0–9999999 2
EMB X6= — 0–9999999 2 EME X6= — 0–9999999 2
EMB X7= — 0–9999999 2 EME X7= — 0–9999999 2
EMB X8= — 0–9999999 2 EME X8= — 0–9999999 2

OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER 64 www.DaikinApplied.com

 All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Menu Descriptions

Digital Input Status Menu

The Digital Input Status Menu provides diagnostic
information to qualified service personnel. The items listed
in this menu will provide current status information of the
controller’s digital inputs.

Table 42: Digital Input Status Menu

Item Display Name Default Setting Range Password Level
MCB DI1= OFF OFF/ON 2
MCB-DI2= OFF OFF/ON 2
MCB DI3= OFF OFF/ON 2
MCB DI4= OFF OFF/ON 2
MCB DI5= OFF OFF/ON 2
MCB DI6= OFF OFF/ON 2

Digital Output Status Menu

The Digital Output Status Menu provides diagnostic
information to qualified service personnel. The items listed
in this menu will provide current status information of the
controller’s digital outputs.

Table 43: Digital Output Status Menu

Item Display Name Default Setting Range Password Level Item Display Name Default Setting Range Password Level
MCB DO1= OFF OFF/ON 2 EMC DO1= Off Off/On 2
MCB DO2= OFF OFF/ON 2 EMC DO2= Off Off/On 2
MCB DO3= OFF OFF/ON 2 EMC DO3= Off Off/On 2
MCB DO4= OFF OFF/ON 2 EMC DO4= Off Off/On 2
MCB DO5= OFF OFF/ON 2 EMC DO5= Off Off/On 2
MCB DO6= OFF OFF/ON 2 EMC DO6= Off Off/On 2
MCB DO7= OFF OFF/ON 2 EMD DO1= Off Off/On 2
MCB DO8= OFF OFF/ON 2 EMD DO2= Off Off/On 2
MCB DO9= OFF OFF/ON 2 EMD DO3= Off Off/On 2
MCB DO10= OFF OFF/ON 2 EMD DO4= Off Off/On 2
EMA DO1= OFF OFF/ON 2 EMD DO5= Off Off/On 2
EMA DO2= OFF OFF/ON 2 EMD DO6= Off Off/On 2
EMA DO3= OFF OFF/ON 2 EME DO1= Off Off/On 2
EMA DO4= OFF OFF/ON 2 EME DO2= Off Off/On 2
EMA DO5= OFF OFF/ON 2 EME DO3= Off Off/On 2
EMA DO6= OFF OFF/ON 2 EME DO4= Off Off/On 2
EMB DO1= OFF OFF/ON 2 EME DO5= Off Off/On 2
EMB DO2= OFF OFF/ON 2 EME DO6= Off Off/On 2
EMB DO3= OFF OFF/ON 2
EMB DO4= OFF OFF/ON 2
EMB DO5= OFF OFF/ON 2
EMB DO6= OFF OFF/ON 2

www.DaikinApplied.com 65 OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER

 All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Menu Descriptions

Network Input Status Menu

The Network Input Status Menu provides diagnostic
information to qualified service personnel. The items listed
in this menu will provide current status information of the
controller’s network inputs.

Table 44: Network Input Status Menu

Range Range
Default Password Item Display Default Password
Item Display Name (No Network (No Network value
Setting Level Name Setting Level
value in Bold) in Bold)
-50.0–200.0°F
Net OAT In= — 2 Net Cl Ena Vl= — 0–255% (255%) 2
(621.8°F)

m
-0.0–150.0°F
Net SpaceT In= — 2 Net Ht Ena Sw= — -1.0–1.0 (-1.0) 2
(621.8°F)
Occ Net Ht Ena Vl= — 0–255% (255%) 2
Unocc Net Ec Ena Sw= — -1.0–1.0 (-1.0) 2
TntOvrd Net Ec Ena Vl= — 0-255% (255%) 2

.co
NetCurrState= — Standby 2 Net SAF Cap= — 0–100% (164%) 2
Auto Net ExhF Cap= — 0–100% (164%) 2
0–5000ppm
(NULL) Net Space IAQ= — 2
(65535ppm)
Occ Net Rel Humid= — 0-100% (164%) 2
Unocc Net DATClgSpt= — 40.0–100.0°F 2
TntOvrd Net DATHtgSpt= — 40.0–140.0°F 2
NetNextState= — 2
es
0.0-100.0°F
Standby nviSetpoint= — 2
(621.8°F)
Auto Occ
(NULL) Unocc
0–65534min OccManCmd= — TntOvrd 2
NetTmToNxtSt= — 2
(65535min) Standby
Off Auto
uid

HeatOnly Net MinOA= — 0–100% 2

CoolOnly nvoEffSpt= — 0.0–100.0°F 2
Net App Mode= — 2
FanOnly nciOccClgSpt= — 0.0–100.0°F 2
Auto nciOccHtgSpt= — 0.0–100.0°F 2
(Auto) nciHVACType= — HVT_GEN 2
Net Cl Ena Sw= — -1.0–1.0(-1.0) 2
-g
all

OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER 66 www.DaikinApplied.com

 All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Menu Descriptions

Modbus Status Menu

The Modbus Status Menu provides diagnostic information
to qualified service personnel. The items listed provide the
status of the Modbus communications with the various devices
controlled by the internal Modbus network

Table 45: Modbus Status Menu

Item Display Name Default Setting Range Password Level
SF MB Status= — Fault/OK 2
RFEF MB Status= — Fault/OK 2
ER MB Status= — Fault/OK 2
IFB MB Status= — Fault/OK 2
D3 MB Status= — Fault/OK 2
MB Resistance= Yes Yes/No 2
Set Add 1
ECM Config= Done Set Add 2 2
Set AICtl

SF MB Status is a status only item which indicates the status ER MB Status is a status only s item which indicates the
of the Modbus communications between the main controller status of the Modbus communications between the main
and the supply fan motor. controller and the energy recover wheel variable speed supply
RFEF MB Status is a status only item which indicates the air fan.
status of the Modbus communications between the main
controller and the return/exhaust fan motor.

D3 Status Menu
The D3 Status menu is provided for viewing the status of an
interface with the unit via a D3 gateway. Refer to IM 1133 –
DIII-Net Communication Gateway for detailed information.

Table 46: D3 Status Menu

Item Display Name Default Setting Range Password Level Item Display Name Default Setting Range Password Level
OK OA Hum Ratio= g/kg — 0–30 g/Kg 2
D3 Comm Sts= — 2
Error D3 SWVers= — XXXXXXXXXX 2
OK OAAdd1–16= — XXXXXXXX 2
D3 Addr Err= — 2
Error OAAdd17–32= — XXXXXXXX 2
On OAAdd33–49= — XXXXXXXX 2
D3 On/Off= — 2
Off OAAdd50–64= — XXXXXXXX 2
Auto SetOAAddr= 0 0–64 2
Cooling CurrOAAddr= — 0–64 2
D3 Mode= — 2
Heating CurrOAAmps= — 0–200A 2
Fan CurrOARLA= — 0–200A 2
D3 Clg Spt= — 0–100ºF 2
D3 Htg Spt= — 0–120ºF 2
NA
Low
D3 SAF Spd= — 2
Med
High
D3 Min Load= — 0–100% 2
D3 Max Load= — 0–100% 2
Enabled
D3 Eco Ena= — 2
Disabled
OA Enthalpy= — 0–86 BTU/lb 2

www.DaikinApplied.com 67 OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER

 All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Menu Descriptions

Sensor Offsets Menu

The Sensor Offsets Menu provides a means of calibrating the
various temperature sensor inputs to the unit. Each sensor
can be “biased” by as much as +/- 10.0°F.

Table 47: Sensor Offset Menu

Item Display Name Default Setting Range Password Level
Disch Air= 0.0°F 0.0–10.0°F 2
Return Air= 0.0°F 0.0–10.0°F 2
SpaceTemp= 0.0°F 0.0–10.0°F 2
OA Temp= 0.0°F 0.0–10.0°F 2
ER LAT= 0.0°F 0.0–10.0°F 2
ER EAT= 0.0°F 0.0–10.0°F 2
DRT1= 0.0°F -10.0–10.0°C 2
DRT2= 0.0°F -10.0–10.0°C 2

OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER 68 www.DaikinApplied.com

 All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Menu Descriptions

Unit Maintenance
Operating Hours
The Operating Hours menu gives a summary of the hours of
operation for each of the supply fans, return/exhaust fans,
compressors, heating and economizer operation.

Table 48: Operating Hours Menu

Item Display Name Default Setting Range Password Level
Supply Fan= — 0–50000H 6
Ret/Exh Fan= — 0–50000H 6
Mech Cool= — 0–50000H 6
Comp # 1= — 0–50000H 6
Comp # 2= — 0–50000H 6
Comp # 3= — 0–50000H 6
Comp # 4= — 0–50000H 6
Comp # 5= — 0–50000H 6
Comp # 6= — 0–50000H 6
Comp # 7= — 0–50000H 6
Comp # 8= — 0–50000H 6
Heating= — 0–50000H 6
Economizer= — 0–50000H 6
Tnt Override= — 0–50000H 6
Dehumid= — 0–50000H 6
ER Wheel= — 0–50000H 6
Exh Out 1= — 0–50000h 4
Exh Out 2= — 0–50000h 4
Reheat= — 0–50000h 4

Supply Fan is a status item which gives the number of hours Heating is a status item which gives the number of hours that
the supply fan has operated. the heating mode has operated.
Return/Exhaust Fan is a status item which gives the number Economizer is a status item which gives the number of hours
of hours the return/exhaust fans have operated. that the economizer has operated.
Mech Cool is a status item which gives the number of hours Tnt Override is a status item which gives the number of hours
that mechanical cooling has operated. that the unit has operated in the Tenant Override mode of
operation.
Comp #1 is a status item which gives the number of hours that
compressor #1 has operated. Dehumid is a status item which gives the number of hours that
Comp #2 is a status item which gives the number of hours that the dehumidification has operated.
compressor #2 has operated. ER Wheel is a status item which gives the number of hours
that the energy recovery wheel has operated.
Comp #3 is a status item which gives the number of hours that
compressor #3 has operated. Exh Out 1 is a status item which gives the number of hours the
Comp #4 is a status item which gives the number of hours that first stage exhaust fan has operated.
compressor #4 has operated. Exh Out 2 is a status item which gives the number of hours the
Comp #5 is a status item which gives the number of hours that second stage exhaust fan has operated.
compressor #5 has operated. Reheat is a status item which gives the number of hours the
Comp #6 is a status item which gives the number of hours that Reheat has operated
compressor #6 has operated.
Comp #7 is a status item which gives the number of hours that
compressor #7 has operated.
Comp #8 is a status item which gives the number of hours that
compressor #8 has operated.

www.DaikinApplied.com 69 OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER

 All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Menu Descriptions

BMS Communications Menu

LON/BACnetIP/BACnetMSTP Setup Menu
See the Installation & Maintenance Manuals below for detailed • IM 916 MicroTech III Rooftop unit controller - BACnet IP
instructions communications
• IM 917 MicroTech III Rooftop unit controller - BACnet
MSTP communications
• IM 918 MicroTech III Rooftop unit controller - BACnet
LON communications
Network Unit Set-up Menu
The Network Unit Set-up menu provides one location for the Set-up of items that can be controlled via a network BMS system.

Table 49: Network Unit Set-up Menu

Default Password Default Password
Item Display Name Setting Range Level Item Display Name Setting Range Level
None Heat/Cool Changeover
Space Sensor= Digtl/Net Anlog/Net 2 RAT
Digtl/Net Space
Unit Mode Settings Ctrl Temp Src= RAT MAT 2
OFF OAT
Heat Only None
Cool Only No
Ctrl Mode= OFF 2 AplyTstatChg= No 2
Fan Only Yes
Heat/Cool No
UseTstatSpt= No 2
Auto/Net Yes
Occ Oc c Clg Spt= 72.0°F 0.0–100.0°F 2
Unocc Occ Htg Spt= 68.0°F 0.0–100.0°F 2
Occ Mode= Auto/Net 2
TntOvrd Fan Control Options
Auto/Net DSP
Reset Options Spd/Net
None 1ZnVAV
SAF Ctrl= DSP 2
Network BPS
Space CO2
Return CFM
Clg Reset= None 2
OAT None
ExtmA Tracking
ExtV RFEF BldgP BldgP 2
Airflow Spd/Net
None OA Damper
Network
Space
Return
Htg Reset= None 2
OAT
ExtmA
ExtV
Airflow
AplyMinOAChg= No No, Yes 2
None
Network
Ext VDC
Min OA Reset= None 2
Ext mA
IAQ VDC
IAQ mA

OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER 70 www.DaikinApplied.com

 All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Menu Descriptions

Unit Configuration
Unit Configuration Setup Menu
After the main control board application software is loaded the control panel door.
into the MCB, it must be “configured” for the specific Table 50 lists the configuration code variables including the
control application. This consists of setting the value of 25 position within the code, description of the parameter, and the
configuration variables within the MCB. These variables define applicable settings for each. The default values are shown
things such as the type of cooling, number of compressors and in bold font. The unit is configured at the factory however
cooling stages and the type of heat. If all of these items are not may also be configured in the field by accessing the Unit
set appropriately for the specific unit, the unit will not function Configuration Menu. Once changes have been made to the
properly. The correct settings for these parameters are defined Unit Configuration Menu, the Apply Changes flag must be
for a given unit by the unit “Software Configuration Code.”

m
changed from no to yes in order for the controller to recognize
The “Software Configuration Code” consists of a 29-character the changes. Setting the Apply Changes flag to yes will
string of numbers and letters. The code can be found on the automatically rest the controller.
Unit Software Identification Label located on the back side of

.co
Table 50: Unit Configuration Menu
Configuration
Description Values (Default in Bold) Special Condition RTU MPS DPS DPS_H SCU
Code Position
0=Applied Rooftop (RTU)
1=Self-Contained (SCU)
1 Unit Type 2=Commercial Rooftop (MPS) ● ● ● ● ●
3=Rebel Cool Only (DPS)
4=Rebel Heat Pump (DPH)
0=Zone Control
es
2 Control Type 1=DAT Control ● ● ● ● ●
2=1ZoneVAV
0 = None
1=Standard Compressorized Clg
2=Chilled Water
3=F&BP
4=Variable Comp Circuit 1
3 Cooling Type 5=Variable Comp Circuit 2 ● ● ● ● ●
uid

6=NA
7=NA)
8=NA)
9=Digital Comp 1 Circuit
10=Digital Comp 2 Circuits
0=None
1=Generic Condenser
2=2Cmp/2Circ/3Stg
3=3Cmp/2Circ/4Stg
4=2Cmp/2Circ/2or6StgorVar
(6 stg if 7=2,3,4or5)
-g

5=3Cmp/3Circ/3Stg_NoWRV
6=3Cmp/3Circ/3Stg_WRV
7=4Cmp/2Circ/4StgorVar
8=4Cmp/4Circ/4Stg_NoWRV
9=4Cmp/4Circ/4Stg_WRV
A=6Cmp/2Circ/6StgorVar
Compressorized Cooling
all

4 B=6Cmp/6Circ/6Stg_NoWRV ● ● ● ● ●
Configuration
C=6Cmp/6Circ/6Stg_WRV
D=3Cmp/2Circ/5StgorVar
E=4Cmp/2Circ/5or8Stg)
(8 stg if 7=2,3,4or5)
F=8Cmp/4Circ/8Stg
G=8Cmp/8Circ/8Stg
H=6Cmp/3Circ/6Stg
I=Not Used
J=3 Cmp/3Circ/4Stg
K=Spare
L=1Var/1Circ
M=Var/1STD/1Circ

www.DaikinApplied.com 71 OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER

 All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Menu Descriptions

Table 50 continued: Unit Configuration Menu

Configuration
Description Values (Default in Bold) Special Condition RTU MPS DPS DPS_H SCU
Code Position
1 – 8 Stages (default = 8)/ 0=NA
Generic Condenser Stages/ 1=Single ● ● ●
5
VFD Comp Cfg 2=Tandom (if 4=4, 5or 6) (if 4=4, 5or 6)
3=Trio
0 = No This position currently
6 Low Ambient has no effect on unit
1 = Yes operation.
0=Std Method 1 ● ● ● ●
1=Std Method 2
2=Evap ABB
3=Evap MD2
4=Evap MD3
7 Condenser Control
5=Evap DF
6=Not Used
7=EBM
8=INV
9=INV w/MicroC OA Coil
0=None
1=Single Position 30%
2=Single Position 100% Values 1, 2, 5 & 7
3=Economizer Airside only apply if
4=Economizer Waterside Position 1 = 0 (RTU),
8 Damper Type 2 (MPS), 3 or 4 (DPS) ● ● ● ● ●
5=100%OA_D3
6=AirEcon_D3 Value 4 only applies if
7=30%_DOAS Position 1 = 1 (SCU)
8=EconoAirsideFDD
9=D3EconFDD
0=None
1=DF_015-030 (800)
2=DF_036-042 (802)
3=DF_045-075 (047)
9 OA Flow Station ● ● ● ● ●
4=DF_080-135 (077)
5=Generic Flow Station
6=Generic Flow Station w/CO2
7=Ebtron MB
0=None
1=F&BP Control
2=Staged
3=Modulated Gas, 3-1
10 Heating Type 4=Modulated Gas 20-1 ● ● ● ● ●
5=Steam or Hot Water
6=SCR Electric
7=MPSLoGas
8=MPSHiGas
11 Max Heating Stages 1-8 Stages (Default = 1) ● ● ● ● ●
12, 13, 14 Max Heat Rise Three Digits (Default = 100) ● ● ● ● ●
0=Constant Volume
1=VFD/ABB
2=VFD/DF
3=VFD/MD2
15 Supply Fan Type ● ● ● ● ●
4=VFD/MD3
5=VFD/MD6
6=EBMVAV
7=EBMCAV
0=CAV
1=RF_EF VFD/ABB
2=RF_EF VFD/DF
3=RF_EF VFD/MD2
4=RF_EF VFD/MD3
5=RF_EF VFD/MD6
6=PrpEx VFD/ABB
7=PrpEx VFD/DF
16 Return Fan Type 8=PrpEx VFD/MD2 ● ● ● ●
9=PrpEx VFD/MD3
A=PrpEx VFD/MD6
B=None
C=1StageExh
D=2StageExh
E=3StageExh
F=EBMVAV
G=EBMCAV

OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER 72 www.DaikinApplied.com

 All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Menu Descriptions

Table 50 continued: Unit Configuration Menu

Configuration
Description Values (Default in Bold) Special Condition RTU MPS DPS DPS_H SCU
Code Position
0=None
1=Tracking
Return/Exhaust Fan Capacity
17 2=Building Pressure ● ● ● ●
Control Method
3=Speed
4=OADamper
0=No
18 Second Duct Pressure Sensor ● ●
1= Yes
0=No
19 Entering Fan Temp Sensor ● ● ● ●
1=Yes
0=None
1=ConstSpdWhl/NoRH
2=VarSpdWhl/Danfoss
20 Energy Recovery 3=VarSpdWhl/MD2 ● ● ● ●
4=VarSpdWhl/MD3
5=VarSpdWhl/ABB
6=ConstSpdWhl/wRH
0=Individual Values 0 and 1
21 Cooling Circuit Type 1=2,3 or 4 Circ. Water Condenser are valid only when ● ● ●
2=2 Circ. Air Condenser Position 1 = 1 (SCU)
0=No This position
22 Head Pressure Control is valid only when ●
1=Yes Position 1 = 1 (SCU).
0=Slave This position
23 Bypass Valve Control is valid only when ●
1=Bypass Position 1 = 1 (SCU).
24, 25, 26 Unit Size Three digits (default 050) ● ● ● ● ●
0=R22
27 Refrigerant Type 1=R407C ● ● ● ● ●
2=R410A
0=None
1=StgHG
2=ModHG
28 Reheat Type ● ● ● ●
3=StdHtRht
4=ModLSC
5=ModHG&LSC
0=208/60Hz
1=230/60Hz
2=460/60Hz
3=575/60Hz
29 Unit Voltage ● ● ● ● ●
4=208/50Hz
5=230/50Hz
6=460/50Hz
7=575/50Hz
0=None
1=EVB_Sag
2=EVB_DF
30 EVType 3=MTIII_Sag ● ●
4=MTIII_DF
5=MTIII_Sag_DF
6=MTIII_DF_Sag

Alarm Lists Menu

The Alarm Lists Menu is also available from the Service Menu
and is described on page 62.

www.DaikinApplied.com 73 OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER

 All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Menu Descriptions

Trending Menus
The Trending Menus allow for setting up and managing onboard Points 1-8 (Fixed)
trending of up to 30 data points within the controller. This data
can then be exported to an SD card. The trending memory will The first 8 trending points are fixed and will automatically be trended
begin over-writing the oldest existing data in the controller’s when ever the trending function is activated.
memory when the allocated trending memory fills up. If an
SD card is installed in the controllers SD card reader slot, an Table 52: Points 1-8 (Fixed)
automatic export of the data will occur every night at midnight. Item Display Password
Name Default Setting Range Level
Table 51: Trending Menu Point 1= UnitSt UnitSt 2
Point 2= Clg% Clg% 2
Item Display Default Setting Range Password Point 3= Htg% Htg% 2
Name Level
Point 4= SAF% SAF% 2
No
Trending Ena= No 2 Point 5= OAD/Eco% OAD/Eco% 2
Yes
Point 6= CtrlTmp CtrlTmp 2
No
Apply Chgs= No 2 Point 7= DAT DAT 2
Yes
Point 8= OAT OAT 2
Sample Time= 300s 1–3600s 2
Off
TrendOnOff= Off 2
On Points 9-24 (From List)
No
Export Data= No
Yes
2 Trending Points 9 through 16 can be selected from a primary
Done
list of available date points. Trending Points 17 through 24
Clear Trend= Done ClrData 2
can be selected from a secondary list of available date points.
ClrCfg
See Table 56 on page 76 and Table 57 on page 77 for
the primary and secondary listing of points.
Trending Ena is an adjustable item which enables and
disables the on board trending function. Table 53: Points 9-4 (From List)
Apply Changes is an adjustable item which must be set to Item Display
Default Setting Range
Password
make changes to trending point definitions and sampling rate Name Level

take effect. Point 9= None Primary List 2

Point 10= None Primary List 2
Sample Time is an adjustable item used to the sampling rate Point 11= None Primary List 2
for trending data points. Point 12= None Primary List 2
TrendOnOff is an adjustable item which starts and stops the Point 13= None Primary List 2
on board trending function. Point 14= None Primary List 2
Point 15= None Primary List 2
Export Data is an adjustable item which initiates a manual Point 16= None Primary List 2
export of the current on board trend data to an SD card. Point 17= None Secondary List 2
Clear Trend is an adjustable item used to either clear only the Point 18= None Secondary List 2
current trend data or the entire trend configuration. Point 19= None Secondary List 2
Point 20= None Secondary List 2
Point 21= None Secondary List 2
Point 22= None Secondary List 2
Point 23= None Secondary List 2
Point 24= None Secondary List 2

OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER 74 www.DaikinApplied.com

 All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Menu Descriptions

Points 25-27 (With IDs) Points 28-30 (With IDs)

Trending Points 25 through 27 can be freely selected all Trending Points 28 through 30 can be freely selected all
the available points and point members that exist within the the available points and point members that exist within the
controller. In this case the user must know and enter the point controller. In this case the user must know and enter the point
ID number, point Type number and point Member number. ID number, point Type number and point Member number.
Factory assistance will generally be necessary to indentify this Factory assistance will generally be necessary to indentify this
information for a specific point. information for a specific point.

Table 54: Points 25-27 (With IDs) Table 55: Points 28-30 (With IDs)
Item Display Password Item Display Password
Name Default Setting Range Level Default Setting Range
Name Level
Point 25 Point 28
ID= F0AF0000 00000000– 2 00000000–
FFFFFFFF ID= F0AF0000 2
FFFFFFFF
Type= 0000 0000–FFFF 2 Type= 0000 0000–FFFF 2
Mem Num= 0100 0000–FFFF 2 Mem Num= 0100 0000–FFFF 2
Point 26 Point 29
ID= F0AF0000 00000000– 2 00000000–
FFFFFFFF ID= F0AF0000 FFFFFFFF 2
Type= 0000 0000–FFFF 2 Type= 0000 0000–FFFF 2
Mem Num= 0100 0000–FFFF 2 Mem Num= 0100 0000–FFFF 2
Point 27 Point 30
ID= F0AF0000 00000000– 2 00000000–
FFFFFFFF ID= F0AF0000 FFFFFFFF 2
Type= 0000 0000–FFFF 2 Type= 0000 0000–FFFF 2
Mem Num= 0100 0000–FFFF 2 Mem Num= 0100 0000–FFFF 2

www.DaikinApplied.com 75 OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER

 All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Menu Descriptions

Trending Selection Lists

Table 56: Primary Trending Select List

HMI Name Select Abbreviation Type ID
Bldg Press= BSP 2203 F0AFC4BB
Clg State= ClgSt 230B F0AF3991
Clg Status= ClgSts 230B F0AFF6A6
Clg Press Lmtg= ClPLmtg 230B F0AF3B4E
Cmp Ratio Lmtg= CpRLmtg 230B F0AF7BA2
DAT Clg Spt= DAClgSp 2300 F0AF64FD
Dehum Status= DeHmSts 230B F0AF56EA

m
DFT= DFT 2203 F0AFCA19
Ref DLT Lmtg= DLLmtg 230B F0AFB273
DRT1= DRT1 2203 F0AFD8D7
DRT3= DRT3 2203 F0AFF895
Duct Press= DSP 230A F0AF143C

.co
Econo Status= EcoSts 230B F0AFC1AB
EF/LC Temp= EFT/LCT 2203 F0AF356B
ER EAT= EREAT 2203 F0AF0DBB
ER LAT= ERLAT 2203 F0AFFD44
EVI Pos= EVI% 2203 F0AF3028
EVO Pos= EVO% 2203 F0AF17B1
EW Temp= EWT 2203 F0AFCD6B
Htg Press Lmtg= HtPLmtg 230B F0AF3FE7
es
INV Brd Lmtg= IBLmtg 230B F0AFBAB2
INV Cmp Spd= INV% 2203 F0AFDA3E
Mixed Air= MAT 2203 F0AFCD1F
Min OA Pos= MinOA% 230A F0AFEEC9
Occ Clg Spt= OcClgSp 2300 F0AFF8A8
OccSrc= OcSrc 230B F0AFF838
PTD= PTD 2203 F0AF229A
uid

PTS= PTS 2203 F0AF404C

Return Air= RAT 2203 F0AFA24D
Reheat Cap= ReHt% 230A F0AF00F8
RF/EF Cap= RFEF% 2203 F0AFAECF
Subcooling= SbClg 230A F0AF842E
Space Temp= SpaceT 2203 F0AFF74A
SRT= SRT 2203 F0AFC35D
Superheat= SSH 230A F0AFB846
-g

STD3= STD3 2207 F0AF03CC

Sump Temp= SumpT 2203 F0AF503D
UnoccSrc= UnOcSrc 230B F0AFF6B4
Unit Status = UntSts 230B F0AF4FF0
Not all listed points may be available depending on the specific unit configuration
all

OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER 76 www.DaikinApplied.com

 All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Menu Descriptions

Table 57: Secondary Trending Select List

HMI Name Select Abbreviation Type ID
Alarm Enumeration Alm 230A F0AFCF76
IAQ PPM= CO2 2203 F0AF7F77
Cmp Ratio Lmtg= CpRLmtg 230B F0AF7BA2
DAT Htg Spt= DAHtgSp 2300 F0AF6054
Dewpoint= Dewpt 230A F0AF532C
Dewpoint Spt= DewptSp 2300 F0AF75C1
Defrost State= DFSt 230B F0AFBD68
Ref DLT Lmtg= DLLmtg 230B F0AFB273
EF/LC Temp= EFT/LCT 2203 F0AF356B
Wheel Speed= ERWhl% 2203 F0AF101D
EVI Pos= EVI% 2203 F0AF3028
EVO Pos= EVO% 2203 F0AF17B1
EW Temp= EWT 2203 F0AFCD6B
Head P Circ 1= HdPr1 2203 F0AFD3C4
Head P Circ 2= HdPr2 2203 F0AFE3A7
Htg State= HtgSt 230B F0AF4BE8
Htg Status= HtgSts 230B F0AFD173
Htg Press Lmtg= HtPLmtg 230B F0AF3FE7
INV Brd Lmtg= IBLmtg 230B F0AFBAB2
INV Cmp Spd= INV% 2203 F0AFDA3E
Mixed Air= MAT 2203 F0AFCD1F
OA Flow= OAFlw 230A F0AFF10A
MinOAFlw Spt= OAFlwSp 2300 F0AF6B95
Occ Htg Spt= OcHtgSp 2300 F0AF8A33
PTD= PTD 2203 F0AF229A
PTS= PTS 2203 F0AF404C
Return Air= RAT 2203 F0AFA24D
Rem ExhF Cap= RemEF% 2300 F0AF1969
Rem RAF Cap= RemRF% 2300 F0AF57A7
Rem SAF Cap= RemSF% 2300 F0AF211F
Rel Humidity= RH 2203 F0AF1DDC
RH Setpoint= RHSp 2300 F0AFFA18
Reheat Spt= RhtSp 230A F0AF335D
Subcooling= SbClg 230A F0AF842E
Space Temp= SpaceT 2203 F0AFF74A
SuplHtgStatus= SpHtSts 230B F0AF7D21
Superheat= SSH 230A F0AFB846
Supl Htg Cap= SupHt% 230A F0AF1FEA
STD3= STD3 2207 F0AF03CC
Not all listed points may be available depending on the specific unit configuration.

www.DaikinApplied.com 77 OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER

 All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Alarms

Alarms

About this Unit

Table 58: About this Unit Menu Faults are conditions that are serious enough to shut down
the unit. The alarm must be manually cleared to allow unit
Menu Display Name Item Display Name
SO_Item=
operation.
Unit SN= Problems are conditions that result in some limitation of unit
App Version=
operation, but the unit is allowed to continue to operate. Some
Cf1-15=
Cf16-29=
of these alarms must be cleared manually, but others clear
Main BSP= automatically.
About this Unit
LON BSP=
Warnings inform the user of conditions that should be
LON App Ver=
BACnet BSP=
addressed, but do not limit operation in any way. The alarm
D-Net BSP= condition needs to be fixed and the alarm must be manually
HMI GIUD= cleared to cause this alarm to no longer be active.
OBH GIUD=
All active alarms as well as the date and time that they were
detected are displayed on the Active Alarm menu. These
SO_Item is an adjustable item which can be used to store the alarms are displayed in order of priority. Higher priority alarms
sales order number of the unit for reference purposes. are displayed first. The last fifty alarm “events” detected as well
Unit SN is an adjustable item which can be used to store the as the date and times that they were detected are displayed
serial number of the unit for reference purposes. on the Alarm Log menu. An alarm “event” is either an alarm
becoming active or being cleared. A “+” symbol precedes the
App Version is the version of application code loaded into the active alarm event and a “-” symbol precedes the cleared
controller alarm event. These alarms are displayed in the order that they
Cf1-15 describe positions 1-15 of the unit configuration string were detected. The alarm that was detected most recently is
displayed first. Multiple occurrences of the same alarm may
Cf16-30 describe positions 16-30 of the unit configuration string
appear.
Main BSP is the current version of firmware in the main
controller
Alarm Clearing
LON BSP is a status only item which indicates the current
Active alarms can be cleared through the keypad/display or a
version of firmware in the LON communication module
BAS network. Alarms are automatically cleared when power
connected to the main controller.
is cycled. Alarms are cleared only if the conditions required
LON App Ver is a status only item which indicates the current to initiate the alarm do not exist. All alarms and groups of
version of application code in the LON communication module alarms can be cleared via the network or keypad by setting the
connected to the main controller. ClearAlms variable to a non-zero value as indicated in the table
BACnet BSP is a status only item which indicates the current below. Emergency Off Faults can be set to automatically clear
version of firmware in the BACnet communication module once the condition that caused the alarm is corrected. This
connected to the main controller. can be accomplished by navigating to Commission Unit/Alarm
Configuration/Emerg Stop and changing the default ManClr
D-Net BSP is a status only item which indicates the current value to AutoClr.
version of firmware in the D-Net communication module
connected to the main controller. NOTE: The enumeration text is what shows up on the
keypad/display not the number. The value of this
HMI GUID is the HMI software identifier number unique to each variable automatically reverts to zero when the
application code version alarms are cleared. This variable may be set through
the keypad in the Active Alarm menu. It may be set
OBH GUID is the OBH software identifier number unique to via LON using nviClearAlarms and via BACnet using
each application code version the ClearAlarms object.
Table 59: Alarm Clearing
Alarms
Value Action
Alarms provide the user with information about abnormal 0 None
conditions that affect unit operation. The cause of the alarm 1 Clear All Faults
should be investigated and eliminated before the unit or any 2 Clear All Problems
disabled equipment in it is placed back into service. 3 Clear All Warnings
4 Clear All Alarms

OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER 78 www.DaikinApplied.com

 All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Alarms

Warnings
Over Economizing The under economizing alarm will also be generated when the
A warning alarm indicating the unit is economizing when it OAT sensor is unreliable or the RAT sensor is unreliable while
should not be will be generated whenever the outdoor air the OAT is below the Min OAT Limit setting (default 70F) and
dampers are stuck open while operating in the Econo or the economizer changeover method (EconChgovr) is set for
Cooling operating state. The dampers are considered stuck OAT/RAT dry bulb comparison (OAT/RAT).
open when either of the following abnormal situations occurs: The alarm will automatically clear when the conditions causing
• The damper command value is less than the calibrated the alarm are no longer present.
damper end switch closed value continuously for 180 NOTE: The damper end switch open (PosSwOpen%),
seconds yet the outside air damper end switch input Minimum switch differential (MinSwDiff), damper end
remains open. switch closed (PosSwClose%) and maximum switch
differential (MaxSwDiff) values are determined during
• The damper end switch input does not change from the OAD damper end switch calibration process.
closed to open with 30 seconds of the damper command
value dropping (and remaining) below the calibrated
Excess OA
damper end switch open value (less the calibrated
maximum switch differential). A warning alarm indicating the unit is delivering excessive
outdoor air will be generated whenever the outdoor air
The over economizing warning will also be generated if dampers are stuck open. The outdoor dampers are considered
the Econo Status is Enabled when the OAT is greater than stuck open when either of the following abnormal situations
the Max OAT Limit setting (default 75F). Exception: This occurs:
case is ignored when the economizer enable decision is
being controlled by a network input or when the economizer • The damper command value is less than the calibrated
changeover method (EconChgovr) is set for OAT/RAT dry bulb damper end switch closed value continuously for 180
comparison (OAT/RAT). seconds yet the outside air damper end switch input
remains open.
The alarm will automatically clear when the conditions causing
• The damper end switch input does not change from
the alarm are no longer present.
closed to open with 30 seconds of the damper command
NOTE: The damper end switch open (PosSwOpen%), value dropping (and remaining) below the calibrated
Minimum switch differential (MinSwDiff), damper end damper end switch open value (less the calibrated
switch closed (PosSwClose%) and maximum switch maximum switch differential).
differential (MaxSwDiff) values are determined during
the OAD damper end switch calibration process. The excess outdoor air warning will also be generated while
operating in the Econo or Cooling state when the Econo
Under Economizing Status is Enabled and the OAT is greater than the Max OAT
Limit setting (default 75F). Exception: This case is ignored
A warning alarm indicating the unit is not economizing when it when the economizer enable decision is being controlled by
should be will be generated whenever the outdoor air dampers a network input or when the economizer changeover method
are stuck closed while operating in the Econo or Cooling state. (EconChgovr) is set for OAT/RAT dry bulb comparison (OAT/
The dampers are considered stuck closed when either of the RAT).
following abnormal situations occurs:
The alarm will automatically clear when the conditions causing
• The damper command value is greater than the the alarm are no longer present.
calibrated damper end switch open value continuously for
180 seconds yet the outside air damper end switch input NOTE: The damper end switch open (PosSwOpen%),
Minimum switch differential (MinSwDiff), damper end
remains open. switch closed (PosSwClose%) and maximum switch
• The damper end switch input does not change from differential (MaxSwDiff) values are determined during
closed to open with 30 seconds of the damper command the OAD damper end switch calibration process.
value rising above the calibrated damper end switch
closed value (plus the calibrated minimum switch The alarm will automatically clear when the conditions causing
differential) the alarm are no longer valid.

The under economizing alarm will also be generated if the

Econo Status is not Enabled when the OAT is less than
the Min OAT Limit setting (default 70F). Exception: This
case is ignored when the economizer enable decision is
being controlled by a network input or when the economizer
changeover method (EconChgovr) is set for OAT/RAT dry bulb
comparison (OAT/RAT).

www.DaikinApplied.com 79 OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER

 All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Alarms

OAD Stuck Dirty Filter - (Dirty Filter: Warning)

A warning alarm indicating the outdoor air dampers are stuck If the pressure drop across the filter section in the unit
and not modulating will be generated whenever the damper exceeds the setting of the differential pressure switch the
are stuck open or stuck closed. Dirty Filter warning occurs. When the Dirty Filter warning
The dampers are considered stuck open when either of the occurs, unit operation is not affected. The Dirty Filter warning
following abnormal situations occurs: must be manually cleared through the unit keypad or via a
network signal.
• The damper command value is less than the calibrated
damper end switch closed value continuously for 180 Airflow Switch - (Airflow Sw: Warning)
seconds yet the outside air damper end switch input
remains open. If the unit has been in the Off operating state for at least
thirty minutes and the PC7 airflow switch input to the main
• The damper end switch input does not change from
controller indicates airflow, the Airflow Switch warning occurs.
closed to open with 30 seconds of the damper command
This normally indicates a problem with the PC7 airflow switch.
value dropping (and remaining) below the calibrated
When the Airflow Switch warning occurs, unit operation is not
damper end switch open value (less the calibrated
affected. When the alarm condition is corrected, the Airflow
maximum switch differential).
Switch warning must be manually cleared through the unit
The dampers are considered stuck closed when either of the keypad or via a network signal.
following abnormal situations occurs:
• The damper command value is greater than the
Conductivity - (Conductivity: Warning)
calibrated damper end switch open value continuously for If the unit is equipped with a Dolphin system and the
180 seconds yet the outside air damper end switch input Conductivity value rises above the alarm setpoint value,
remains open. the conductivity alarm occurs. When the alarm condition is
• The damper end switch input does not change from corrected, the conductivity warning must be manually cleared
closed to open with 30 seconds of the damper command through the unit keypad or via a network signal.
value rising above the calibrated damper end switch
closed value (plus the calibrated minimum switch Return/Exh Fan Warning
differential) When the unit is equipped with a Return/Exhaust fan VFD or
The damper stuck warning will also be generated when the ECM motor and a loss of Modbus communications for longer
damper end switch operation is unreliable. The ends switches than 10 seconds a Return/Exhaust fan warning alarm occurs.
are considered unreliable when the end switch input remains The alarm is automatically clears when the condition causing
closed when the damper command value is between the the alarm is corrected.
calibrated end switch closed and open values (plus and minus
the calibrated minimum and maximum switch differentials).
The alarm will automatically clear when the conditions causing
the alarm are no longer present.

OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER 80 www.DaikinApplied.com

 All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Alarms

Problems
Hi DL Temp: Problem Low Discharge Superheat: Problem
Normal compressor control is limited when a high discharge Normal compressor control is limited when low superheat
line temperature conditions occur. If the variable speed conditions occur. If the variable speed compressor is operating
compressor is operating and the discharge line temperature and the discharge superheat is less than 20F continuously
is greater than 250F for 15 seconds a High Discharge Line for 15 minutes a Low Discharge Superheat Unloading Control
Temperature Event is generated and the variable speed Event is generated and the variable speed compressor
compressor capacity is reduced every 15 seconds until the speed is increased. The variable speed compressor speed
discharge line temperature falls below 220F. If the discharge is increased every 10 minutes as long as the discharge
line temperature is above 250F continuously for 3 minutes the superheat remains less than 20F until the maximum allowed
variable speed compressor is stopped and a High Discharge variable speed compressor speed (based on unit size) is

m
Line Temperature problem alarm is generated. The alarm must reached. If the discharge superheat remains below 20F the
be manually cleared. variable speed compressor is shut off and a Low Superheat
alarm is generated.
DRT2 Sensor: Problem

.co
This alarm occurs when the DRT2 sensor input is shorted or High Discharge Superheat: Problem
open circuited for the Sensor Alarm Delay (default 30 seconds). Normal compressor control is limited when high superheat
It can also occur when the variable speed compressor is off conditions occur. If the variable speed compressor is operating
and the input is above 329°F or the compressor has been off and the discharge superheat is greater than 75F continuously
for 20 minutes and the input is below -4°F. for 15 minutes a High Discharge Superheat Unloading Control
When this alarm is active compressor cooling operation is Event is generated and the variable speed compressor
disabled. speed is decreased. The variable speed compressor speed
is decreased every 10 minutes as long as the discharge
es
The alarm must be manually cleared once corrective action is superheat remains great than 75F until the minimum allowed
taken. variable speed compressor speed (based on unit size) is
reached. If the discharge superheat remains above 75F the
Variable Compressor: Problem variable speed compressor is shut off and a High Superheat
If the variable speed compressor is enabled (MCB-D03 alarm is generated.
is closed) and commanded to run for 30 seconds but the
uid

controller fails to receive the variable speed run verification PTD2 Sensor: Problem
input (EMC-X4 is open) the variable speed compressor enable This alarm occurs when either the circuit 2 discharge line
output (MCB-D03) is cycled OFF for 5 seconds ( a variable pressure inputs (PTD2) remains above 700 psi for 10 seconds
speed Compressor Emergency Stop Control Event is logged) or a compressor on circuit 2 has been operating for 60 seconds
and then back on. The variable speed compressor is then and the PTD2 value remains less than 155 psi. When this
ramped to 45%. If this occurs 3 times in a 30 minute period the alarm is active compressor cooling operation is disabled.
variable speed compressor is shut off and a variable speed
Compressor Problem alarm is generated. The alarm must be manually cleared once corrective action is
-g

taken.
Low Discharge Pressure: Problem
PTD1 Sensor: Problem
Normal variable speed compressor control is limited when
a low pressure condition occurs on the variable speed This alarm occurs when either the circuit 1 discharge line
compressor circuit. If the variable speed compressor is pressure inputs (PTD1) remains above 700 psi for 10 seconds
all

operating and the suction pressure (PTS) is less than 250 PSI or a compressor on circuit 2 has been operating for 60 seconds
a Low Pressure Unloading Control Event is generated and and the PTD1 value remains less than 155 psi. When this
the variable speed compressor speed is increased every 30 alarm is active compressor cooling operation is disabled.
seconds until either the suction pressure rises above 250 PSI The alarm must be manually cleared once corrective action is
or remains lower than 250 PSI continuously for 15 minutes. taken.
If the suction pressure is below 250 PSI continuously for 15
minutes the variable speed compressor is shut OFF and a
Low Pressure Problem alarm is generated. The alarm must be
manually cleared.

www.DaikinApplied.com 81 OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER

 All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Alarms

Variable Compressor Oil: Problem No Water Flow Problem - (Water Flw Sw: Problem)
(Self Contained only)
If the variable speed compressor has been operating at the High
Oil Boost value for the Oil Boost Timing period and the low oil When a unit is equipped with a water flow switch WFS, the No
input (EMC-X3) is still open the variable speed compressor is Water Flow problem occurs when lack of water flow is indicated
stopped and a Low Oil problem alarm is generated. The alarm is by an open water flow switch or a network signal and all of the
also generated if the oil boost sequence becomes active 5 times following conditions are true:
in a 24 hour operating period. • Lack of water flow is indicated by an open water flow
switch or a Network signal
High Pressure Circuit 2 • Either of the following is true:
Normal variable speed compressor control is limited when • The Bypass Valve has been opened greater than 50% for
a high discharge pressure conditions occur on the variable more than the Bypass Valve Timer
speed compressor circuit. If the variable speed compressor
• A water side economizer is installed and its position is
is operating and the discharge pressure (PTD) is greater
greater than 50%
than 525 PSI, a High Pressure Unloading Control Event
is generated and the VFD compressor is slowed every 10 • Unit is not in the Off, Start or Recirc operating state
seconds until either the discharge pressure falls to less than
When the No Water Flow problem occurs, the unit continues
525 PSI or remains higher than 575 PSI for 10 minutes. If
to operate however cooling provided by compressors disabled.
the discharge pressure is above 575 PSI for 10 minutes the
When all of the alarm condition are no longer present, the
variable speed compressor is shut off and a High Pressure
No Water Flow problem normally clears automatically and
Problem alarm is generated. If the OAT is below 45F at the
normal unit operation resumes. If the alarm occurs three times
time the variable speed compressor is shut off immediately
between 2:00 am of one day and 2:00 am of the next day, it
and a High Pressure Problem alarm is generated anytime the
becomes necessary to manually clear the alarm.
discharge pressure rises above 575 PSI. The alarm must be
manually cleared.
Water Regulating Valve Problem - (Water RegVlv:
Problem) (Self Contained only)
High Pressure Circuit 1
When a unit is equipped with the head pressure control
Normal variable speed compressor control is limited when
option, the Water Regulating Valve Problem occurs when the
a high discharge pressure conditions occur on the variable
greater of the two refrigerant pressure readings drops below
speed compressor circuit. If the variable speed compressor
the head pressure setpoint by more than the deadband while
is operating and the discharge pressure (PTD) is greater
at least one compressor is operating and the entering water
than 525 PSI, a High Pressure Unloading Control Event is
temperature is less than 58°F. These conditions have to be true
generated and the variable speed compressor is slowed every
for more than 5 minutes for the alarm to become active. When
10 seconds until either the discharge pressure falls to less
the Water Regulating Valve problem occurs, the unit continues
than 525 PSI or remains higher than 575 PSI for 10 minutes.
to operate but mechanical cooling is disabled. Mechanical
If the discharge pressure is above 575 PSI for 10 minutes the
cooling remains disabled until the Water Regulating Valve
variable speed compressor is shut off and a High Pressure
problem is manually cleared through the unit keypad or via a
Problem alarm is generated. If the OAT is below 45F at the
network signal.
time the variable speed compressor is shut off immediately
and a High Pressure Problem alarm is generated anytime the
discharge pressure rises above 575 PSI. The alarm must be
Low Pressure - Circuit 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 - (Lo Press 1, 2,
3, 4, 5, 6: Problem)
manually cleared. (Not Yet Applicable – except normal fixed
circuit high pressure switch alarm still applies When a unit is equipped with individual cooling circuits, the
Low Pressure Circuit 1 problem occurs when the compressor
on circuit #1 has been running longer than the low pressure
alarm delay (65 seconds factory default for R22 or 407C
application, 5 seconds for 410A) and the low pressure switch
LP1 remains open. The alarm also occurs any time afterward
if the low pressure switch opens up while the compressor on
the circuit is running. Note: The Low Pressure Circuit 2, 3, 4, 5,
& 6 problems occur in the same manner for cooling circuits 2,
3, 4, 5, 6. Compressor #1 (2, 3, 4, 5 or 6) remains disabled for
at least one cooling stage time period. After the cooling stage
time period expires, the alarm automatically clears and the
circuit is re-enabled. If the alarm occurs three times between
2:00 a.m. of one day and 2:00 a.m. of the next, the alarm does
not automatically clear the third time but must be manually
cleared through the unit keypad or via a network signal.

OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER 82 www.DaikinApplied.com

 All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Alarms

High Pressure - Circuit 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 - (Hi Press 1, 2, Space Temperature Sensor Problem - (Space
3, 4, 5, 6: Problem) Sensor: Problem)
This alarm occurs on units equipped with compressorized If the Space Sensor Present setting is set to Yes, a valid Space
cooling only. If the high pressure switch opens indicating a high Temperature value is not provided via a network signal and
refrigerant pressure situation, the High Pressure Circuit 1, 2, 3, the local space sensor is shorted or open circuited longer
4, 5, 6 problems occurs. than the Sensor Alarm Delay (default is 30 seconds), the
When the High Pressure Circuit 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 problem occurs, Space Temperature Sensor problem occurs. When the Space
the unit continues to operate but the cooling circuit is disabled. Temperature Sensor problem occurs, the unit continues to
operate with the following modifications:
NOTE: The Circuit remains disabled until the high pressure
switch closes and the High Pressure Circuit problem • Cooling Reset and Heating Reset revert to none they are
is manually cleared through the unit keypad or via a set to Space
network signal. • Control temperature source reverts from space to return if
a return air sensor is present and reliable.
Sump Water Level Problem
When the alarm condition is no longer present, the Space
Unit state has been cooling for the Sump Water Level Delay
Temperature Sensor problem automatically clears.
time and the Sump Water Level input remains in the open
position
OAT Temperature Sensor Problem -(OAT Sensor:
Problem)
Entering Fan Temperature/Leaving Coil Temperature
Sensor Problem (EFT/LCT Snsr: Problem) If the outside air temperature sensor (OAT) is present, a valid
OAT value is not provided via the network and the local OAT
This alarm occurs when the Entering Fan Temperature/Leaving
sensor is either shorted or open circuited for longer than the
Coil Temperature sensor is present and either shorted or open
Sensor Alarm Delay (default is 30 seconds), the Outside
circuited for longer than the Sensor Alarm Delay (Default = 30
Air Sensor problem occurs. When the OAT Sensor problem
seconds). When this alarm occurs the unit continues to operate
occurs, the unit continues to operate with the following
however dehumidification operation is disabled until the sensor
modifications:
becomes reliable. The maximum DAT limit function associated
with gas or electric heat is also disabled until the sensor • Heating is not locked out due to high OAT
becomes reliable. • Cooling is not locked out due to low OAT
• Cooling Reset and Heating Reset revert to none if they
Return Air Temperature Sensor Problem - (RAT are set to OAT
Sensor: Problem)
• Economizer is locked out due to high OAT
If the return air temperature sensor (RAT) is present and either
shorted or open circuited for longer than the Sensor Alarm When the alarm condition is no longer present, the OAT Sensor
Delay (default is 30 seconds), the Return Air Sensor problem problem automatically clears.
occurs. When the RAT Sensor problem occurs, the unit
continues to operate with the following modifications: Entering Water Temperature Sensor Problem - (EWT
• Cooling Reset and Heating Reset revert to none if they
Sensor: Problem)
are set to Return If the entering water temperature sensor (EWT) is present and
• Control temperature source reverts from return to space if either shorted or open circuited for longer than the Sensor
a space temperature sensor is present and reliable Alarm Delay (default is 30 seconds), the EWT Sensor problem
occurs. When the EWT Sensor problem occurs, waterside
When the alarm condition is no longer present, the RAT Sensor economizer cooling is disabled. Mechanical cooling is not
problem automatically clears. locked out based on EWT. When the alarm condition is no
longer present, the EWT Sensor problem automatically clears.

Mixed Air Temperature Sensor Problem - (MAT

Sensor: Problem)
If the Mixed Air Temperature (MAT) sensor is present and
either shorted or open-circuited for longer than the sensor
alarm delay (default is 30 seconds), the MAT sensor problem
occurs. When the MAT sensor problem occurs, waterside
economizer cooling is disabled. When the alarm condition is no
longer present, the MAT sensor problem automatically clears.

www.DaikinApplied.com 83 OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER

 All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Alarms

Freeze Problem - (Freeze: Problem) Faults

When a unit is equipped with a waterside economizer, chilled
water, hot water, or steam coil, the Freeze problem occurs Airflow Fault - (Airflow: Fault)
when the optional freezestat contacts open as a result of If differential pressure switch PC7 fails to detect airflow for
detecting an abnormally low water or steam coil temperature longer than the airflow timer (default = 120 seconds) and on
while the fans are off. VAV units the current duct static pressure indication is less than
When the Freeze problem occurs, the controller opens the half the static pressure setpoint after the unit leaves the Startup
waterside economizer valve, chilled water and heating valves, operating state or any time afterward, while the unit is running,
and sets a 10-minute timer. If the unit is equipped with a the Fan Fail fault occurs. When the Fan Fail fault occurs, the
waterside economizer, the pump output is also turned on. unit is shut down. It remains shut down until the Fan Fail fault
When the 10-minute timer expires, the controller checks the is manually cleared through the unit keypad or via a network
freezestat input again. If the freezestat contacts are closed signal. On units equipped with a discharge fan VFD, the Fan
the pump output is de-energized and the valves close. If the Fail fault only occurs if the Fan Retry condition described
freezestat contacts are still open the pump output remains above has first occurred twice within the previous twenty-four
energized, the valves remain open, and the 10-minute timer hour period. The conditions that cause the Fan Retry and the
resets. This continues while the unit remains off. Whenever action taken are the same as for the Fan Fail fault with the
the freezestat closes the Freeze problem automatically clears. difference being that the Fan Retry is automatically reset once
This feature protects the coil(s) and allows the system to start the unit is shut off. This allows the unit to attempt to restart up
normally when an occupied command is received. to three times within a twenty-four hour period.
NOTE: There is no Fan Retry function or three retry function
Heat Fail Problem - (Heat Fail: Problem) when a unit has a CAV supply fan.
If an RPS unit is equipped with a Daikin gas furnace and If Modbus communication is lost between the MCB
the burner flame safeguard (FSG) control enters the “safety and the supply fan VFD the duct static pressure is not
lockout” state after a call for heat, a digital input is provided to considered in the Fan Fail logic.
EXP B-X4 on the controller. When this digital input is present
the Heat Fail problem occurs. When the Heat Fail problem Low Discharge Air Temperature - (Lo Disch Temp:
occurs, the unit continues to operate with the heating system Fault)
disabled by the FSG. Heating remains disabled until the flame
safeguard control is manually reset. The heat fail problem If the unit is not in the operating state and the discharge air
clears automatically when the FSG control is reset. temperature is less than the Low Discharge Temperature Limit
(Default = 40°F) for longer than 30 seconds and the supply
fan has been on for longer than the LowDAT temperature
alarm delay (Default = 6 minutes), the Low Discharge Air
Temperature fault occurs. When the Low Discharge Air
Temperature fault occurs, the unit is shut down. It remains shut
down until the Low Discharge Air Temperature fault is manually
cleared through the unit keypad or via a network signal.

High Discharge Air Temperature - (Hi Disch Temp:

Fault)
If the discharge air temperature is greater than the High
Discharge Temperature Limit (Default = 170°F) and the supply
fan has been on for longer than the Temperature Alarm Delay
(Default = 30 seconds), the High Discharge Air Temperature
fault occurs. When the High Discharge Air Temperature fault
occurs, the unit is shut down. It remains shut down until the
High Discharge Air Temperature fault is manually cleared
through the unit keypad or via a network signal.

OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER 84 www.DaikinApplied.com

 All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Alarms

High Return Air Temperature - (Hi Return Tmp: Fault) Emergency Stop Fault - (Emerg Stop: Fault)
If the return air temperature is greater than the Return Air An Emergency Stop Fault will occur if either of the following
Temperature Limit (Default = 120°F) and the supply fan has conditions is true:
been on for longer than the temperature alarm delay (Default • Emergency Stop Input in the Alarm (Open) condition
= 30 seconds), the High Return Air Temperature fault occurs.
When the High Return Air Temperature fault occurs, the unit • The Net Emrg Ovrd input is set to Off via a network signal
is shut down. It remains shut down until the High Return Air or the keypad/display
Temperature fault is manually cleared through the unit keypad
or via a network signal. Freeze Fault - (Freeze: Fault)
When a unit is equipped with a waterside economizer, chilled
Duct High Limit Fault - (Duct Hi Limit: Fault)
water, hot water, or steam coil, the Freeze Fault occurs when
If the unit is variable air volume, the contacts of the duct high the optional freezestat contacts open as a result of detecting
pressure limit control (DHL) open, and the unit state is not Off an abnormally low water or steam coil temperature while the
or Startup, the Duct High Limit fault occurs. When the Duct fans are running.
High Limit fault occurs, the unit is shut down. The unit remains
When the Freeze fault occurs, the controller shuts down
shut down until the Duct High Limit fault is manually cleared
the fans, opens the chilled water, economizer, and heating
through the unit keypad or via a network signal.
valves and set a 10-minute timer. If the unit is equipped with
a waterside economizer, the pump output is also turned on.
Discharge Air Sensor Fault -(Disch Tmp: Fault) When the 10-minute timer expires, the controller checks the
If the discharge air temperature sensor (DAT) is open or freezestat input again. If the freezestat contacts are closed
short circuited for longer than the Sensor Alarm Delay the pump output is de-energized and the valves close. If the
(Default= 30 seconds), the Discharge Air Sensor fault occurs. freezestat contacts are still open the pump output remains
When the Discharge Air Sensor fault occurs, the unit is shut energized, the valves remain open, and the 10-minute timer
down. It remains shut down until the Discharge Air Sensor resets. This continues until the fault is manually cleared
fault is manually cleared through the unit keypad or via a through the keypad or via a network signal.
networksignal. NOTE: Water valves remain open and Pump output remains
on for 10 minutes after alarmconditions disappear.
Control Temperature Fault - (Control Temp: Fault)
If the temperature sensor (ZNT1, RAT, OAT, MAT) selected
as the control temperature source is not reliable for longer
than the Sensor Alarm Delay (Default= 30 seconds), a Control
Temperature Fault occurs. When the Control Temperature
Fault occurs, the unit is shut down. It remains shut down until
the Control Temperature Fault is manually cleared through the
unit keypad or via a network signal.

www.DaikinApplied.com 85 OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER

 All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Operator’s Guide

Operator’s Guide

The following “Operator’s Guide” sections provide information The supply fan is turned ON when the unit enters the
regarding the day-to-day operation of the MicroTech III Recirculation state. The supply fan in VAV units is controlled as
Unit Controller. Topics covered are such common tasks as described in the Supply Fan Capacity Control (VAV) on page
scheduling, displaying and clearing alarms, and setting the 136. The outdoor dampers remain closed.
controller for manual operation. A separate morning warm-up state is not provided, but an
edited ZeroOATime is used to keep the outside air damper
Figure 11: State Diagram closed when the unit first starts. The Minimum OA Position is
set to zero as long as the as the fan has been on for less than
the ZeroOATime.
DAT Control units have a MWU setpoint available.

m
The Minimum OA Position is set to zero as long as the as the
fan has been on for less than the ZeroOATime. This allows the
Return Air type units to cool down the space with mechanical
cooling or to warm up the space with the dampers closed. If the
ZeroOATime is set correctly, the OA dampers will be open only

.co
during occupied periods. When Optimal Start is used Zero OA
Time is set equal to the time to occupancy when the unit starts
so that the OA dampers will open at occupancy time.
Neither heating nor cooling is provided when the unit is in the
fan only state, with the exception of when dehumidification
is active. The outdoor dampers are opened to the minimum
position in this state when the fan on time exceeds the Zero
OA Time.
es
In the other four states, temperature is controlled as describe
in the appropriate sections of this document. These states are
Minimum DAT, Heating, Economizer, and Cooling. The outdoor
dampers are opened to at least the minimum position in these
states when the fan on time exceeds the Zero OA Time.
uid

OFF Operating State

In the Off operating state the fans are off, the outside air
The transition from any operating state to another is graphically dampers are closed and any VFD’s are driven to 0%. Cooling
represented in this figure. With a “start up” command from an and heating are disabled. The unit is in the off state when it is
OFF State the unit will always go into the “Start Up” state of not enabled, or when it is in the unoccupied mode with no call
operation for 3 minutes (adjustable). Next, it will transition into for unoccupied operation. refer to “Determining Unit Status” on
the “Recirculation” state of operation for another 3 minutes page 70 for reasons the unit can be disabled.
-g

(adjustable) before finally going into the Fan Only state of

operation. Then, based on sensor inputs it will go into any
of the 4 remaining states of operation - heating, cooling, Start Up Operating State
economizer, or minimum discharge air heating. When a unit is commanded to start it will always enter the
Startup operating state from the OFF operating state. The unit
all

remains in the Startup operating state for an adjustable time

Determining Unit State period (default 180 seconds) before entering the Recirculating
The unit will operate in one of eight operating states. The operating state.
current state will be displayed by the Unit State parameter in
During the Start up operating state the fans remain OFF, the
the system summary menu.
outdoor air dampers are driven closed, and VFD’s remain at
In the OFF state, all heating, cooling, and fans are OFF. The 0%. Cooling and heating are disabled, except for 100% OA
alarm output indicates the type of alarm, if any, that is active. heating start sequences.
In the start up state, the Fan Operation output is turned ON to
allow shut OFF dampers to be opened before any the supply
fan is turned ON. The outdoor air dampers remain closed.

OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER 86 www.DaikinApplied.com

 All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Operator’s Guide

Recirculating Operating State Heating

Units with return air always enter the Recirculating operating The unit enters the Heating operating state when the control
state after the completion of the Startup operating state. temperature falls below the Occupied or Unoccupied Heating
In the Recirculating operating state fans are started and Setpoint by more than ½ the occupied or unoccupied heating
operate while the outdoor air dampers remain closed. This deadband. During the Heating operating state, the outdoor air
allows temperature conditions throughout the unit and space dampers are either 100% open if the unit is a 100% outdoor air
to equalize before temperature control begins. Cooling and unit or controlled to the minimum outside air position. Cooling
heating remain disabled. The unit remains in the Recirculating is disabled.
operating state until the Recirculate State Timer (default 180
seconds) expires.
Economizer
NOTE: 100% outdoor air units do not transition through the
Recirculating operating state. If the unit is equipped with a 0-100% modulating economizer
(waterside or airside) and the conditions are suitable for free
cooling, the unit attempts to satisfy the cooling load by using
Fan Only either outdoor air or the waterside economizer before using
The unit enters the Fan Only operating state after the mechanical cooling.
recirculation timer expires. Units configured for 100% outside If the unit is configured for Zone Temperature Control the
air operation will transition directly from the Start up operating transition to economizer operation will occur if all the following
state into the Fan Only operating state. Once entering the Fan are true:
Only state of operation the unit will then, based on sensor
inputs transition into any of the 4 remaining states of operation • The control temperature rises above the occupied or
- heating, cooling, economizer, or minimum discharge air unoccupied cooling setpoint by more that ½ the occupied
heating. or unoccupied cooling high deadband
• The discharge air temperature is greater than the Min
DAT limit by more than ½ the DAT
Min DAT
• heating deadband. This will prevent more cold air from
If heating is enabled and there is no heating load (normally being brought in when the DAT is already cold
FanOnly operating state), the controller activates the units • The economizer operation is not disabled
heating equipment as required to prevent the discharge air
temperature from becoming too cool if the Min DAT Control If the unit is configured for Discharge Air Temperature Control
Flag is set to yes via the Heating menu (Commission Unit/ the transition to Mechanical cooling will occur if all the following
Heating/MinDAT Ctrl). The unit enters the Min DAT operating are true:
state during occupied operation when neither cooling nor
• The control temperature rises above the occupied or
heating is required based on the heat/cool changeover
unoccupied cooling setpoint by more that ½ the occupied
function but the discharge temperature falls below a minimum
or unoccupied cooling deadband
discharge temperature limit. If the discharge air temperature
falls below the this minimum discharge temperature limit • The discharge air temperature is greater than the DAT
by more than half the discharge heating deadband, the unit cooling setpoint
operating state changes from Fan Only to Min DAT. The
unit transitions out of the Min DAT operating state once the
discharge air temperature is above minimum discharge
temperature limit and the heating capacity has been at its
minimum position for the duration of the heating stage timer.
NOTE: On VAV or CAV discharge control units, the DAT
cooling setpoint parameter in the Cooling menu acts
as the minimum discharge temperature limit. On CAV
zone control units the Min DAT Limit parameter in
the Heating menu acts as the minimum discharge
temperature limit.

www.DaikinApplied.com 87 OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER

 All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Operator’s Guide

Mechanical Cooling Off Alarm

The unit enters the mechanical cooling operating state when The unit operating state is OFF and the unit status is OffAlm
cooling is required and the economizer is disabled, not present, when an active alarm of the “fault” type has the unit shutdown.
or already fully open.
Off Fan Retry
If the unit is configured for Zone Temperature Control the
transition to Mechanical cooling will occur if all the following are The unit operating state is OFF and the unit status is OffFnRty
true: when The fan retry conditions below indicate that the unit
should be shutdown and restarted after airflow is lost.
• The control temperature rises above the occupied or
unoccupied cooling setpoint by more that ½ the occupied • The supply fan is controlled by a VFD
or unoccupied cooling deadband • The airflow switch (PC7) is open AND the duct static
• The discharge air temperature is greater than the Min pressure is less than ½ the duct static pressure setpoint
DAT limit by more than ½ the DAT heating deadband. • There are no active faults that would shut down the unit
This will prevent more cold air from being brought in when
the DAT is already cold Determining Control Mode
• The economizer operation is disabled or not present The unit cooling and heating can be set up for automatic
• Mechanical cooling is enabled heat/cool, cool only, heat only, fan only, or network cool/heat
operation by setting the Control Mode. The unit can also be
If the unit is configured for Discharge Air Temperature Control
manually disabled via the Control Mode. The following are
the transition to Mechanical cooling will occur if all the following
descriptions of the six available Control Mode selections.
are true:
• The control temperature rises above the occupied or OFF
unoccupied cooling setpoint by more that ½ the occupied When the Control Mode is set to “OFF,” the Unit Status is
or unoccupied cooling deadband “Off Man” and the unit is completely disabled.
• The discharge air temperature is greater than the
DAT cooling setpoint by more than ½ the DAT cooling Heat Only
deadband When the Control Mode is set to “Heat Only,” heating operation
• Post heat operation is complete is allowed to operate to maintain the heating set points.
• Economizer operation is disabled Cooling operation is disabled (Cooing Status is “Off Man”).
• Mechanical cooling is enabled Cool Only
When the Control Mode is set to “Cool Only,” cooling operation
Determining Unit Status is allowed to operate to maintain the cooling set points. Heating
Unit Status is a status only item which indicates whether or not operation is disabled (Heating Status is “Off Man”).
the unit is enabled and if not why.
Fan Only
Enabled When the Control Mode is set to “Fan Only,” the fans are
Unit operation has not been disabled for any of the following allowed to operate but cooling and heating operation is
reasons. disabled (Cooling Status and Heating Status are “Off Man”).

Off Manual Heat Cool

The unit operating state is OFF and the unit status is OffMan When the Control Mode is set to “Heat/Cool,” both cooling
when the control mode is set to OFF via the keypad. The and heating operation are allowed to operate as required to
control mode can only be changed via the System menu on the maintain the cooling and heating set points.
keypad/display.
Auto
OffManCtrl When the Control Mode is set to “Auto,” the heat/cool, cool
The unit operating state is OFF and the unit status is OffManCtl only, heat only, and fan only decision is determined by
when the controller is set to manual control via the Manual the network application mode parameter, which is set via
Control menu. a network signal as described below. The NetApp Mode
parameter has no effect on unit operation unless the Control
Off Network Mode is set to “Auto.”
The unit operating state is OFF and the unit status is OffNet
when the control mode is set to Auto via the System menu and
the network Net App Mode is set to OFF.

OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER 88 www.DaikinApplied.com

 All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Operator’s Guide

Determining Cooling Status Determining Heat Status

Clg Status is a status item which indicates whether or not Htg Status is a status item which indicates whether or not
mechanical cooling is currently allowed. If cooling is disabled, heating is currently allowed. If heating is disabled, the reason
the reason is indicated. is indicated.
The following are descriptions of cooling status states. The following are descriptions of heating status states:

Enabled Enabled
Mechanical cooling is enabled if all the following are true: Heating is enabled if all the following are true:
• Cooling capability is provided • Heating capability is provided
• Control mode is not set via the keypad to fan only or heat • Control mode is not set via the keypad to fan only or cool
only only
• Control mode is set via the keypad to auto and not • Control mode is set via the keypad to auto and not
disabled via a network command disabled via a network command
• The outdoor air temperature (OAT) on air cooled units or • The outdoor air temperature (OAT) is low enough for
the entering water temperature (EWT) on water cooled operation
units is high enough for operation
None
• Compressor operation is not disabled by an alarm
condition Heating capability is not provided.

None Off Ambient

Cooling capability is not provided. The OAT is too high for operation. The OAT becomes too
high for operation when the OAT rises above the OAT heating
Off Ambient lockout set point. OAT becomes low enough for operation
The outdoor air temperature (OAT) on air cooled units or the when the OAT drops below the OAT heating lockout set point
entering water temperature (EWT) on water cooled units is too by more than the Heating Lockout Differential.
low for operation.
Off Network
The OAT becomes too low for operation when it drops below
Control mode is set via the keypad to auto and the unit is
the OAT cooling lockout setting. OAT becomes high enough for
disabled via a network command.
operation when it rises above the OAT cooling lockout setting
by more than 2°F (adjustable - OAT Diff). The EWT becomes Off Manual
too low for operation when it drops below the minimum EWT
set point. EWT becomes high enough for operation when it Control mode is set to Fan Only or Cool Only via the keypad.
rises above the minimum EWT set point by more than 2°F
(adjustable - Econo Diff).
NOTE: The OAT cooling lockout cannot be set lower than
40°F when the unit is equipped with an evaporative
condenser and should not be set lower than 50°F
unless the unit is equipped with low ambient
capability.

Off Alarm
Compressor operation is disabled by an alarm condition. This
happens when either all circuits are disabled by either a high
or low pressure alarm, when applicable the water flow switch
alarm is active, when applicable sump pump fail alarm is active
or applicable water regulating valve alarm is active.

Off Network
Control mode is set via the keypad to auto and cooling is
disabled via a network command.

Off Manual
Control mode is set to Fan Only or Heat Only via the keypad
display.

www.DaikinApplied.com 89 OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER

 All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Operator’s Guide

Determining Economizer Status Determining Cooling Capacity

If the unit is equipped with a 0-100% modulating economizer Clg Capacity is a status item which indicates the percentage
(waterside or airside) and the conditions are suitable for free of the unit maximum cooling capacity currently operating.
cooling, the unit attempts to satisfy the cooling load by using When the unit is equipped with chilled water cooling, 0-100%
either outdoor air or the waterside economizer before using is displayed as the cooling valve actuator strokes from the
mechanical cooling. closed to open position. When the unit is equipped with
The following are descriptions of Economizer Status states compressorized cooling, the percentage value changes
incrementally based on the number of operating cooling
Off Ambient stages.
• Unit is an SCU configured for waterside economizer Determining Heating Capacity
and the Entering Water Temperature (EWT) sensor is
unreliable. Htg Capacity is a status item which indicates the percentage of
the unit maximum heating capacity currently operating. When
• Unit is an SCU configured for waterside economizer the unit is equipped with modulating heat, 0-100% is displayed
and the EWT exceeds (Mixed Air Temperature – EWT as the heating valve actuator strokes from the closed to open
Differential). It is enabled if EWT drops below (Mixed Air position. When the unit is equipped with staged heat, the
Temperature – EWT Differential). percentage value changes incrementally based on the number
• Unit is configured for airside economizer and the outdoor of operating heating stages.
air temperature (OAT) sensor is unreliable.
• Economizer Changeover is set to Enthalpy and OAT and Determining Supply Air Fan Capacity
the Enthalpy Input is in the High (Open) position.
SAF Speed is a status only item which indicates the supply air
• Economizer Changeover is set to Enthalpy and OAT
fan capacity. 0-100% of VFD maximum speed is indicated if the
and the OAT rises above the Economizer Changeover
unit is equipped with a supply air fan VFD. 100% is indicated if
Temperature by a fixed 2°F differential. (OAT becomes
the supply fan is constant volume and is running.
low enough for operation when the OAT drops to or below
the Economizer.
• Economizer Changeover is set to Enthalpy and OAT Determining RF/EF Capacity
and the OAT rises above the Economizer Changeover RF/EF capacity is a status only item which indicates the current
Temperature by a fixed 2°F differential. (OAT becomes return or exhaust fan capacity. 0-100% of VFD maximum
low enough for operation when the OAT drops to or below speed is indicated if the unit is equipped with a modulating
the Economizer Changeover Temperature). return or exhaust fan VFD. 100% is indicated if the return/
• Economizer Changeover is set to OAT_RAT and the OAT exhaust fan is constant volume and is running. When the unit
rises above the RAT by a fixed 2°F differential. (OAT is equipped with staged exhaust fans, the percentage value
becomes low enough for operation when the OAT drops changes incrementally based on the number of operating
below the RAT a fixed 2°F differential). exhaust fan stages.
Off Network Determining Outside Air Damper Position
• A network signal is set to OFF OAD/Econo Cap is a status only item which indicates the
Off None current outdoor air damper or economizer valve position.

• Economizer Changeover is set to None Determining Emergency Mode

• Economizer capability is not provided Emergency Mode is an adjustable item which is normally used
• Unit is not configured for an airside or waterside by a network system to shutdown the unit in an emergency
economizer situation.
NOTE: Economizer is not disabled based on Control Mode or
Application Mode.
Economizer operation is disabled via a network command.

Off Dehumidification
Economizer operation is disabled if dehumidification operation
is enabled.

OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER 90 www.DaikinApplied.com

 All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Operator’s Guide

Determining Application Mode Determining Occupancy Status

The unit heating and cooling can be set up for automatic Occupancy is a status item which indicates whether the unit
heat/cool, heat only, cool only or fan only operation based is in an occupied, unoccupied or tenant override mode of
on a network signal by setting the Control Mode parameter operation.
to “Auto.” With the Control Mode parameters set to “Auto,” The following are descriptions of the various “Occupancy”
the heat/cool, cool only, heat only, and fan only decision is states.
determined by the Net App Mode. The Net App Mode is set
by a network signal. The following sections describe the five Occ
available Net App Mode selections.
The Occupancy parameter indicates “Occ” when the unit is
NOTE: The Net App Mode has no effect on the unit operation in the occupied mode. In this mode, the unit starts and runs
unless the Control Mode parameter is set to “Auto.” continuously, cooling and heating as required to maintain the

m
Off occupied temperature set points. The unit is in the occupied
mode if any of the following conditions are true:
When the Net App Mode is set to “OFF,” the Unit Status is “Off
Net” and the unit is completely disabled, including unoccupied • The Occ Mode entry on the keypad is set to occupied
heating (night set back) and unoccupied or unoccupied cooling • The Occ Mode entry on the keypad is set to Auto, and

.co
(night set up) operation. a manual network occupancy command is sent to the
controller
Heat Only • The Occ Mode entry on the keypad is set to Auto, a
When the Net App Mode is set to “Heat Only,” heating manual network occupancy command is set to Auto, and
operation is allowed to operate as required to maintain the any of the following is true:
heating set points. Cooling operation is disabled (Cooling • The External Start/Stop switch is closed
Status is “Off Net”). • A network schedule signal is set to Occupied or Standby
• The internal schedule function is in the Occupied
es
Cool Only
condition
When the Net App Mode is set to “Cool Only,” cooling
operation is allowed to operate as required to maintain the Unocc
cooling set points. Heating operation is disabled (Heating
The Occupancy parameter indicates “Unocc” when the unit
Status is “Off Net”).
is in the unoccupied mode. In this mode, the unit remains
Fan Only off unless unoccupied operation becomes active. When
uid

unoccupied operation is active the unit operates normally

When the Net App Mode is set to “Fan Only,” the fans are except that Minimum OA Position is set to zero. See
allowed to operate but cooling and heating operation is Unoccupied Operation, page 92 for information regarding
disabled (Cooling Status and Heating Status are “Off Net”). when unoccupied operation is activated.
Auto TntOvrd
When the Net App Mode is set to “Auto” heating and cooling The Occupancy parameter indicates “TntOvrd” when the unit
operation are allowed to operate as required to maintain the is in the tenant override mode. In this mode, the unit starts and
-g

heating and cooling set points. runs continuously, cooling and heating as required to maintain
the occupied temperature.
all

www.DaikinApplied.com 91 OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER

 All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Operator’s Guide

Tenant override operation is initiated when the Tenant Override Determining Occupancy Source
Timer is greater than zero. The Tenant Override Timer is set
equal to the Local Tenant Override Time (Timer Settings menu) When the Occupancy parameter indicates Occ, the occupancy
if the unit is enabled and any of the following is true: source is set to one of the following values to indicate the
function responsible for placing the unit into the occupied mode
• The Space Temperature sensor is present and its tenant of operation.
override button is pressed for less than 10 seconds.
Nothing happens if the button is pushed for more than None The Occ Src= parameter indicates “None” when the
10 seconds but less than the time required to initiate a Occupancy= parameter indicates “Unocc” or “Tnt Ovrd.”
shorted sensor alarm (30 seconds). Subsequent presses NetSchedule The Occ Src= parameter indicates “Net Schd”
on the button resets the Tenant Override Timer to the when the Occupancy= parameter indicates “Occ” due to a
Local Tenant Override Time, i.e. the max time network schedule indicating an occupied period.
• The Occ Mode entry on the keypad is set to Tenant IntSchedule The Occ Src= parameter indicates “Int Sched”
Override. After the Tenant Override Timer is set, the when the Occupancy= parameter indicates “Occ” due to the
Occ Mode entry on the keypad reverts to auto after a 2 unit internal schedule.
second time delay
OneEventSchedule The Occ Src= parameter indicates “Int
• The Occ Mode entry on the keypad is set to Auto or Sched” when the Occupancy= parameter indicates “Occ” due
Unocc, and a manual network occupancy command is to the unit one event schedule.
set to Bypass. After the Tenant Override Timer is set, the
network occupancy command reverts to Auto Subsequent RemoteSwitch The Occ Src= parameter indicates “Remote
presses on the button, setting of the keypad occupancy Sw” when the Occupancy= parameter indicates “Occ” due to
entry to Tenant Override again, or setting of the network a field supplied external time clock or a tenant override switch
occupancy command to Bypass again resets the Tenant signal in the form of a set of dry contacts is closed across
Override Timer to the Local Tenant Override Time. terminals 101 and102 on the unit field terminal block TB2.
The TOTime entry on the keypad can also be manually set to a OccManCmd The Occ Src= parameter indicates
non-zero value. In this case the value begins timing down from “OccManCmd” when OccMode is set to Auto and the network
the edited value. manual occupancy command is set to Occupied.
Tenant Override Operation may be terminated by manually OccMode The Occ Src= parameter indicates “Occ Mode”
setting the Tenant Override parameter on the keypad to zero or when the Occupancy= parameter indicates “Occ” due to the
by disabling the unit. Occupancy Mode being manually set to “Occ.”
TStatTO The Occ Src = parameter indicates “TStatTO” when
Determining Occupancy Mode the Occupancy= parameter indicates “TntOvrd” due to the
tenant override button on the zone thermostat being pushed.
Occ Mode is an adjustable item which sets the unit for manual
The button must be held for at least 1 second but not more
occupied, unoccupied, tenant override or automatic operation.
than 10 seconds.
Occ ManTO The TntOvrd Src = parameter indicates “ManTO” when
When Occ Mode is set to “Occ,” the unit is manually placed in the Occupancy= parameter indicates “Occ” due to the being
the occupied mode of operation. manually set via the keypad/display. When the Tenant Override
Timer is set to a non-zero value, the unit starts and runs in the
Unocc tenant override mode regardless of any scheduling features.
When Occ Mode is set to “Unocc,” the unit is manually placed The unit stops when the timer expires. The Tenant Override
in the unoccupied mode of operation. Timer can be set from 0-300 minutes.

TntOvrd
When Occ Mode is set to “TntOvrd,” the unit is manually
placed in the tenant override mode of operation.
NOTE: Once tenant override operation is activated the
parameter automatically reverts back to “Auto.”

Auto
When Occ Mode is set to “Auto” the automatically changes
between occupied, unoccupied and tenant override operation.

OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER 92 www.DaikinApplied.com

 All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Operator’s Guide

Unoccupied Operation Scheduling

During unoccupied operation the unit operates normally except The Air Handling unit can be scheduled for operation by using
that Min OA Pos is set to zero so that the damper is closed to the following three methods:
the outdoor air. • Unit internal time scheduling functions
Unoccupied Dehumidification • External time clock function
Dehumidification may be initiated in the unoccupied mode only • Network time scheduling function
if Dehumidification Control is set to Always instead of Occupied Provided the unit is not locally or remotely disabled, the unit
on the keypad. When this is the case and the humidity goes operates when any of these scheduling functions is calling for
high the unit transitions in the normal manner through Start occupied operation. Conversely, the unit enters the unoccupied
up and Recirc to Fan Only and then into the Dehumidification mode when all of these scheduling functions are calling for
Mode. In this case, the UnoccSrc= parameter indicates “Unocc unoccupied operation. Therefore, any unused scheduling
Dehum”. functions should be set for continuous unoccupied operation.

Unoccupied Cooling (Night Setup) The next four sections: “Setting Controller Date and Time,”
“Internal Daily Scheduling,” “Holiday Scheduling,” and “One
Unoccupied operation is initiated if the space sensor is reliable, Event Scheduling” describe functions related to the internal
the space temperature is greater than the Unoccupied Cooling unit scheduling functions. These are followed by a section
Setpoint, and the Unoccupied Cooling Setpoint is set lower describing the optimal start function which can be use with
than its maximum setting. In this case, the unoccupied source internal scheduling and network scheduling. This is followed
indicates “UnoccClg”. by two sections that describe the external time scheduling and
network time scheduling functions.
Unoccupied Heating (Night Setback)
Unoccupied operation is initiated if the space sensor is reliable, Setting Controller Date and Time
the space temperature is less than the Unoccupied Heating The controller uses the date and time to execute its internal
Setpoint, and the Unoccupied Heating Setpoint is set higher scheduling functions. The current time and date will not be lost
than its minimum setting. In this case, the Unoccupied Source if the unit is turned off for up to forty-eight hours. The clock and
indicates “UnoccHtg” date are settable from the keypad. The time of day can be set
by entering the hour (00-23), minute (00-59), and second (00-
Internal Optimal Start
59) into three fields of the Current Time. Note that MicroTech
Unoccupied operation is enabled due to an internal optimal III uses “military” time. The current date can be set by entering
start schedule being activated. In this case, the Unoocupied the date (00-31), month (01- 12) and year (1999-2155) into the
Source indicates “IntOptStrt”. three fields of the Current Date.
Network Optimal Start Internal Daily Schedule
Unoccupied operation is enabled due to a network optimal start An internal Daily Schedule provides one start time and one
schedule being activated. In this case, the Unoccupied Source stop time for each of the seven days of the week and for
indicates “NetOpStrt”. holidays. When the Occ Mode= parameter is set to “Auto/Net”,
and the unit is not disabled for other reasons, it starts and
None stops according to the controller internal schedule.
The Unoccupied Source is set to “None” when Unoccupied
operation is inactive. Holiday Scheduling
The operator may select the days when start and stop times
for holidays are used by selecting a start date and an end
date for up to ten periods during the year by using the holiday
scheduling feature. Whenever a holiday period occurs, the
controller uses the Holiday Schedule start and stop time for
the period. For example, assume that Christmas Eve occurs
on a Thursday. The building is shut down on both Christmas
Eve and Christmas Day, but operates normally on the
weekend. This holiday period would be scheduled by setting
the Holiday Schedule to the default “no schedule” values
“HH:MM- HH:MM” and setting the Holiday Period to “12/24/08
- 12/25/08.”

www.DaikinApplied.com 93 OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER

 All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Operator’s Guide

One Event Scheduling Temperature Control Configurations

A One-Event Schedule is provided so that one operating Temperature control is based on a Control Type that may be
period can be scheduled without affecting the regular internal set to Zone, DAT, or Single Zone VAV.
schedule. A start date/time and an end date/time can be set.
When the Control Type is set to Zone temperature control,
The unit can be scheduled to operate during a specified period heating, compressors, and the economizer are controlled to
by using this feature. During the specified period defined by maintain the temperature of the zone at a desired setpoint.
the One Event Beginning Date/Time and One Event Ending This configuration is used on units equipped with constant
Date/Time parameters the unit starts up and runs continuously volume supply fans. Compressors and heating stages are
regardless of any other time scheduling functions. For staged to maintain space or return temperature. The number
example, assume that a space served by the unit is occupied of compressors is decreased when it is too cold and increased
for a special event on March 12, 2008 from 5:00 p.m. to 10:00 when it is too hot subject to stage timers. The number of heat
p.m. when the normal time scheduling has the unit shut off stages is decreased when it is too hot and increased when it is
after 4:00 p.m. on that date. This event can be accounted for too cold subject to stage timers.
by setting the One Event Beginning Date/Time to “3/12/08 @
When the Control Type is set to DAT, heating, compressors,
17:00:00” and the One Event Ending Date/Time to “3/12/08 @
and the economizer are controlled to maintain the discharge air
22:00:00.”
temperature at a desired setpoint. This configuration is typically
Optimal Start used on units equipped with variable air volume supply fans.
When Optimal Start is active (Optimal Start = Yes), an early When the Control Type is set to (single zone VAV), heating,
start time is determined before each scheduled start. The compressors and the economizer are controlled to maintain
schedule must be based on an internal schedule or a signal the discharge air temperature at the desired setpoint while
via a connected network that indicates time to occupancy. The the variable volume supply fan is modulated to maintain the
controller uses start history, outdoor air temperature and space temperature of the zone at the desired heating and cooling
temperature to determine when the unit should start. The unit setpoints. In heating mode the supply fan capacity is increased
may start up to four hours before the scheduled occupancy as the zone temperature falls and decreased as the zone
time. Optimal start based on heating operates when the space temperature rises.
temperature is below the Occupied or Unoccupied Heating Spt
by ½ the Zone Htg Deadband. Optimal start based on cooling Heat/Cool Changeover
operates when the space temperature is above the Occupied
or Unoccupied Cooling Spt by ½ the Cooling Deadband. If In general, a unit configured for discharge air temperature
space temperature is between the above two points, the unit control either operates to deliver the cooling discharge
starts at the occupancy time. temperature set point using economizer and/or mechanical
cooling or the heating discharge air temperature set point using
External Time Scheduling the heating equipment. Cooling and heating never operate
simultaneously. A unit configured for zone (or space comfort)
An external time clock can be used to schedule unit operation.
control either operates to maintain the Occupied or Unoccupied
This is accomplished by a field supplied external time clock
Cooling Set Point using economizer and/or mechanical cooling
signal in the form of a set of dry contacts wired across
or the Occupied or Unoccupied Heating Set Point using the
terminals 101 and 102 on the unit field terminal block TB2. In
heating equipment.
this case, all internal daily schedules should be set to “HH:MM-
HH:MM” (default setting). The occupied or unoccupied cooling/occupied or unoccupied
heating setpoints can be set via the keypad/display or based
on a signal from an optional space temperature sensor with set
point adjustment capability. The following sections describe the
unit heat/ cool changeover function.

OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER 94 www.DaikinApplied.com

 All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Operator’s Guide

Illustrative Heat/Cool Changeover Sequence The Control Temperature Source automatically reverts from
Return to Space if both of the following are true:
The following is an illustration of the heat/cool changeover
function. • The Return Air Sensor is not present and reliable
When the control temperature is below the occupied or • A network or local Space Sensor is present and reliable
unoccupied heating setpoint by more than ½ the deadband The Control Temperature Source automatically reverts from
(point A), heating operation is enabled. Heating operation then Space to Return if both of the following are true:
remains enabled until the control temperature begins to rise • The space sensor is not reliable (a valid space
and rises above the occupied or unoccupied heating setpoint temperature value is not provided via the network and
by more than ½ the deadband (point B), at which point heating the space temperature sensor is either in alarm or not
operation is disabled and the unit enters the fan only (or Min present)
DAT) operating state. If the control temperature rises above
the occupied or unoccupied cooling setpoint by more than ½ • The return air sensor is reliable (present and not in alarm)
the deadband (point C) cooling operation is enabled. Cooling The Control Temperature Source automatically reverts
operation remains enabled until the control temperature begins from either Outdoor Air or Mixed Air to Return if the Control
to fall below the occupied or unoccupied cooling setpoint by Type is Zone (Not DAT). If the return air temperature is not
more than ½ the deadband (point D), at which point the unit reliable, the control temperature may then revert to space as
returns or fan only (or Min DAT) operating state. described above.
The Control Temperature Source automatically reverts from
Figure 12: Heat/Cool Changeover Mixed Air to Outdoor Air if Unit Type is not SCU.
A Control Temperature Fault that shuts down the unit is
initiated if any of the following is true.
• The return air sensor is not present and reliable and
Return Air is selected as the control temperature and a
space sensor is not available.
• A network or local space sensor is not present and
reliable and Space is selected as the control temperature
and a return temperature sensor is not available.
• The OAT Sensor is not present and reliable and Outdoor
Air is selected as the control temperature
• The mixed air temperature sensor is not present
or reliable and Mixed Air is selected as the control
temperature

Control Temperature Occupied Temperature Set Points

The “Control Temperature” is defined as the unit temperature When the Use Tstat set point parameter is set to No, the
input used to make the heat/cool changeover decision. This Occupied Cooling Set Point and the Occupied Heating Set
determines whether or not cooling or heating is enabled. Point may be set through the keypad or via a network signal.
In this case these set points are changed whenever the
The user may select Space Temperature, Return network or keypad value changes. When the Use Tstat set
Temperature, Outdoor Air Temperature or None for DAT units. point parameter is set to Yes these set points can only be
Normally either the Return or Space Temperature is selected adjusted through the zone thermostat. Heating and cooling set
as the control temperature. Outdoor Air Temperature may points must not overlap. The Occupied Heating Set Point must
be used as the control temperature for DAT units, but not for be equal to or less than the Occupied Cooling Set Point. If a
Zone Control units. conflict occurs from values entered via the keypad or network,
When the Control Temperature Source is set to None, the unit the Occupied Heating Set Point is automatically adjusted down
no longer “changes over” between heating and cooling in the to eliminate the conflict. When the Occupied Cooling Set point
normal manner. Instead it acts as if it is always in the “cooling” is changed by more than 0.5 degrees through the wall mounted
mode of operation controlling to the discharge air cooling set sensor, the Occupied Heating Set Point is raised or lowered
point. In this case the unit operating state will vary between the same amount so that the difference between the Cooling
Cooling, Fan Only and Min DAT (heating) in order to maintain and Heating set points does not change.
the discharge air cooling set point. The unit will only enter the
Heating operating state and control to the discharge heating
set point for morning warm up purposes.

www.DaikinApplied.com 95 OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER

 All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Operator’s Guide

OA/EWT Lockout Zero OA Time (Morning Warm-up)

Heating is disabled whenever the outdoor air temperature A separate Morning Warm-up operating state is not provided,
is greater than the Outdoor Air Ambient Heating Lockout but an editable ZeroOATime is used to keep the Outside Air
Set Point. When the outdoor air temperature drops below damper closed when the unit first starts. The Minimum OA
the Outdoor Air Ambient Heating Lockout Set Point by more Position is set to zero as long as the as the fan has been on for
than the Heating Lockout Differential, heating operation is less than the ZeroOATime. This allows the Return Air type units
re-enabled. Cooling is disabled if outdoor air temperature to cool down the space with mechanical cooling or to warm up
or entering water temperature is too low for operation. The the space with the dampers closed. If the ZeroOATime is set
outdoor air temperature becomes too low for operation when correctly, the OA dampers will be open only during occupied
it drops below the Outdoor Air Ambient Cooling Lockout periods. When Optimal Start is used ZeroOATime is set equal
Set Point. Outdoor air temperature becomes high enough to the time to occupancy when the unit starts so that the OA
for operation when it rises above the Outdoor Air Ambient dampers will open at occupancy time.

m
Cooling Lockout Set Point by more than the Cooling Lockout
Differential. The entering water temperature becomes too low Post Heat Operation
for operation when it drops below the Minimum Entering Water After leaving the Recirc or Heating operating state and entering
Temperature Setpoint. Entering water temperature becomes either the Fan Only or Min DAT operating state, the unit
high enough for operation when it rises above the Minimum performs “post heat” operation if the Post Heat Timer is set to

.co
Entering Water Temperature Setpoint by more the Cooling a non zero value. “Post heat” operation occurs within the Fan
Lockout Differential. Only or MinDAT operating state. During “post heat” operation,
the VAV Box Output remains open (heat) while the discharge
Tenant Override fan capacity is forced to a minimum value (default 33% speed
The tenant-override button provided with the optional zone for VFD). By forcing the discharge fan capacity to a minimum
temperature sensor packages is used to override unoccupied value before the VAV Box Output closes (cool), “post heat”
operation for a pre programmed time period. This time period is operation is designed to prevent duct over-pressurization by
set with the Tenant Override Time Increment. This value can be decreasing the duct pressure before the VAV boxes can close.
es
adjusted from 0 to 300 minutes (default is 120 minutes). When “Post heat” operation remains active until either the discharge
an occupant presses and releases the tenant override button fan capacity reaches the minimum value or until the Post
on the zone temperature sensor (ZNT1), the Tenant Override Heat Timer expires, whichever occurs first. When “post heat”
Timer is set equal to the Tenant Override Time Increment. (The operation ends, normal duct static pressure or position control
button must be held for at least 1 second but not more than 10 resumes.
seconds.) The unit then starts and runs in the tenant override
uid

mode which is the same as occupied mode except that it is NOTE: During “post heat” operation and for 120 seconds
temporary. The Tenant Override Timer begins timing out and afterward, the proof of airflow input is ignored. This
is to prevent nuisance Fan Fail fault alarms that may
the unit runs until the timer expires. If the tenant override
occur if the airflow switch opens during or following
button is pressed again while the unit is operating in tenant “post heat” operation. The unit cannot leave the Fan
override mode, the Tenant Override Timer is reset to the Tenant Only or Min DAT operating state while the airflow
Override Time Increment and the unit continues to operate. For switch input is being ignored. The VAV output is only
example, assume that the Tenant Override Time Increment is available to the field via network communications.
120 minutes. One press of the override button provides at least
-g

120 minutes of unit operation. If the button is pressed again

60 minutes later, the Tenant Override Timer is reset to 120
minutes, and a total of 180 minutes of uninterrupted operation
results.
NOTE: The same operation occurs if, instead of pressing the
all

override button on a zone temperature sensor, the

Occupancy Mode is set to “Tnt Ovrd.” Once set to “Tnt
Ovrd”, the Occupancy Mode automatically reverts to
the “Auto” setting once the Tnt Ovrd Timer is set to
the Tnt Ovrd Time Increment. The same operation
will also occur if the network occupancy manual
command it set to bypass

OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER 96 www.DaikinApplied.com

 All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Operator’s Guide

Dehumidification Dehumidification Mechanical Cooling Control

In the dehumidification mode, mechanical cooling is used to During dehumidification, control of mechanical cooling is
cool air low enough to wring moisture out of it. Hot Gas Reheat based on the following two editable values of the Leaving Coil
or the standard unit heating equipment (Gas, SCR Electric Temperature setpoint.
or Steam/Hot water) is used to raise the temperature of this • Mx Lvg Coil T (Default = 52°F)
cooled air to a desirable value.
• Mn Lvg Coil T (Default = 45°F)
Dehumidification Initiation For compressorized units, the number of compressor stages
An analog sensor is mounted in the return duct, the space, or increases when all of the following are true:
outdoor to sense relative humidity. The location is selected by
• The time since the last stage change exceeds the
setting the Sensor Location value on the keypad to Return,
Clg Stage Time
Space, or OAT.
• Leaving Coil Temperature is greater than the
NOTE: This setting is used to dictate which temperature Mx Lvg Coil T
sensor is used to calculate the dewpoint. OAT
can only be selected for units with DAT control. • The current cooling stage is less than the available
The relative humidity and a calculated dewpoint number of stages
temperature are both displayed on the keypad. The
calculated dewpoint temperature is based on the During the dehumidification mode, the number of compressor
relative humidity and Return, Space, or OAT value stages decreases when all of the following are true:
depending on the location of the humidity sensor. • The time since the last stage change exceeds the
Humidity control is disabled if cooling is disabled for Clg Stage Time
any reason. Dehumidification operation is initiated
when Humidity Control is set to either relative • Leaving Coil Temperature is less than Mn Lvg Coil T Spt
humidity or dewpoint and that value rises above the • The current cooling stage is greater than zero
appropriate setpoint by more than half its deadband.
Units with modulated cooling are controlled by a PI Loop to
Dehumidification Termination maintain the temperature leaving the coil at the Mn Lvg Coil T.
Dehumidification is terminated if the selected variable, Relative The normal DAT Cooling Deadband and PI Loop parameters
Humidity or Dew Point, drops below the appropriate humidity are used in this PI Loop.
setpoint by more than half its deadband. Dehumidification is MPS HGBP Valve
also terminated if cooling is disabled for any reason. Other
ways that dehumidification may be terminated are if Dehum When the Unit Type is MPS and the unit is equipped with
Method is set to “None” on the keypad, or if the unit goes to Off modulating hot gas reheat control an HGBP valve output
Net, Off Sw, Off Alm, or Off Man Ctrl. (MCB-DO6) is controlled to make sure hot gas is not flowing
through both the hot gas bypass and hot gas reheat circuits
When Dehumidification is terminated, all mechanical simultaneously.
cooling is turned off except when the unit is in the Cooling
state. Modulated cooling reverts to normal control when The HGBP Valve Output is ON (energized) whenever Unit
dehumidification is terminated in the Cooling state. For State is Cooling and dehumidification operation is inactive. The
units with compressors, the number of cooling stages is HGBP Valve Output is OFF (de-energized) any other time.
reduced by one and control reverts to normal control when
dehumidification is terminated in the Cooling state. Another
compressor stage change could then occur after one Cooling
Stage Time has elapsed

www.DaikinApplied.com 97 OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER

 All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Operator’s Guide

Dehumidification Reheat Control Modulating HGRH Control

During dehumidification control either an analog or digital In the Cooling and Fan Only states, a PI Loop is used
Hot Gas Reheat (HGRH) output or the standard modulating to control the HGRH valve to maintain the discharge air
heating output is controlled to maintain the current Reheat temperature at the Dehumidification Reheat Setpoint. The PI
Setpoint. If Reheat Type software configuration parameter is Loop is enabled when the unit is in the Cooling or Fan Only
set to Staged Hot Gas, then a digital HGRH output is controlled operating state and dehumidification becomes active.
to maintain the Reheat Setpoint. If the Reheat Type software NOTE: When configured for modulating hot gas reheat the
configuration parameter is set to Modulating Hot Gas, then reheat valve is stroked open and then closed every
an analog HGRH output is controlled to maintain the Reheat day at 2:00 AM as long as dehumidification is inactive
Setpoint. If the Reheat Type software configuration parameter and the unit is not in the Cooling operating state at
is set to Standard Heat, then the normal heating analog output the time.
is controlled to maintain the Reheat Setpoint.
Reheat Compressor Limiting Control
• Cooling/Fan Only: In the Cooling and Fan Only states,
a PI Loop is used to control the HGRH valve to maintain A special cooling capacity limiting function is used when a
the Discharge Air Temperature at the Dehumidification unit is configured for Hot Gas and/or Liquid subcooling control
Reheat Setpoint. The deadband for this loop is the same types of reheat. During dehumidification, if the unit cannot
one used for other control of heating to maintain the DAT provide enough reheat to meet the discharge temperature
Heating setpoint. setpoint this limiting function will act to reduce the cooling
capacity of the circuit opposite the reheat circuit in an attempt
• Cooling: In the Cooling state, the Dehumidification
to increase the leaving coil temperature and therefore the
Reheat Setpoint equals the DAT Cooling Setpoint. For
reheat temperature. An Event will also be logged.
DAT units, this is the normal DAT setpoint resulting from
any reset. For Zone Control units, this setpoint is the Reheat compressor limiting is allowed during dehumidification
result of a PI Loop based on the control temperature as is operation if the following are true for longer than the cooling
done in the Economizer state or with modulated cooling stage time:
in the Cooling state. • Reheat compressor limiting is set to Yes
• Fan Only: In the Fan Only state, the Dehumidification • Reheat type equals ModHGRH, ModLSC or ModHG &
Reheat Setpoint equals an editable MaxReheatSpt LSC
(Default = 65°F) when the control temperature drops to
• A fixed compressor in the circuit opposite the reheat
the Occupied or Unoccupied Heating Setpoint and equals
circuit in ON
an editable MinReheatSpt (Default = 55°F) when the
control temperature rises to the Occupied or Unoccupied • The Reheat capacity equals 100%
Cooling setpoint. The Dehumidification Reheat Setpoint • The DAT is less than the Reheat set point-1/2 DB
varies linearly between these two points.
If all of the above items are true for longer than the cooling
This means that no matter what the Control Temperature stage timer setting, the limiting function would reduce the
is, including OAT, the temperature leaving the unit is at a cooling capacity of the circuit opposite the reheat circuit by one
maximum just before the unit needs to go into heating and at stage. This reduction in cooling capacity would continue until
a minimum just before the unit needs to go into cooling. This all compressors opposite the reheat circuit have been staged
reduces opportunity for unit to go into heating or cooling during off as long as all of the above remained true.
dehumidification. The limiting function will remain active until the following are
Staged HGRH Control true for longer than the cooling stage time:

In the Cooling and Fan Only states, a staged output is turned • Reheat capacity is less than or equal to the minimum
ON and OFF to control the HGRH valve to maintain the reheat capacity
discharge air temperature at the Dehumidification Reheat • The DAT is greater than the Reheat set point-1/2 DB
Setpoint. The deadband for this setpoint is an adjustable. • All of the fixed stages have been staged back ON.
When the DAT is above the Dehumidification Reheat Setpoint
by more than half the deadband, cooling capacity is greater
than 0% and the Dehumidification Reheat Timer has expired,
the reheat output is turned on. When the DAT is below
the Dehumidification Reheat Setpoint by more than half
the deadband and the Dehumidification Reheat Timer has
expired, or if the cooling capacity is 0%, the reheat output is
turned OFF.

OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER 98 www.DaikinApplied.com

 All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Operator’s Guide

Energy Recovery
Energy recovery is provided by drawing outside air across half Enthalpy Wheel Frost Prevention
of an enthalpy wheel and drawing exhaust air across the other Two different frost protection methods are provided depending
half. Latent and sensible heat is transferred from the hotter, on whether or not the enthalpy wheel is controlled by a VFD.
moister exhaust air to the colder dryer outside air in winter. When there is a threat of frost or condensation on the enthalpy
Latent and sensible heat is transferred from the hotter more wheel, a variable speed wheel may be first slowed down and
moist outside air to the cooler dryer exhaust air in summer. then stopped and a constant speed wheel may be stopped so
Control consists of starting and stopping an exhaust fan, that less enthalpy transfer occurs and frosting or condensation
modulating the speed of the exhaust fan, starting and stopping on the enthalpy wheel is avoided. In either case the frost
the enthalpy wheel, and optionally controlling the speed of control is based on an Intersection Point described as follows:
the enthalpy wheel. The outdoor dampers are controlled in
the normal manner. The current statuses as well as editable Condensation and frosting can occur on the enthalpy wheel
parameters associated with energy recovery are located in the when the exhaust air leaving the wheel is saturated. This
Energy Rec Setup menu. condition will occur when two lines intersect on a psychometric
chart, and it will not occur when these two lines do not intersect.
Enthalpy Wheel One of these lines is the Humidity Ratio versus the dry bulb for
The enthalpy wheel is turned on when all of the following are saturated air. The other line is the Humidity Ratio versus the dry
true. The speed of the enthalpy wheel is set to the maximum bulb temperature of the exhaust air leaving the enthalpy wheel.
speed for units with a VFD controlling the speed of the The two ends of this second straight line on a psychometric
enthalpy wheel. chart are the OAT at 95% RH and the return air temperature
at the return air relative humidity. One line showing frosting
• The exhaust fan is ON conditions and another line showing no frost conditions are
• The OA Dampers are at the minimum position shown on the sketch of a psychometric chart shown.
• The unit is not in the Economizer operating state A continuous calculation determines if and at what
• The enthalpy wheel has not been turned OFF due to frost temperatures these two lines intersect. If they do intersect they
prevention (variable or constant speed wheels) intersect at two points. The higher of the two points is referred
• The enthalpy wheel has not been turned OFF due to to as the “Intersection Point”. When they do not intersect, the
defrost control (constant speed wheels only) enthalpy wheel runs at full speed. When they do intersect, the
variable speed enthalpy wheel may be slowed to its minimum
• The wheel has not been turned OFF due to Variable
speed as described above to maintain the dry bulb temperature
Effectiveness Operation
of the exhaust air leaving the enthalpy wheel high enough
The enthalpy wheel is turned OFF when any of the following is to eliminate the Intersection Point and therefore the threat of
true frosting conditions. If slowing the wheel does not eliminate
• The exhaust fan is OFF the Intersection Point after a stage time period, the wheel
may be stopped. A constant speed wheel is stopped when an
• The OA Damper Position is driven above the Minimum
Intersection Point exists.
OA Damper Position by more than 3%.
• Either of the frost prevention functions dictate that the
Figure 13: Exhaust Air Psychometric Chart
wheel be OFF.
• The constant speed wheels defrost function dictates the
wheel is to be OFF.

www.DaikinApplied.com 99 OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER

 All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Operator’s Guide

Constant Speed Wheel Frost Prevention Control Enthalpy Wheel Defrost Control (Constant Speed
Wheels Only)
The enthalpy wheel is stopped when both of the following are
true: In lieu of the frost prevention method described above, a
constant speed enthalpy wheel can be set for a simpler
• The enthalpy wheel has been ON for longer than the
timed defrost method of frost management. With this method
edited Wheel Stage Time
the enthalpy wheel is stopped periodically for a defrost time
• The exhaust air temperature leaving the enthalpy wheel duration when the outdoor air temperature is below an outdoor
is below the Intersection Point plus an edited minimum frost temperature threshold setpoint.
temperature difference.
Defrost operation becomes enabled when all of the following
• Defrost Method=ExhAir
are true:
• Enthalpy wheel is constant speed
• Defrost Method = Timed
The enthalpy wheel is turned back ON when the wheel has • Energy wheel is constant speed
been OFF due to Frosting/Condensation for longer than an
• OAT is less than the OA frost temperature setpoint.
edited Minimum Off Time and the exhaust air temperature
leaving the enthalpy wheel is above the Intersection Point plus • Normal wheel operation has the enthalpy wheel ON
an edited Maximum Temperature Difference. When defrost operation is enabled, the wheel is stopped for the
Variable Speed Wheel Frost Prevention Control Defrost Time (default 5 minutes) every Defrost Period (default
60 minutes).
The enthalpy wheel VFD speed is set to a minimum wheel
speed (default 5%) value when all of the following are true: When the wheel is stopped due to defrost operation the wheel
must be slowly rotated so that both halves of the wheel are
• The enthalpy wheel has been operating at maximum allowed to be defrosted by the relative warm exhaust air
speed for longer than the edited Wheel Stage Time leaving the wheel. This is accomplished by alternately turning
• The exhaust air temperature leaving the enthalpy wheel the wheel off for the editable Defrost Off Time (default 24
is below the Intersection Point plus an edited Minimum seconds) and on for the editable Defrost On time (default 1
Temperature Difference. second) during defrost operation.
• Enthalpy wheel is variable speed
Enthalpy Wheel Capacity Limiting
To prevent Frosting/Condensation ON the enthalpy wheel, the Enthalpy wheel capacity limiting control is a means to limit
enthalpy wheel is turned OFF when both of the following are the capacity of an energy wheel during part load conditions.
true: Normally wheels are sized for worst case winter/summer
• The exhaust air temperature leaving the enthalpy wheel load and, therefore, at part load the wheel may be oversized.
is below the Intersection Point plus an edited Minimum Capacity limiting control is allowed when the energy recovery
Temperature Difference. wheel leaving air temperature (ERDAT) sensor is present and
• The wheel has been operating at the minimum wheel reliable and the outdoor air temperature (OAT) is colder than
speed for longer than an edited Wheel Stage Time the returning air temperature.
Capacity limiting control is not allowed during dehumidification
The enthalpy wheel is turned ON at minimum speed when both
operation or when either the wheel frost prevention or defrost
of the following are true:
operation are active.
• The enthalpy wheel has been OFF due to Frosting/
Capacity limiting operation differs depending on whether the
Condensation for longer than an edited Minimum Off Time
energy recovery wheel is constant or variable speed.
• The exhaust air temperature leaving the enthalpy wheel
is above the Intersection Point plus an edited Maximum Constant Speed Wheel
Temperature Difference.
The conditions that cause the energy recovery wheel to turn
The Enthalpy Wheel speed will be increased to its maximum due to capacity limiting are different depending on the unit
speed when both of the following are true: operation state as follows:
• The exhaust air temperature leaving the enthalpy wheel Fan Only
is above the Intersection Point plus an edited Maximum
When the unit is operating in the Fan Only state, the energy
Temperature Difference (MaxExhTDiff)
recovery wheel is stopped due to capacity limiting whenever
• The wheel has been operating at the minimum speed for the discharge air temperature (DAT) is above the MinDATLimit
longer than the edited Wheel Stage Time setpoint by more than ½ the discharge air heating deadband.
The wheel is re-started when the DAT falls back to or below
the MinDATLimit setpoint plus ½ the discharge air heating
deadband.

OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER 100 www.DaikinApplied.com

 All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Operator’s Guide

Heating All four of the following are true:

When the unit is operating in the Heating state, the energy • The exhaust fan is controlled by a VFD
recovery wheel is stopped due to capacity limiting whenever • The OA Dampers are at least open to the Minimum OA
all heating is OFF and the discharge air temperature (DAT) Position
is above the discharge heating setpoint by more than ½ the
• The Minimum OA Position is greater than 0%
discharge air heating deadband. The wheel is re-started when
the DAT falls back to or below the discharge heating setpoint • The exhaust fan capacity is commanded to a value above
plus ½ the discharge air heating deadband. the minimum value (Default = 5%) by a BAS for longer
than the Minimum Exhaust Fan Start Time (Default = 120
Cooling seconds)
When the unit is operating in the Cooling state, the energy Both of the following are true:
recovery wheel is stopped due to capacity limiting whenever

m
the energy recovery wheel leaving air temperature (ER LAT) • The exhaust fan is constant volume
is above the discharge cooling setpoint by more than ½ the • The supply fan has been commanded on for at least 4
discharge air cooling deadband. The wheel is re-started seconds
when the ER LAT falls back to or below the discharge cooling
The exhaust fan is turned OFF when any of the following sets
setpoint plus ½ the discharge air cooling deadband.

.co
of conditions is true:
Variable Speed Wheel All three of the following are true:
When the enthalpy wheel is variable speed and the Variable • The exhaust fan is controlled by a VFD
Effectiveness Control PI_Loop is active the ER LAT is • The building static pressure is below the building static
controlled to the current effective discharge temperature pressure setpoint by more than the deadband
setpoint.
• The exhaust fan capacity is at or below its minimum value
Exhaust Fan (Default = 5%) for longer than the Min Exhaust Fan Stop
es
Time (Default = 120 seconds)
A variable speed exhaust fan controlled by a VFD is provided
for all Economizer units with either constant volume or VAV Both of the following are true:
supply fans and on 100% Outside Air units with VAV supply
• The exhaust fan is controlled by a VFD
fans. Either a constant volume exhaust fan or a variable speed
exhaust fan controlled by a VFD may be provided on 100% • The exhaust fan capacity is commanded to less than or
Outside Air units with constant volume supply fans. equal to its minimum value (Default = 5%) by the BAS for
uid

longer than the Minimum Exhaust Fan Stop Time (Default

The exhaust fan is turned ON when any of the following sets of = 120 seconds)
conditions is true:
The exhaust fan is OFF when the supply fan is OFF
All four of the following are true:
Whenever a variable speed exhaust fan is ON, its capacity will
• The Exhaust Fan is controlled by a VFD
be modulated using a VFD. The speed of the fan will be either
• The OA Dampers are at least open to the Minimum OA (1) modulated to maintain the building static pressure at a
Position desired value or (2) set at a fixed speed provided by a Building
-g

• The Minimum OA Position is greater than 0% Automation System via a network.

• The building static pressure is above the building static
pressure setpoint by more than the deadband for longer
than the Minimum Exhaust Fan Start Time (Default =
120 seconds)
all

www.DaikinApplied.com 101 OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER

 All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Operator’s Guide

Bypass Dampers (Not Applicable for 100% OA Figure 14: Damper Position versus Fan Speed Chart
Units)
The bypass dampers are driven closed (Bypass Damper
Closed output is energized) whenever the OA Damper position
is less than or equal to the Minimum OA Position
The Bypass dampers are driven open (Bypass Damper Open
output is energized) whenever the OA Damper Position
exceeds the Minimum OA Damper Position by more that 3%

Outside Air Damper Control

Minimum Outside Air Damper Control
Control of the dampers in the Economizer state is described
in the Economizer Control section. The outdoor air dampers
are driven open in the cooling operating state if economizer
operation is enabled and to the Minimum OA Position if Cold Start Operation
economizer operation is disabled. For all other operating A special “cold start” sequence will slow the opening of the
conditions, the outdoor air dampers are set to the Minimum dampers when it is cold outdoors and the unit is equipped
OA Position. The Minimum OA Position is set to zero or with either Hot water/Steam or F&BP heating. This is to try
closed position when the supply fan is off, the unit is in the to prevent nuisance freezestat trips associated with dampers
Recirculation state, Occupancy is set to Unocc, or the fan has opening up rapidly to minimum position before the heat has a
been on for less than the Zero OA Time. chance to ramp up. This “cold start” sequence is initiated if the
As a result, the OA dampers are driven closed in night following conditions are all true:
setback, night setup, morning warm-up, and morning cool • OAT is below the current LoDATLimit
down situations unless economizer operation is required. In all
• The unit is equipped with an Airside Economizer
other conditions the Minimum OA Position is equal to or below
a Ventilation Limit and equal to or above a Demand Control • The current Unit State is beyond the Recirc
Ventilation limit. For CAV units, the Ventilation Limit equals the • The current Minimum Outdoor Damper Position set point
keypad editable Vent Limit and the Demand Control Ventilation is greater than 0%
Limit equals the keypad editable DCV Limit. For VAV units, the • The unit is equipped with Hot water/Steam or F&BP
Ventilation Limit varies with VFD speed between the editable heating
Vent Limit at 100% Supply Fan speed and the editable LoFlo
Vent Limit at the Min Clg Spd, as shown in Figure 14. For When the sequence is active the dampers will move more
VAV units, the Demand Control Ventilation Limit varies as slowly the colder it is outdoors. The minimum and maximum
the Ventilation Limit value changes so that the ratio between ramp rates are adjustable via the keypad by navigating to the
them remains constant. In the example shown in Figure 14 Commission Unit/Min OA Set-up menu. The effective ramp rate
the Demand Control Ventilation Limit would always be 1/2 the will vary from the minimum 40% 100% (Minimum) Airflow rate
Ventilation Limit since the DCV Limit= parameter (10%) is half at OAT equal to -30°F to the maximum at OAT equal to 100°F.
of the Vent Limit= parameter (20%). Once the damper position reaches a point 1% below the actual
effective minimum position normal operation will begin. If the
The editable parameters are to be determined when the airflow unit enters the Economizer operating state before the damper
for the unit is balanced and are located in the Min OA Set-up regulation begins, the regulation will begin from the current
menu. economizer position.
NOTE: The MinClgSpd is prevented from being set equal
to the Design Cooling Speed. The DCV Limit is
prevented from being set greater than the Vent Limit.
If the VentLimit or the LoFloVent Limit is set to 0, the
Ventilation Limit is overridden to 0.

OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER 102 www.DaikinApplied.com

 All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Operator’s Guide

Minimum Outside Air Reset - None Example #1 Min OA reset type = IAQ VDC
If None is selected as the Min OA Reset Type, the Minimum If the requirement is to have the OA damper be at its minimum
OA Position is set equal to the Ventilation Limit. The Demand (Demand Control Ventilation Limit) when the CO2 levels are
Control Ventilation Limit value is ignored when Min OA reset is less than 800 PPM and to be at its maximum (Ventilation Limit)
set to None. when the CO2 levels are greater than 1000 PPM, the controller
would be set up as follow:
Minimum Outside Air Reset - Network Control
• Vent Limit = 100%
If Network is selected as the Min OA Reset Type and a valid
• Lo Flow Vent Limit = 100%
value for the minimum position is provided via a network the
Minimum OA Position is set equal to that value. The network • DCV Limit = 0%
is only allowed to write a value that is between the Ventilation • Min OA reset type = IAQ VDC
Limit and the Demand Control Ventilation Limit current values. • PPM@DCV Limit = 800
If Network is selected as the Min OA Reset Type and a valid
• PPM@Vent Limit = 1000
value for the minimum position is not provided, the Min OA
position is set equal to the Ventilation Limit. • IAQ PPM = Current PPM
• Min PPM = 0 (From CO2 transducer)
Minimum Outside Air Reset - External Control • Max PPM = 2000 (From CO2 transducer)
If ExtV is selected as the Min OA Reset Type, the Minimum OA • V/A @ Min PPM = 0 VDC
Position is calculated based on an external 0-10 VDC signal.
• V/A @ Max PPM = 10 VDC
If ExtmA is selected as the Min OA Type, the Minimum OA
Position is calculated based on an external 0-20 mA signal. In this example the Minimum OA Position would vary linearly
This calculated Minimum OA Position varies linearly from zero from 0% outside air at 800 PPM or less to 100% outside air at
% at the editable minimum external signal to the maximum 1000 PPM or greater.
value at the editable maximum external signal, but it is set no
lower than the Demand Control Ventilation Limit and no higher Examples of typical Min OA reset schedules.
than the Ventilation Limit. If EXT VDC is selected as the Min OA Type, the Minimum OA
Position is calculated based on an external 0-10 VDC signal.
Minimum Outside Air Reset -IAQ
This calculated Minimum OA Position varies linearly from zero
If either IAQV or IAQ mA is selected as the Min OA Type, % at the changeable minimum external signal to 100% at the
the Minimum OA Position is calculated based on a 0-10V or changeable maximum external signal, but it is set no lower
0-20 mA CO2 sensor input. The CO2 level is expressed as than the Demand Control Ventilation Limit and no higher than
Parts Per Million. The minimum and maximum sensor input the Ventilation Limit.
values (0-10V or 0-20 mA) and the corresponding minimum
and maximum PPM values are user defined. This calculated Example #2 Min OA reset type = EXT VDC
Minimum OA Position varies linearly from the Demand Control If the requirement is to have the OA damper be at its minimum
Ventilation Limit at the “PPM @ DCV Limit” to the Ventilation (Demand Control Ventilation Limit) when the field supplied
Limit at the “PPM @ VentLimit””. The “PPM @ DCV Limit” signal is at its minimum (0 VDC) and to be at its maximum
is not allow to be set equal to or greater than the “PPM @ (Ventilation Limit) when the field supplied signal is at its
VentLimit” maximum (10 VDC), the controller would be set up as follow:
Examples of typical Min OA reset schedules. • Vent Limit = 100%
If IAQ VDC is selected as the Min OA Type, the Minimum OA • Lo Flow Vent Limit = 100%
Position is calculated based on a 0-10V CO2 sensor input. • DCV Limit = 10%
The CO2 level is expressed as PPM (Parts Per Million). The • Min OA reset type = EXT VDC
minimum and maximum sensor input values (0-10V) and the • OA@MinV/mA = 0%
corresponding minimum and maximum PPM values are user
changeable. This calculated Minimum OA Position varies • OA@MaxV/mA = 100%
linearly from the Demand Control Ventilation Limit at the value • Min V/mA = 0 VDC
labeled “PPM @ DCV Limit” to the Ventilation Limit at the value • Max V/mA = 10 VDC
labeled “PPM @ VentLimit”. The “PPM @ DCV Limit” is not
allow to be set equal to or greater than the “PPM @ VentLimit” In this example the Minimum OA Position would vary linearly
from 0% outside air at 0 VDC to 100% outside air at 10 VDC.

www.DaikinApplied.com 103 OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER

 All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Operator’s Guide

Reset Temperature Limit NOTE: The factory default for Min OA Reset is set to none
however changes may be made by accessing the Min
The user has the option of setting a low temperature limit that OA Set-Up menu. Once changes have been made to
will override all the outdoor air reset functions described in this the Min OA Reset type, the Apply Changes flag must
section except the Return Fan Capacity Override function if the be changed from no to yes in order for the controller
discharge air temperature or entering fan temperature gets too to recognize the changes. Setting the Apply Changes
cold as a result of the reset. The user can choose the override flag to YES will automatically reset the controller.
sensor by setting the Reset Temperature Limit to None, DAT or
EFT. When set to None the Reset Temperature Limit function 0-30%OA Units
is disabled. A Reset Temperature Limit PI_Loop will be used A two position 0-30% OA actuator is controlled by a modulating
to reset the minimum outside air damper setpoint downward analog output. This actuator is driven to its fully open position,
when the selected temperature input drops below the Reset nominally 30%, when the OA damper analog output is at its
Temperature Limit. maximum value and it is driven closed when the OA damper
analog output is at its minimum value. The desired minimum
Minimum Position Control -Field Supplied Outdoor open position between 0% and 30% normally is set by an
Airflow Station Input
editable keypad menu item (Vent Limit). If a valid value is
When the OA Flow Station parameter in the Software provided via the network, that position is used as the desired
Configuration Code is set to Field Station and the Field Station minimum open position instead of the keypad value.
parameter on the keypad is set to VDC or mA, the Minimum
The two position damper is driven to the closed position when
OA Position value is adjusted based on the measured amount
the supply fan is OFF (OFF and Startup state), the unit is in the
of outdoor air being brought into the unit from a field supplied
Recirculation state, unoccupied operation is active, or the fan
airflow monitoring station. If the airflow is below the desired
has been on for less than the Zero OA Time. As a result the
value, the Minimum OA Position is increased and if the airflow
OA dampers are driven closed in night setback, night setup,
is above the desired value, Minimum OA Position is decreased.
morning warm-up, and morning cool down situations. The two
The field airflow signal will be in the form of a 0-10V or 0-20 mA position damper is driven to the desired minimum open position
input. The minimum and maximum sensor input values (0-10V in all other conditions.
or 0-20 mA) and the corresponding minimum and maximum
The Ventilation Limit equals the keypad editable Vent Limit
CFM values are user editable.
and the Demand Control Ventilation Limit equals the keypad
NOTE: The Minimum OA Position is reset up and down editable DCV Limit. The Vent Limit cannot be set higher than
between the Ventilation Limit and the Demand the 0-30%OAMax value. The DCV Limit cannot be set higher
Control Ventilation Limit by a PI_Loop function to than the Vent Limit.
maintain the field OA CFM value at an adjustable OA
CFM Setpoint. Return Fan Capacity Override (RTU Airside
Economizer Units Only)
When the MinOAType is set to Ext or IAQ and the
Field OA Station parameter is set to VDC or mA, the The minimum position determined by any method below
OA flow input is assigned to a specially added I/O may be overridden for a variable speed return fan when the
expansion module (EXPE) position X1. When the return fan speed is below the supply fan speed by more than
MinOAType is not set to Ext or IAQ and the Field OA an adjustable value. In this situation, the outdoor air damper
Station parameter is set to VDC or mA, the OA flow minimum position is reset up based on the schedule shown
input is assigned to the main control board(MCB) below if normal control of the minimum position would result in
position X1. a lower value. The minimum position will be controlled in the
Minimum Position Control - Design Flow (RPS normal manner if that results in a higher value than determined
Airside Economizer Units Only) by the reset schedule.

When the OA Flow Station parameter in the Unit configuration

menu is set to Design Flow and the Design Flow control
flag is set to Yes, the minimum outside air damper position
is controlled to maintain the minimum OA flow setpoint.
Design Flow is only available when for RTU units with Airside
Economizers.
When the DesignFlow control flag is set to Yes, the Minimum
OA Position value is adjusted based on the measured amount
of outdoor air being brought into the unit using a PI_Loop
function. If the airflow is below the desired value, the Minimum
OA Position is increased and if the airflow is above the desired
value, Minimum OA Position is decreased.

OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER 104 www.DaikinApplied.com

 All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Operator’s Guide

Table 50: Outdoor Air Damper Minimum Position Reset Airside Economizer
Schedule
If a unit is equipped with a 0-100% modulating economizer,
Discharge Fan <= 20% Min Fan Between Min and >= 50% Max Fan and the outdoor air is suitable for free cooling, the unit attempts
Speed – Return
Fan Speed Differential Max Differential Differential to satisfy the cooling load by using outdoor air before using
Outdoor Air mechanical cooling. When the control temperature is above
Damper Minimum Demand Control Linear Ventilation Limit
Ventilation Limit Interpolation the Occupied or Unoccupied Cooling Set Point by more than
Position
half the Occupied or Unoccupied Cooling Dead Band and the
discharge air temperature is above the Discharge Cooling Set
NOTE: If the supply fan is a constant volume fan, the Point by more than half the Discharge Cooling Dead Band, the
Supply Fan Speed is assumed to be 100% when controller enters the Econo state. When the unit is in the Econo
the discharge fan is on. If the Min Fan Differential
operating state, the outdoor air dampers are modulated as
is set equal to the Max Fan Differential, the return
fan capacity override value reverts to the Ventilation required to maintain the Discharge Cooling Set Point.
Limit. This capability is not provided for exhaust fans.

Building Static Pressure Override (Airside

Economizer to Cooling Operating State
Economizer Units Only) The transition from the Econo to Cooling operating state
The minimum position determined by any method described occurs when the economizer is unable to satisfy the cooling
below may be overridden for a variable speed return fan or load and mechanical cooling is available. This will occur when
exhaust fan controlled by building static pressure when the the commanded economizer position indicates more than 95%
return fan speed is at minimum or the exhaust fan has been open and the discharge air temperature (DAT control units) or
stopped due to low building static pressure if the building control temperature (Zone control units) is above the applicable
pressure remains negative. If the user elects to use this function Cooling Setpoint by more than half the applicable Cooling
and the return fan has been at the minimum speed or the Deadband for longer than the Cooling Interstage Timer.
exhaust fan has been stopped for a minimum return/exhaust fan
off time (default = 120 seconds) a PI_Loop will begin modulating Waterside Economizer
the Min OA Pos setpoint upward to maintain the building static
If a unit is equipped with a 0-100% modulating waterside
pressure at the building static pressure setpoint.
economizer, and the conditions are suitable for free cooling,
the unit attempts to satisfy the cooling load by using waterside
100% Outside Air Damper Control, Two economizer before using mechanical cooling. When the control
Position temperature is above the Cooling Enable Set Point by more
than half the Cooling Enable Dead Band and the discharge
100% OA two position actuators are controlled by a digital air temperature is above the Discharge Cooling Set Point
output for SCU unit and by a modulating analog output for by more than half the Discharge Cooling Dead Band, the
RTU units. controller enters the Econo state. When the unit is in the Econo
• Digital Output - The OA damper is driven fully open when operating state, the economizer valve is modulated as required
the digital output is On and fully closed when the digital to maintain the Discharge Cooling Set Point.
output is OFF
Economizer FDD
• Analog Output (100% OA Units) - The OA damper is
driven to its 100% open position when the OA damper The economizer fault detection and diagnostics function
analog output is at its maximum value and it is driven provides warning alarm indication of over economizing, under
closed when the OA damper analog output is at its economizing, stuck dampers and excess outdoor air. This
minimum value function is available when a fault detection type of OA damper
is selected in the unit configuration menu. Once it is selected
The OA damper is open during the Start Initial period, and via the unit configuration menu it can be disabled/enabled via
it remains open during all operating states. The OA damper the Economizer set-up menu.
remains open after the fan is turned off until 30 seconds after
the Airflow Switch digital input indicates loss of airflow. This
keeps the outside air dampers open in case there is a failure
or external override that keeps the fan running after it is turned
OFF by controller logic. If the fan is turned ON by bypassing the
controls that have it OFF, the Damper Output is NOT turned ON.

www.DaikinApplied.com 105 OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER

 All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Operator’s Guide

OAD End Switch Calibration

The outdoor air damper end switch input requires a calibration When the CalibrateOAD parameter is set from No to Yes the
function that captures the command position at which the following sequence occurs:
switches open and close at the closed and open ends of the Step 1: The damper command is increased 1% every 2
damper modulation range. This function consists of a manually seconds until the OAD End Switch input opens.
initiated sequence that strokes the dampers fully open and
then fully closed and detects the changes of state of the Step 2: The damper command is then be decreased 1%
switch input and records the points where changes occur. every 2 seconds until the OAD End Switch input
The sequence must be initiated while the Unit State is Off and closes. At this point the current command % is
starting with the end switch input in the closed position. captured.
Step 3: The damper command is increased 1% every 2
seconds until the OAD End Switch input opens. At this

m
point the difference between the current command %
and the damper end switch closed value is captured.
Step 4: The damper command is increased and held at 100%
until the OAD End Switch input closes.

.co
Step 5: The damper command is decreased 1% every 2
seconds until the OAD End Switch input opens.
Step 6: The damper command is increased 1% every 2
seconds until the OAD End Switch input closes. At
this point the current command % is captured.
Step 7: The damper command is decreased 1% every 2
seconds until the OAD End Switch input opens. At
es
this point the difference between the damper open
end switch value and current command % value is
captured.
Step 8: The damper command is decreased and held
at 0% until the OAD End Switch input closes at
which point the values captured in Step 2, Step 3,
uid

Step 6 and Step 7 are written to the damper end

switch open (PosSwOpen%), Minimum switch
differential (MinSwDiff), damper end switch closed
(PosSwClose%) and maximum switch differential
(MaxSwDiff) parameters respectively.

CalibrateOAD= parameter is then be set back to No and

normal unit operation resumes.
-g
all

OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER 106 www.DaikinApplied.com

 All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Operator’s Guide

Bypass Valve Control

This section describes the operation of an analog output used When the Bypass Valve is open, all water that flows into the
to control a valve that allows water to bypass a waterside self-contained unit flows directly to the condenser without any
economizer and flow directly into a condenser. water going through the waterside economizer. There are two
When the bypass valve is closed, all water flows through the different methods for controlling this valve; Slave Control and
waterside economizer before it flows through the condenser. Bypass Control.

Figure 15: Bypass Control Diagram

Slave Control Water Regulating Valve Control

The bypass valve is linked electrically to the economizer valve In the Cooling state, the Water Regulating Valve stays at its last
so that the bypass valve closes as the economizer opens. commanded position when the last compressor is turned OFF.
This provides a nearly constant flow of water through the unit When all compressors are OFF and a compressor needs to be
regardless of the requirements of the economizer. When there turned ON, the Water Regulating Valve must be driven open
is no cooling required, the bypass valve will be open and the long enough to prevent the compressor from being locked
waterside economizer valve is closed allowing water to flow out due to high pressure, but not so long that it is locked out
through the condenser. This valve control option can be used due to low pressure. The WRV Start Sequence described
in either a variable or constant pumping system. below is used to make sure this is the case. This is required
Bypass Control when transitioning to the Cooling state from the Fan Only or
Economizer state.
The bypass valve and waterside economizer valve are
independently controlled. The bypass valve to the condenser In the Fan Only state, the Water Regulating Valve is normally
is closed in all states except the Fan only, Mechanical cooling, closed. The WRV Start Sequence described below is initiated
and Economizer. The bypass valve is open when mechanical in the Fan Only state whenever all of the following are true:
cooling is required and the water is not flowing through the • Cooling Status=Enabled or Off Ambient
waterside economizer. When the unit is OFF: Unoccupied, • Airside Economizer operation is disabled or not installed
both the bypass valve and the waterside economizer valve are
• Either of the following are true:
closed. No water is allowed to flow through the unit. This valve
control option is typically used in variable pumping system or a –– Both of the following are true:
constant pumping system with a bypass loop —— Control Temperature Source is something other
than None
—— Control Temperature > Occupied Cooling Setpoint
+ ½ the cooling dead band
–– Both of the following are true:
—— Control Temperature Source is set to None
—— DAT > DAT Cooling Setpoint + ½ the cooling dead
band

www.DaikinApplied.com 107 OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER

 All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Operator’s Guide

In the Economizer state, the Water Regulating Valve is Water Pump Control
normally closed. The WRV Start Sequence described below
is initiated in the Economizer state whenever either of the The Pump output is in the on position if any of the following
following is true: are true:

All of the following are true: • The Bypass Valve output is being driven above 0%
• The Water Regulating Valve output is being driven
• All of the following are true:
above 0%
–– Cooling Status=Enabled or Off Ambient
• A waterside economizer is installed and the unit is in the
–– Economizer Position is greater than 95.0% for more Economizer state
than the Cooling Stage Time AND
• The unit is the Cooling state
–– Discharge Air Temperature > DAT Cooling Setpoint +
• The Unit is in the Start Initial state and Flush Mode is set
½ the cooling dead band for more than the Cooling
to Yes
Stage Time
• The unit has a waterside economizer and a Freeze Fault
• Both of the following are true:
or Freeze Problem is active
–– Cooling enabled AND
• The unit has a waterside economizer and 10 minutes
–– Economizer Disabled have not yet passed after a Freeze Fault or Freeze
WRV Start Sequence Problem has disappeared

The following Startup Sequence is followed when a stage up

from stage zero is required and the Water Regulating Valve is
Cooling: Multistage
closed. Entering the Cooling Operating State
The Water Regulating Valve is set to an minimum The unit enters the Cooling operating state from the Fan Only
(Default = 10%) operating state when the control temperature rises above the
The Entering Water Temperature (EWT) is measured after Occupied or Unoccupied Cooling Set Point by more than half
the WRV has been at its minimum position for a default of 60 the Cooling Dead Band and the discharge air temperature is
seconds. An Initial WRV Position is then calculated based on above the discharge cooling setpoint by more than half the
the measured EWT. The Unit transitions to Cooling and the cooling Dead Band. The unit transitions from Cooling to Fan
first compressor is started when the time to initial position only when the control temperature falls below the Occupied or
has passed. The first compressor runs for an editable Initial Unoccupied Cooling Set Point by more than half the Occupied
Operation Time with the WRV at the calculated initial position. or Unoccupied Cooling Dead Band. The unit will also transition
Control then reverts to normal PI control. from the Cooling to Fan only operating state if Cooling
operation is disabled due to OA ambient lockout.
Special Procedures for Units with WRV and More
Staging -DAT Control
• When the unit enters Cooling, a compressor on either
circuit # 1 or # 2 must start first if one is enabled because In the Cooling state, compressor stages are turned on
the pressure sensors are on circuits # 1 and # 2. and off to maintain an average Discharge Air Temperature
• If both circuits # 1 and #2 are disabled due to High near the Discharge Cooling Setpoint. When the load is
Pressure or Low Pressure alarms, the lead compressor such that cooling capacity is being staged up and down
is determined by the compressor circuit that contains the between two stages, this control sequence causes the unit
compressor with the fewest run hours. to operate longer at the stage that produces the discharge
air temperature that is closer to the setpoint over time which
• If both circuit # 1 and circuit # 2 are disabled, The WRV
results in an average discharge air temperature that is very
will be controlled based on the EWT and the calculated
close to the Discharge Cooling Setpoint.
initial position.
• Control of the WRV reverts to normal PI control if either This setpoint may be fixed or reset as described in the
circuit # 1 or circuit # 2 is enabled and its compressor is Cooling DAT Reset section. External devices such as VAV
turned ON. boxes maintain the desired space conditions. The unit may
be a Constant Volume unit, but it is normally a Variable Air
• All compressors are disabled if EWT drops below the Volume unit. If the Discharge Air Temperature is approaching
minimum WRV temperature value by more than the the setpoint, the number of stages continues to increase or
Outside air cooling lockout differential. decrease until the actual temperature gets within half the
• Compressors are re-enabled if EWT rises above the deadband. Control of cooling stages is based on two values,
minimum WRV temperature value. the Degree Time Above and the Degree Time Below the
Discharge Cooling Setpoint. The difference between the actual
discharge air temperature and the Discharge Cooling Setpoint
is added to one of the Degree Time values every ten seconds.

OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER 108 www.DaikinApplied.com

 All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Operator’s Guide

If the Discharge Air Temperature exceeds Discharge Cooling If the last stage change was a stage up and the stage
Setpoint, the difference is added to the Degree Time Above decreases due to the Degree Time Below exceeding the
value. If the Discharge Air Temperature is below the Discharge Degree Time Above, the Degree Time Below is reduced by
Cooling Setpoint, the difference is added to the Degree Time an amount equal to Degree Time Above and then the Degree
Below value. These values are limited to a maximum value of Time Above is set to zero.
250 to prevent remaining too long in one stage because one If the last stage change was a stage down and the stage
value or the other became very large. increases due to the Degree Time Above exceeding the
When the unit enters the Cooling state the first compressor Degree Time Below, the Degree Time Above is reduced by an
is turned on immediately. When the unit is equipped with amount equal to Degree Time Below and then the Degree Time
evaporative condensing, the sump pump must be turned on Below is set to zero.
before any compressor is turned on. If there is a sump pump Degree Time logic is not used when dehumidification is
fail condition, cooling will stay in stage 0. active. When dehumidification is active, cooling capacity is
With DAT staging control, there are four possible staging increased if the time since the last stage change exceeds the
transitions; Stage up after stage up, stage up after stage down, cooling stage timer and the Leaving Coil Temperature (LCT)
stage down after stage down, and stage down after stage up. is greater than the Maximum Leaving Coil Setpoint. When
These are described in the following paragraphs: dehumidification is active, cooling capacity is decreased if
the time since the last stage change exceeds the cooling
Stage Up After Stage Up: stage timer amd the leaving coil temperature is less than the
If the time since the last stage change exceeds the cooling minimum leaving coil setpoint.
stage timer, the discharge air temperature is greater than the
Discharge Cooling Setpoint by more than half the deadband,
Average Discharge Control Method Illustration
the last stage change was a stage up, and dehumidification is Figure 16: Average Discharge Control Method on page 110 is
not active; cooling capacity is increased by one stage an illustration of the “Degree Time” compressor staging control
method and is meant to show a variety of staging possibilities
Stage Up After Stage Down: not normal unit operation. Figure 16 shows nine points on a
If the time since the last stage change exceeds the cooling graph of the discharge air temperature changing with time. The
stage timer, the discharge air temperature is greater than the Cooling Interstage Timer setting is 5 minutes.
Discharge Cooling Setpoint by more than half the deadband, Point 1 Assume that the controller has just staged up and
the last stage change was a stage down, the Degree Time that DTA and DTB are zero. As a result, the discharge air
Above value is greater than or equal to the Degree Time Below temperature drops and the Cooling Interstage Timer is reset.
value, and the dehumidification is not active; cooling capacity
is increased one stage. Point 2 DTA (Area A) equals DTB (Area B). The discharge air
temperature is below the Effective Discharge Cooling Set Point
Stage Down After Stage Down: by more than half the Discharge Cooling Dead Band. However,
since the Cooling Interstage Timer has not yet expired, no
If the time since the last stage change exceeds the cooling
staging action occurs.
stage timer, the discharge air temperature is less than the
Discharge Cooling Setpoint by more than half the deadband, Point 3 The Cooling Interstage Timer has expired. DTB (Area
the last stage change was a stage down, and dehumidification B + Area C) is greater than DTA (Area A) and the discharge
is not active; cooling capacity is decreased one stage. air temperature is below the Effective Discharge Cooling Set
Point by more than half the Discharge Cooling Dead Band.
Stage Down After Stage Up: Therefore, cooling is staged down. As a result, the discharge
If the time since the last stage change exceeds the cooling air temperature rises, the Cooling Interstage Timer is reset, and
stage timer, discharge air temperature is less than the DTA is subtracted from both DTA and DTB. This zeros DTA and
Discharge Cooling Setpoint by more than half the deadband, leaves DTB equal to Area C.
the last stage change was a stage up, the Degree Time Below Point 4 The Cooling Interstage Timer has expired. The
value is greater than or equal to the Degree Time Above discharge air temperature is above the Effective Discharge
value, and dehumidification is not active; cooling capacity is Cooling Set Point by more than half the Discharge Cooling
decreased one stage. Dead Band. However, since DTA (Area E) is not yet equal
The Degree Time Below and Degree Time Above values to DTB (Area C + Area D), no staging action occurs and the
change whenever a stage change occurs. If the previous stage discharge air temperature continues to rise.
change was a stage up and the number of stages increases
again, both Degree Time Above and Degree Time Below are
set to zero.

www.DaikinApplied.com 109 OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER

 All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Operator’s Guide

Point 5 The Cooling Interstage Timer has expired. The Point 7 The discharge air temperature is again above the
discharge air temperature is above the Effective Discharge Effective Discharge Cooling Set Point by more than half the
Cooling Set Point by more than half the Discharge Cooling Dead Discharge Cooling Dead Band. Since the Cooling Interstage
Band and DTA (Area E + Area F) is equal to DTB (Area C + Area Timer expired at Point 6, cooling is staged up. As a result, both
D). Therefore, cooling is staged up. As a result, the discharge DTA and DTB are zeroed and the Cooling Interstage Timer
air temperature drops, the Cooling Interstage Timer is reset, and is reset. Note that DTA and DTB are both zeroed since two
DTB is subtracted from both DTB and DTA. This zeros both DTA consecutive stage increase actions occurred. The discharge air
and DTB since they are equal. Note that the elapsed time since temperature continues to rise, however, because the cooling
the last stage change in Figure 16 is 6.3 minutes. load is still increasing. Note: that the elapsed time since the
Point 6 The Cooling Interstage Timer has expired. Because the last stage change in this illustration is 11.0 minutes.
cooling load is now increasing, the discharge air temperature Point 8 The Cooling Interstage Timer has expired. Since the
does not fall below the Effective Discharge discharge air temperature is still above the Effective Discharge
Cooling Set Point by more than half the Discharge Cooling Cooling Set Point by more than half the Discharge Cooling
Dead Band. No staging action occurs for two reasons: (1) the Dead Band, another stage-up occurs. As a result, DTA (Area
discharge air temperature is within the Discharge Cooling K) is again zeroed out (DTB remains zeroed) and the Cooling
Interstage Timer is reset. The cooling load has leveled out, and
Dead Band and (2) DTB (Area H) is not yet equal to DTA
the discharge air temperature drops.
(Area G). Even if the discharge air temperature falls below
the Effective Discharge Cooling Set Point by more than half Point 9 The Cooling Interstage Timer has expired at the
the Discharge Cooling Dead Band (as shown just after Point same time that DTB (Area M) becomes equal to DTA (Area
6), a stage down does not occur because DTB remains less L). Therefore, cooling is staged down, the Cooling Interstage
than DTA. The discharge air temperature starts rising again Timer is reset and DTA is subtracted from both DTA and DTB.
because the load is increasing. This zeros both DTA and DTB since they are equal.

Figure 16: Average Discharge Control Method

OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER 110 www.DaikinApplied.com

 All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Operator’s Guide

Staging - Zone Control Project Ahead

In the Cooling state, compressor stages are turned ON and This section describes the Projected Control Temperature
OFF to maintain the control temperature close to the Occupied used to turn on and off stages of heating and cooling for Zone
or Unoccupied Cooling Setpoint. Use of the Projected Control Control units. It is not used in DAT Control units.
Temperature reduces overshoot during cool down. See the In Zone Control cooling and heating operation, the Projected
Project Ahead section for a description of how the Project Control Temperature, reduces overshoot as the zone
Ahead Temperature is calculated. temperature approaches a setpoint after startup. It does this
When the unit enters the Cooling state or dehumidification by causing stages to stop increasing before the actual control
operation begins the unit goes directly to Cooling Stage # 1 temperature reaches the setpoint. The rate of change of the
so that the first compressor is turned on immediately. control temperature is calculated once per minute by the
During normal cooling operation the number of compressor controller and equals the change during the last sixty seconds.

m
stages increases when the time since the last stage This rate of change is multiplied by the Effective Project Ahead
change exceeds the Cooling stage timer, Projected Control Time and is added to the current control temperature. The rate
Temperature is greater than the Occupied or Unoccupied of change may be negative or positive so the Projected Control
Cooling Setpoint by more than half the deadband, the Control Temperature may be higher or lower than the actual control
Temperature is greater than the Occupied or Unoccupied temperature. This value, the Projected Control Temperature, is

.co
Cooling Setpoint by more than half the deadband, and the the temperature that would exist after the Project Ahead Time
passes if the control temperature were to continue to change
Discharge Air Temperature is greater than the minimum DAT
at the same rate for the Effective Project Ahead Time. The
cooling setpoint.
Effective Project Ahead Time is set equal to the Cooling Project
During normal cooling operation the number of compressor Ahead Time when the unit is in the Cooling state. The Effective
stages decreases when the time since the last stage change Project Ahead Time is set equal to the Heating Project Ahead
exceeds the cooling stage timer, the Projected Control Time when the unit is in the Heating state. It is set equal to
Temperature is less than the Occupied or Unoccupied zero under all other conditions causing the Projected Control
Cooling Setpoint by more than half the deadband, the Control
es
Temperature to equal the actual control temperature
Temperature is less than the Occupied or Unoccupied Cooling
setpoint by more than half the deadband.
Cooling: Modulating
During normal cooling operation the compressor stages also
decrease when the time since the last stage change exceeds Modulating Cooling Control: Chilled Water
the cooling stage timer, and the discharge air temperature is When the unit’s cooling type is set to chilled water and is in the
uid

less than the minimum DAT Cooling setpoint. Cooling operating state, or in the dehumidification operating
When Dehumidification is active, compressor stages are state the chilled water valve is modulated to maintain the
controlled to maintain the leaving coil temperature between the discharge air temperature at the Discharge Cooling Set Point
minimum leaving coil setpoint and the maximum leaving coil (or leaving coil temperature at the Minimum Leaving Coil
DAT setpoint. Setpoint if dehumidification is active).
During dehumidification on operation, the number of Modulating Cooling Control: Face & Bypass
compressor stages increases if the time since the last stage
change exceeds the cooling stage timer and the leaving When the unit’s cooling type is set to Face & Bypass and
-g

coil temperature is greater than the Maximum Leaving Coil is in the Cooling operating state, or in the dehumidification
Setpoint. During dehumidification operation, the number of operating state, the chilled water valve is driven fully open
compressor stages decreases if the time since the last stage and the face and bypass dampers are modulated to maintain
change ecxeeds the cooling stage timer and the leaving coil the discharge air temperature at the Discharge Cooling Set
temperature is less than the Minimum Leavaing Coil Setpoint. Point (or leaving coil temperature at the Minimum Leaving Coil
all

Setpoint if dehumidification is active).

www.DaikinApplied.com 111 OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER

 All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Operator’s Guide

Discharge Air Temperature Setpoint Reset - Cooling

The Cooling DAT Setpoint may be reset for units with DAT When Airflow is selected, the values “Min Clg Spt @” and
Cooling Control. The reset type may be set to one of the “Max Clg Spt @” are entered as percentage values. When
following: Ext mA is selected, the values “Min Clg Spt @” and “Max Clg
• None: Discharge Cooling Spt is user adjustable Spt @” are entered as mA values. When Ext VDC is selected,
the values “Min Clg Spt @” and “Max Clg Spt @” are entered
• Network: Discharge Cooling Spt is equal to the Network as VDC values.
DAT Clg Setpoint when it is valid
If Ext mA or Ext V is selected as the type of reset, the Min Clg
• Space: Discharge Cooling Spt is based on the Space
Spt @ value may be set above the Max Clg Spt @ value to
Sensor
cause a decrease in the DAT setpoint as the external signal or
• Return: Discharge Cooling Spt is based on the Return Air the Min Clg Spt @ value may be set below the Max Clg Spt @
Sensor value to cause an increase in the DAT setpoint as the external
• OAT: Discharge Cooling Spt is based on the Outdoor Air signal increase.
Temperature
The Min Clg Spt @ value can be set below the Max Clg Spt
• Ext mA: Discharge Cooling Spt is determined by a 0-20 @ value for all types of reset, but it only makes sense for
mA signal external reset.
• Ext V: Discharge Cooling Spt is determined by a 0-10
When ever the Clg Reset Type or Engineering Units is
VDC signal
changed, the Min Clg Spt @ and Max Clg Spt @ values revert
• Airflow: Discharge Cooling Spt is based on the airflow as to default values as follows:
indicated by the variable frequency drive speed
• None: Min Clg Spt @=0NA, Max Clg Spt @=100NA
Reset reverts from Return to None when a Return Air Sensor • Network: Min Clg Spt @=0NA, Max Clg Spt @=100NA
opens or shorts. Reset reverts from Space to None when a
• Space, Return: Min Clg Spt @=73.0F, Max Clg Spt
Space Sensor opens or shorts. Reset reverts from OAT to
@=71.0F
None when an Outdoor Air Sensor opens or shorts.
• OAT: Min Clg Spt @=90.0F, Max Clg Spt @=70.0F
When Space, Return, OAT, Airflow, Ext mA, or Ext V is
• ExtmA: Min Clg Spt @=4.0mA, Max Clg Spt @=20.0mA
selected, the Discharge Cooling Spt equals the Max Clg Spt
when the selected value equals the Max Clg Spt @ value. • ExtVDC: Min Clg Spt @=0.0V, Max Clg Spt @=10.0V
Similarly, the Discharge Cooling Spt equals the Min Clg Spt • Airflow: Min Clg Spt @=33%, Max Clg Spt @=100%
when the selected value equals the Min Clg Spt @ value.
When Space, Return, OAT, or Airflow is selected, the reset
schedule should be set so that the DAT Cooling setpoint
decreases as the selected temperature increases as shown in
the graph.

Figure 17: Cooling Setpoint

OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER 112 www.DaikinApplied.com

 All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Operator’s Guide

Compressor Control for RoofPak

VFD Compressor Operation
When an RTU is equipped with the VFD compressor option between 25rps (0VDC) and 100rps (10VDC). The minimum
there are two compressor circuits, one VFD controlled and maximum rps (VDC) values actually used vary depending
compressor in circuit #2 with up to 3 fixed speed compressors on unit size, whether or not a fixed speed compressor is
in circuit #1 depending on unit model. Circuit #2 (containing running and whether or not a special oil return boost mode of
the VFD compressor) is always the “lead” circuit. The VFD operation is active. The following table shows the relationship
compressor is controlled via a 0-10VDC analog output signal between the minimums and maximums and unit size.
from the MT III controller that varies the VFD frequency

Table 51: VFD Compressor Size Range

VFD Modulation Range
VFD Max rps
RPS/RDT Unit VFD and Fixed Comp(s) On VFD Comp Only LoOilBoostrps/ HiOilBoostrps/
Model VFDMinrps/ VFDMaxrps/ LoOilBoostV HiOilBoostV
VFDMinV 1 Fixed On 2 Fixed On 3 Fixed On
VFDMaxV
VFD1Maxrps/ VFD2Maxrps/ VFD3Maxrps/
VFD1MaxV VFD2MaxV VFD3MaxV

016 25 rps 55 rps NA 100 rps 70 rps 100 rps

0 Vdc 4.0 V 10.0 V 6.0 V 10.0 V

021 25 rps 70 rps NA NA 100 rps 70 rps 100 rps

0 Vdc 6.0 V 10.0 V 6.0 V 10.0 V
25 rps 85 rps 100 rps 70 rps 100 rps
026 0 Vdc 8.0 V NA NA 10.0 V 6.0 V 10.0 V
25 rps 70 rps 100 rps 70 rps 100 rps
031 0 Vdc 6.0 V NA NA 10.0 V 6.0 V 10.0 V

042 25 rps 100 rps 95 rps NA 100 rps 70 rps 100 rps
0 Vdc 10.0 V 9.33 V 10.0 V 6.0 V 10.0 V

045 25 rps 75 rps 75 rps NA 75 rps 70 rps 75 rps

0 Vdc 6.7 V 6.7 V 6.7 V 6.0 V 6.7 V

051 25 rps 85 rps 85 rps NA 85 rps 70 rps 85 rps

0 Vdc 8.0 V 8.0 V 8.0 V 6.0 V 8.0 V
25 rps 95 rps 95 rps 95 rps 70 rps 95 rps
063 0 Vdc 9.33 V 9.33 V NA 9.33 V 6.0 V 9.33 V
25 rps 70 rps 50 rps 100 rps 75 rps 70 rps 100 rps
074 0 Vdc 6.0 V 3.3 V 10.0 V 6.7 V 6.0 V 10.0 V

The basic compressor control sequence is to first start the VFD VFD Compressor Start Sequence
compressor and modulate it with a PI control loop to maintain On a call for VFD compressor operation the VFD Enable
discharge temperature. When the VFD compressor is at its output (MCB DO3) is energized (on) and the 0-10VDC analog
maximum speed and more capacity is required, the available control signal is set to 3.33VDC (50rps) for 10 seconds. During
fixed compressor with the fewest run hour total is started (any this 10 second initial period the VFD compressor’s internal
fixed compressors on the VFD circuit are started first) while logic ramps the compressor to 50rps (this aids in starting oil
the VFD compressor is reduced to minimum speed. When the circulation). After 10 seconds the VFD compressor control
VFD compressor is at its minimum speed and less capacity is signal begins modulating based on a PI loop to maintain the
required the fixed compressor with the highest run hour total cooling discharge setpoint.
is stopped (any fixed compressors on the circuit opposite the
VFD circuit are stopped first) while the VFD compressor is NOTE: In addition to enabling VFD compressor operation
the VFD Enable output is used to energize a liquid
increased to maximum speed.
line drop solenoid on the VFD circuit and to turn on
auxiliary ventilation fans in the VFD compressor
enclosure.

Compressor Stage Up Transition

When the VFD compressor has been operating at maximum
capacity for the cooling stage time period (default 5 Minutes)
and more capacity is required, the fixed compressor with the
fewest run hours is started (any fixed speed compressors on
the same circuit as the VFD compressor is started first). The
VFD compressor is held at is minimum value for 30 seconds.

www.DaikinApplied.com 113 OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER

 All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Operator’s Guide

Compressor Stage Down Transition Oil Boost Sequence

When the VFD compressor has been operating at minimum The VFD compressor is equipped with an oil level sensor.
capacity for the cooling stage time period and less capacity is If low oil level is detected the compressor speed must be
needed, the fixed compressor with the highest run hour total is increased for a time period to force oil in the system to
turned off (fixed speed compressors on the circuit opposite the be returned to the compressor. The low oil condition is
VFD compressor are stopped first). The VFD compressor is communicated to the MicroTech III controller via a digital input
held at its maximum value for 30 seconds (EMC-X3) signal from the VFD compressor.
When the VFD compressor is ON and low oil level is detected
Dehumidification Transition During Cooling State (digital input EMC-X3 is open) for 10 consecutive minutes
When dehumidification becomes active while the unit is in (default) or if oil boost is manually initiated (VFD compressor
the Cooling operating state the VFD compressor is set to must be running for manual initiation of oil boost) the oil boost
its maximum value and held there for 1 minute. In addition sequence is activated. The oil boost sequence is as follows:
if the VFD compressor was operating above 75% when • Upon entering into the oil boost operation the MTIII
dehumidification became active, a fixed compressor with the controller logic captures the current VFD compressor
fewest run hours is turned ON. capacity and fixed speed compressor status.
• If one or more fixed speed compressors are operating
VFD Compressor Enable/Disable the fixed compressor with the highest run hour total is
If the VFD compressor becomes unavailable normal staging staged OFF.
operation (based on run hours) occurs with the available fixed • If the oil boost sequence is activated while the
compressors. compressor capacity is less than 60 rps (46.7%) the
VFD compressor capacity is increased to 60 rps (46.7%)
VFD Emergency Stop Output and runs at that capacity for an Oil Boost Timing period
In normal operation the VFD Emergency Stop Output (EMC (default 15 minutes).
DO4) will be energized (ON). When any cooling related • If the low oil input (EMC-X3) still open after the Oil
alarm that shuts off the VFD compressor is active the VFD Boost Timing period expires, the compressor capacity is
Emergency Stop Output will be de-energized (OFF) increased to the High Oil Boost value.
• If the oil boost sequence is activated when the
compressor capacity is equal to or greater than 60 rps
(46.7%) the compressor capacity is increased to the High
Oil Boost value.
• If the VFD compressor has been operating at the High
Oil Boost value for the Oil Boost Timing period and the
low oil input (EMC-X3) is still open the VFD compressor
is stopped and a Low Oil problem alarm is generated.
The alarm is also generated if the oil boost sequence
becomes active 5 times in a 24 hour operating period.
• Once active the oil boost sequence remains active until the
low oil input (EMC-X3) closes continuously for 3 minutes,
until boost mode is manually stopped via the HMI, the Low
Oil: Problem alarm is generated or the compressors are all
stopped due to normal temperature control.
• When the oil boost sequence becomes active an event
is entered in the Event Log, an event is also entered
when the oil boost sequence becomes inactive and VFD
compressor operation returns to normal.
• Once the low oil input (EMC-X3) closes continuously for
3 minutes, compressor capacity reverts to the condition
captured when the oil boost mode became active.
NOTE: This only applies when the current oil boost cycle
returns to inactive in the “normal” manner. It does
not apply for example if the oil boost cycle returns
to inactive due to the Low Oil: Problem alarm being
generated.

The High Oil Boost Value varies with unit size.

OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER 114 www.DaikinApplied.com

 All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Operator’s Guide

VFD Compressor Protection Unloading Control High Discharge Superheat Unloading Control
There are several unloading control functions that limit the Normal compressor control is limited when high superheat
speed of the VFD compressor to protect it from damage conditions occur. If the VFD compressor is operating and the
under abnormal operating conditions. The following functions discharge superheat is greater than 75°F continuously for 15
are provided: minutes a High Discharge Superheat Unloading Control Event
• High Pressure Unloading Control is generated and the VFD compressor speed is decreased.
The VFD compressor speed is decreased every 10 minutes
• High Discharge Line Temperature Unloading Control as long as the discharge superheat remains greater than
• Low Discharge Superheat Unloading Control 75°F until the minimum allowed VFD compressor speed
• High Discharge Superheat Unloading Control (based on unit size) is reached. If the discharge superheat
• Condenser Coil Splitter Coil Unloading Control remains above 75°F the VFD compressor is shut OFF and a
High Superheat alarm is generated.
• VFD Compressor Emergency Stop Control

High Pressure Unloading Control VFD Compressor Emergency Stop Control

Normal VFD compressor control is limited when a high discharge If the VFD compressor is enabled (MCB-D03 is closed) and
pressure conditions occur on the VFD compressor circuit. If the commanded to run for 30 seconds but the controller fails to
VFD compressor is operating and the discharge pressure (PTD) is receive the VFD run verification input (EMC-X4 is open) the
greater than 525 PSI, a High Pressure Unloading Control Event is VFD compressor enable output (MCB-D03) is cycled OFF for 5
generated and the VFD compressor is slowed every 10 seconds seconds ( a VFD Compressor Emergency Stop Control Event
until either the discharge pressure falls to less than 525 PSI or is logged)and then back ON. The VFD compressor is then
remains higher than 575 PSI for 10 minutes. If the discharge ramped to 45%. If this occurs 3 times in a 30 minute period
pressure is above 575 PSI for 10 minutes the VFD compressor is the VFD compressor is shut off and a VFD Compressor Fault
shut off and a High Pressure Problem alarm is generated. If the alarm is generated.
OAT is below 45F at the time the VFD compressor is shut OFF
immediately and a High Pressure Problem alarm is generated Condenser Coil Splitter Solenoid Valve Control
anytime the discharge pressure rises above 575 PSI. The alarm Condenser coil splitting is required on both circuits of a
must be manually cleared. VFD compressor unit to maintain head pressure during low
ambient/low modulating operation. This is accomplished with
High Discharge Line Temperature Unloading Control a solenoid valve on each circuit controlled by a normally open
Normal compressor control is limited when a high discharge digital output (EMC DO1, EMC-DO2) from the MicroTech III
line temperature conditions occur. If the VFD compressor is controller. The coil splitter solenoid valve is controlled based
operating and the discharge Line temperature is greater than on the average discharge line pressure equivalent saturation
250°F for 15 seconds a High Discharge Line Temperature temperature (Tc) determined from the corresponding discharge
Event is generated and the VFD compressor capacity is pressure (PTD) monitored via an analog input to the MicroTech
reduced every 15 seconds until the discharge Line temperature III controller as follows:
falls below 220°F. If the discharge Line temperature is above • The average Tc is determined using a sliding average of
250°F continuously for 3 minutes the VFD compressor is the previous 150 actual Tc values
stopped and a High Discharge Line Temperature problem • The splitter valve on a circuit is closed (energized) when
alarm is generated. The alarm must be manually cleared. that circuit is operating and the circuit’s average Tc
remains below 83.0°F continuously for 60 seconds and
Low Discharge Superheat Unloading Control the OAT is less than or equal to 80.0°F.
Normal compressor control is limited when low superheat • Once closed the solenoid valve is re-opened when
conditions occur. If the VFD compressor is operating and the average Tc rises above 105.0°F continuously for
the discharge superheat is less than 20F continuously for 15 60 seconds, the OAT rises above 80°F or when all the
minutes a Low Discharge Superheat Unloading Control Event compressors on the circuit are OFF.
is generated and the VFD compressor speed is increased. • When the splitter coil output on the VFD compressor
The VFD compressor speed is increased every 10 minutes as circuit is closed (EMC-DO2 is energized) normal VFD
long as the discharge superheat remains less than 20°F until compressor control is limited. In this mode of operation
the maximum allowed VFD compressor speed (based on unit the VFD Compressor Control PI Loop remains active but
size) is reached. If the discharge superheat remains below the VFD Compressor minimum allowed speed value is
20°F the VFD compressor is shut OFF and a Low Superheat increased and Low Pressure Unloading Event is logged.
alarm is generated.

www.DaikinApplied.com 115 OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER

 All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Operator’s Guide

Network Load Shed Control Heating Operation

For Zone Control or Single Zone VAV units a network variable When DemandShed= is set to Enabled and the Network
is provided to allow for overriding the current occupied cooling variable parameter is set to Active the current Occupied
and occupied heating setpoints by an adjustable increment. Heating Setpoint value will be decreased by the heating shed
The parameters for this function are located in the Heat/Cool increase value at an adjustable rate set by the heating shed
Changeover Set-up menu. rate value. When load shedding becomes active in this manner
an Auto Load Shed Event will be logged in the Event Log.
Cooling Operation When either the DemandShed= is set to Disabled or the
When DemandShed = is set to Enabled and the Network Network variable parameter is set to Inactive the Occupied
variable parameter is set to Active, the current Occupied Heating Setpoint will revert to the value it had prior to the
Cooling Setpoint value will be increased by the amount of the Network variable parameter being set to Active. When load

m
cooling shed increase value at an adjustable rate set by the shedding becomes inactive the Occupied Heating Setpoint
cooling shed rate value. When load shedding becomes active will return to the original value at an adjustable rate set by
in this manner an Auto Load Shed Event will be logged in the the heating shed rate value. When load shedding becomes
Event Log. inactive in this manner a return to normal Auto Load Shed
Event will be logged in the Event Log.
When either the DemandShed= is set to Disabled or the

.co
Network variable parameter is set to Inactive the Occupied
Cooling Setpoint will revert to the value it had prior to the
Network variable parameter being set to Active at an adjustable
rate set by the cooling shed rate value. When load shedding
becomes inactive in this manner a return to normal Auto Load
Shed Event will be logged in the Event Log.
es
uid
-g
all

OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER 116 www.DaikinApplied.com

 All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Operator’s Guide

Compressor Control for Maverick II

VFD Compressor Operation
When a MPS is equipped with the VFD compressor option VFD compressor modulation is additionally monitored and
there are two refrigeration circuits, one VFD controlled adjusted in order to maintain operation within the approved
compressor with up to 3 fixed speed compressors depending compressor operating envelope.
on unit model. The VFD compressor must always be the “lead” If the VFD compressor were to become inoperative, any other
circuit or first one on and last one off. compressors on the VFD circuit will be disabled. The unit can
VFD compressor modulation is controlled by an analog signal continue to operate on the remaining fixed speed compressors
(0 – 10 Vdc) from the unit controller. Refer to Figure 101. The of the non-VFD circuit until the unit can be serviced.
minimum VFD compressor speed is 25 rps (1500 rpm) and the When the VFD compressor is at its maximum speed and
maximum VFD compressor speed is 100 rps (6000 rpm), but more capacity is required, a fixed speed compressor is started
the minimum and maximum limits per unit may vary depending while the VFD compressor is reduced to minimum speed at
on operating conditions and unit model size. which point it resumes modulating to maintain the discharge
The VFD compressor is a 4 pole motor design that operates off temperature. When the VFD compressor is at its minimum
a frequency signal from the VFD between 50Hz and 200Hz. speed and less capacity is required, a fixed speed compressor
At Start-up the VFD compressor will automatically ramp up to is turned off while the VFD compressor is increased to
maximum speed at which point it resumes modulating to
50 rps for first 10 seconds for lubrication requirements.
maintain discharge temperature.
Crankcase heating for VFD Compressor model VZH-088 is
performed by the VFD via DC-holding current through the
motor windings.
Figure 18: VFD Compressor Modulation Signal

Table 52: VFD Compressor Modulation Ranges

VFD Modulation Range
VFD Max rps

MPS Unit Model VFD and Fixed Comp(s) On OilBoostrps/

VFD Min rps/ VFD Comp Only OilBoostV*
VFD Min V 1 Fixed On 2 Fixed On 3 Fixed On VFDMax rps/
VFD1Max rps/ VFD2Max rps/ VFD3Max rps/ VFDMaxV
VFD1MaxV VFD2MaxV VFD3MaxV
026 39 rps / 0 Vdc 60 rps / 4.0 V 55 rps / 4.0 V NA 70 rps / 6.0 V 70 rps / 4.0 V
030 39 rps / 0 Vdc 100 rps / 8.7 V 80 rps / 7.3 V NA 100 rps / 10.0 V 100 rps / 7.3 V
035 39 rps / 0 Vdc 100 rps / 8.7 V 80 rps / 7.3 V NA 100 rps / 10.0 V 100 rps / 7.3 V
040 39 rps / 0 Vdc 85 rps / 8.0 V 85 rps / 8.0 V 80 rps/ 7.3 V 100 rps / 10.0 V 100 rps / 7.3 V
050 39 rps / 0 Vdc 85 rps / 8.0 V 85 rps / 8.0 V 80 rps/ 7.3 V 100 rps / 10.0 V 100 rps / 7.3 V
* High and Low Oil Boost are explained on page 136

www.DaikinApplied.com 117 OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER

 All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Operator’s Guide

VFD Compressor Control Dehumidification Transition During Cooling State

Control of the VFD compressor is accomplished with a digital When dehumidification operation becomes active while the
output enable signal and a 0-10VDC analog modulating unit is in the Cooling operating state, The VFD compressor
control signal. is ramped to its maximum capacity. If the VFD capacity at
this point is already above 75% of its full modulation a fixed
General VFD Compressor Start Sequence compressor is also turned on. The compressors are held at this
On a call for VFD compressor operation the VFD enable capacity for 1 minute before normal modulation resumes, to
output is energized (on) and the 0-10VDC analog control maintain leaving coil temperature (LCT).
signal is set to 3.33VDC (50 rps) for 10 seconds. During this • VFD compressor will load up completely before starting
10 second initial period the VFD compressor’s internal logic any fixed speed compressors to achieve LCT of 45F
ramps the compressor to 50 rps to insure compressor startup oil (default) with the VFD compressor option. LCT may be
lubrication. After 10 seconds the VFD compressor control signal set between 45F to 52F.
begins modulation to maintain the cooling discharge set point.
• If reheat signal is at 100% for 10 minutes and the unit is
NOTE: In addition to enabling VFD compressor operation unable to raise the DAT to desired point, the controller
the VFD enable output is used to energize the liquid will stage off 1 fixed compressor and modulate the VFD
line drop solenoid on the VFD circuit. (Only for Low compressor speed to achieve the DAT set point.
Ambient Option)
Oil Balance/Boost Operational Sequence
Compressor Stage Up Transition
When a low oil level is indicated in the VFD compressor sump,
When the VFD compressor has been operating at maximum the unit switches to either an oil balance or oil boost state. The
capacity for the cooling stage time period and there is a call VFD compressor speed is increased during these modes to
for more cooling capacity the following transition sequence is promote the return of refrigerant oil to the VFD compressor.
followed when staging up.
To avoid short cycling of the oil balance/boost sequence, no
During each fixed compressor stage UP sequence, the VFD action is taken until a low oil indication has been present for 5
compressor speed is reduced to its minimum, as a fixed speed consecutive run minutes.
compressor is turned on. Note that the VFD compressor
speed range is extended for these staging points to assure The unit determines whether to enter the oil balance or oil
smooth transition and to minimize capacity gaps. Typically, the boost mode based on the running conditions when a low oil
VFD compressor is overdriven (higher speed than normal full indication is experienced. The balance mode is only used when
load rating speed) before staging up a fixed compressor. The a VFD compressor is part of a tandem compressor set. The
VFD is held at minimum speed for 30 seconds before normal balance mode is usually entered first, and is utilized to move
modulation resumes. oil from the fixed speed compressor to the VFD compressor. If
this mode fails to resolve the low oil indication issue, the unit
Compressor Stage Down Transition will then go into the boost mode. The boost mode is utilized
When the VFD compressor has been operating at minimum to return oil from the refrigerant system to the compressors.
capacity for the cooling stage time period and there is a call VFD compressors that are not part of a tandem compressor
for less capacity the following transition sequence is followed arrangement will skip the balance mode and only utilize the
when staging down. boost mode.

During each fixed speed compressor stage DOWN sequence, The balance mode will be entered if the VFD compressor is
the VFD compressor speed is increased to maximum speed part of a tandem compressor arrangement and the fixed speed
(which varies with unit size and number of operating fixed compressor is running, and there is a low oil indication. Upon
compressors) as a fixed speed compressor is turned off. Note entering the oil balance mode the fixed speed compressor is
that the VFD compressor speed range has been extended turned off and the VFD compressor speed is increased to the
for these staging points to assure smooth transition and to oil boost value shown in Table 20. The VFD compressor runs
minimize capacity gaps. Typically, the VFD compressor will be at this condition until the optical oil sensor verifies that oil is
overdriven (higher speed than normal full load rating speed) present for 3 continuous minutes. Unit Controller default is set
when staging down a fixed compressor. for a 10 minute max balance.

OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER 118 www.DaikinApplied.com

 All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Operator’s Guide

If the oil balance mode fails to resolve the low oil condition, VFD Compressor Protection Unloading Control
or the fixed speed compressor was not running when the low
There are several modulating control functions that adjust the
oil indication occurred, or the VFD compressor was not part
speed control range of the VFD compressor to protect it from
of a tandemized compressor set, when the low oil indication
damage under abnormal operating conditions. The following
occurred, the unit will enter boost mode
functions are provided by the unit controller
Upon entering oil boost mode, the VFD compressor speed is
• High Pressure Unloading Control
increased to the oil boost value shown in Table 20. If the VFD
compressor is part of a tandem arrangement, the fixed speed • High Discharge Line Temperature Unloading Control
compressor is started as well. The VFD compressor runs • High/Low Discharge Superheat Control
at this condition until the optical oil sensor verifies that oil is • Condenser Coil Splitter Valve Control (For Low Ambient
present for 3 continuous minutes. Unit Controller default is set Option)
for a 10 minute max boost.
High Pressure Unloading Control
During the oil balance/boost sequence the DAT temperature is
overridden to allow the VFD compressor to continue operating The VFD compressor has an upper operating sat discharge
until oil balance/boost sequence termination. pressure limit of 575 PSIG. If the discharge pressure exceeds
575 PSIG, the compressor speed is reduced 1 rps every 10
If one or more fixed speed compressors on the non VFD seconds until the discharge pressure is at or below 575 psig.
compressor circuit is operating, and the fixed speed
compressor on the VFD compressor circuit was not already If the discharge pressure does not drop below 575 PSIG with
running when entering the oil boost mode, one fixed speed the VFD compressor operating at minimum speed (30 rps), the
compressor on the non VFD compressor circuit will be turned compressor is locked out on alarm.
off to minimize the disturbance to the DAT. In addition, when the VFD compressor is operating above a
Oil balance/boost sequences and durations are logged in the sat discharge pressure of 525 PSIG, the VFD compressor
unit controller. maximum speed is limited to 90 rps and the minimum speed is
limited to 30 rps.
If low oil indication does not clear, the VFD compressor will be
shut down and oil level will be monitored for an additional 15 A high side pressure transducer is standard on the VFD circuit
minutes. If low oil indication still does not clear within these 15 allowing the discharge pressure of the refrigerant circuit to be
minutes, the VFD compressor will be locked out on alarm. viewed at the unit controller display.

The low oil problem is also generated and the VFD compressor If the unit controller needs to reduce the compressor speed in
circuit is disabled if the oil boost sequence is initiated more order to limit discharge pressure, the action is recorded in unit
than 4 times in a 24 hour period. If the oil balance/boost controller event log section.
sequence successfully restores the VFD compressor oil level
the fixed compressor stage is returned to its pre-oil balance/
boost condition and normal compressor sequencing and
modulation resumes

www.DaikinApplied.com 119 OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER

 All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Operator’s Guide

High Discharge Line Temperature Unloading Control High Superheat

A compressor discharge temperature sensor (Thermistor) is If the VFD compressor discharge superheat rises to 75F for 10
installed on the VFD compressor as standard. The temperature consecutive minutes, the VFD compressor speed is reduced
is used to measure discharge temperature and superheat by 10 rps increments down to a 40 rps operating speed.
levels at the VFD compressor discharge. Superheat is monitored at each speed for 10 minutes and if
If the compressor discharge temp reaches 250F, the VFD superheat remains above 75F, the VFD compressor speed is
compressor speed is reduced by 10 rps and monitored for decreased an additional 10 rps. When compressor discharge
3 additional minutes. The unit controller will continue to superheat level is at 75F or below, the compressor speed is no
reduce VFD compressor speed by 10-rps increments until longer decreased. If speed correction resolves problem,
the discharge temp drops below 250F. If the VFD compressor the unit controller will have logged that a speed correction was
discharge temp reaches 250F a warning will be logged in the needed for superheat in the event log. If decreasing speed
controller. If reduced compressor speed does not resolve the does not correct issue, the VFD compressor is locked out and
issue, the VFD compressor is shut down and allowed to cool an alarm is logged in the unit controller.
for 30 minutes. The VFD compressor is then re-started and if
the discharge temperature cannot be held under 250F, the VFD Manual Control (with VFD Compressor)
compressor is locked out. The root cause may be connected For service and troubleshooting the unit controller has capability
to a number of issues (low charge, blocked condenser coil, to allow the VFD compressor to be operated manually. Refer to
condenser fan failure, malfunctioning TEV, etc.) and service is the controller OM-920 for more detail.
needed.
The basic manual operations include the following:
The VFD compressor discharge Temp has an upper limit of
275F. The VFD compressor will be shut down if discharge temp • Start or Stop the VFD compressor
reaches 275F. • Modulate VFD compressor from 0 – 100% speed
• Ability to energize condenser coil splitter solenoids (Only
NOTE: The fixed speed compressor circuit does not contain for low ambient option)
this feature.
• Ability to initiate or terminate oil boost sequence
Low/High Discharge Superheat
If an electrical issue with the VFD compressor is suspected,
With the high side pressure transducer and discharge the winding resistance can be checked at the motor terminals.
thermistor, the unit controller is capable of monitoring the
variable speed compressor discharge superheat. This feature
Table 53: VFD Compressor Winding Resistance
protects the VFD compressor against flood back, undercharged
conditions, overcharged conditions, malfunctioning TEV, Compressor Model Voltage
Winding Resistance
(Ohms)
etc. Typical compressor superheat range is 20F to 75F. The
VZH-088B-X 208-230V 0.03
discharge temperature of the VFD compressor can be viewed
VZH-088B-X 460V 0.10
at the unit controller display.
VZH-088B-X 575V 0.10
Low Superheat
If the compressor discharge superheat falls below 20F for
15 consecutive run minutes, the VFD compressor speed is
increased by 5 rps increments up to a 60 rps operating speed.
Superheat is monitored at each speed for 10 minutes and if
superheat remains below 20F, the VFD compressor speed is
increased an additional 5 rps. When compressor discharge
superheat level is at 20F or above, the compressor speed is no
longer increased. If speed correction resolves problem, the unit
controller will have logged that a speed correction was needed
for superheat in the event log. If increasing speed does not
correct issue, the VFD compressor is locked out and an alarm
is logged in the unit controller.

OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER 120 www.DaikinApplied.com

 All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Operator’s Guide

Condenser Coil Splitter Solenoid Valve Control (MPS 040 VFD Compressor Emergency Stop Control
and 050 Only)
If the VFD compressor enable output signal has been ON for
Condenser coil splitting is avaialble only on VFD compressor 30 seconds and the controller fails to receive the VFD run
circuit of a unit with low ambinet option. This feature assists in verification input, VFD Compressor Emergency Stop Control is
maintaining head pressure during low ambient/low modulating activated. When this function is active, VFD compressor enable
operation. A solenoid valve on each circuit is controlled by a output will be turned OFF for 5 seconds and then turned
digital output from the MicroTech III controller. ON and ramp VFD compressor speed to 60Hz. If controller
The coil splitter solenoid valve is controlled based on the receives a VFD run verification input, a log event is set on VFD
average discharge line pressure equivalent saturation Emergency Stop Control. If controller fails to receive the VFD
temperature determined from the corresponding discharge run verification input after 3 attempts in 30 minutes, the VFD
pressure transducer monitored via an analog input to the compressor is locked out and the problem is logged.
MicroTech III controller.

m
Once active the VFD Compressor Emergency Stop Control
The splitter solenoid valve on each circuit is normally open function remains active until one of the conditions are met.
(digital output de-energized). The splitter valve on a circuit is • VFD compressor enable output signal has been ON for
closed (energized) when that circuit’s saturation temperature 30 seconds and VFD compressor status Input is ON
remains below 83.0°F (250 psig) continuously for 60 seconds • VFD compressor is OFF

.co
and the OAT is less than or equal to 80.0°F. The solenoid valve
If the controller fails to receive the VFD run verification input
is re-opened when the saturation temperature rises above
after the VFD compressor enable output signal has been ON
105.0°F (350 psig) continuously for 60 seconds and the OAT
for 30 seconds, the circuit is shut OFF on VFD Compressor
rises above 80°F or when all the compressors on the circuit are
Emergency Stop Control alarm.
OFF.
Whenever this protection function becomes active a VFD
If the average saturated discharge temp falls below 250 PSIG
Compressor Emergency Stop Control event is recorded in the
(83F) for 60 seconds and condenser coil splitter solenoid coil
Event Log with date and time stamp. Whenever this protection
is energized (closed), the VFD compressor modulation rate is
es
function returns to normal a VFD Compressor Emergency Stop
increased until an average saturated discharge temp of 250
Control return to normal event is recorded in the Event Log
PSIG (83F) is achieved. This operation will raise the lower
with date and time stamp.
modulation limit of the VFD compressor, but is needed to
keep the VFD compressor inside its operating envelope and
maintain head pressure for TEV control.
When the condenser coil splitter is energized (closed) and the
uid

VFD compressor discharge pressure is below 250 PSIG, the

VFD compressor speed is increased by 5rps increments every
30 seconds until the discharge pressure exceeds 250 PSIG.
When the VFD compressor reaches 250 PSIG, this speed
becomes the new minimum speed of the VFD compressor. As
the discharge pressure rises above 250 PSIG, the minimum
allowable compressor speed is decreased in 5 rps increments
every 30 seconds.
-g

If the condenser coil splitter valve is closed and the VFD

compressor discharge remains below 250 PSIG for 15
minutes the circuit is locked out and an alarm is logged in the
unit controller.
all

If a speed correction was performed to increase the

compressor discharge pressure, there will be a record of the
action in the unit controller under the event log.

www.DaikinApplied.com 121 OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER

 All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Operator’s Guide

Condenser Fan Operation for Variable Speed Compressor Low Ambient Option
(MPS 040 and 050 Only)
Daikin’s head pressure control operates by modulating the Figure 19: R-410A Speedtrol
motor speed of one condenser fan on the VFD compressor
refrigeration circuit in response to the condenser pressure.
VFD compressor refrigerant circuit contains a solenoid valve
that blocks refrigerant flow to half of the condenser coil, which
effectively removes 50% of the condenser surface from the
circuit for low load/low ambient conditions.
This option allows for mechanical cooling operation down to 0F
(-18C). The VFD option senses refrigerant head pressure and
varies the fan speed accordingly. When the pressure rises, the
SpeedTrol increases the speed of the fan, when the pressure
falls. SpeedTrol decreases the speed of the fan.
The VFD throttling range is 250 to 400 psig, fixed, with a
corresponding fan speed range of 10Hz to 60Hz. The fan
motor is a three-phase motor, identical to the unit voltage
(208V to 575V) and is controlled by a variable frequency Figure 20: Speedtrol Operating Characteristics (for
drive. The variable frequency drive receives a signal from a Variable Speed Inverter Compressor Units)
pressure transducer and varies the speed of the condenser fan
accordingly.
The SpeedTrol arrangement for VFD compressors is also
employing “Start-Stop control by Speed reference Level” in
which the VFD will stop the condenser fan motor under certain
conditions. If the head pressure were to fall below 250 PSIG
with the condenser fan operating at minimum speed of 10Hz
(possibly due to a low ambient or high wind condition) the
VFD will shut down the condenser fan. The VFD will restart
the condenser fan at 20 Hz if head pressure rises to a level
above 250 PSIG. In addition to modulating fan speed, a
refrigerant solenoid valve is included in circuit #1. Operation of
the solenoid valve is based on head pressure. If the average
condensing pressure falls below 250 PSIG (83F sat) for 60
seconds, the condenser solenoid valve closes, effectively
removing 50% of the condensing surface. If the averaging
condensing pressure rises above 350 PSIG (105F sat) for 60 Figure 21: Speedtrol Operating Characteristics (for
seconds, the condenser solenoid valve is opened, activating Variable Speed Inverter Compressor Units with Start-Stop
the entire condenser surface. The solenoid valve is disabled Control)
above an outdoor ambient of 80F. The solenoid valve is in a
normally open configuration.
Refer to Figure 19 for wiring schematics of SpeedTrol.
Refer to Figure 20 and Figure 21 for SpeedTrol operating
characteristics.

OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER 122 www.DaikinApplied.com

 All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Operator’s Guide

Variable Frequency Drive for VFD Compressor

Basic Operation of Compressor Drive:
WARNING
Never bypass the compressor drive or directly connect Start= Connect terminals 12 & 18 for minimum of 5 secs,
the VFD compressor to the main power supply. connect terminals 12 &27 and terminals 13 &37
Stop= Disconnect terminals 12 & 27
WARNING Emergency Stop= Disconnect terminals 13 & 37
The compressor drive is preset to run the compressor
Control/Modulation= 0 to 10Vdc signal to terminals 53 & 55
clockwise.
Run Verification= A contact closure from relay 02 (terminals
WARNING 04 & 05) is provided when drive is running
Variable Speed Inverter Compressor Oil Injection= A contact closure from relay 01 (terminals 01 &
02) is provided when compressor speed is greater than 50 rps
The VFD is factory-programmed and should not
(3000 rpm) which energizes the oil solenoid coil.
be modified in the field. Any modifications will void
the warranty. Compressors are compatible with the The compressor drive contains protection for the compressor
manufacturer’s VFD only. against short circuits at the compressor terminals, overload
protection , phase loss and earth faults. The compressor drive
The compressor drive used for this option is a special series is protected against short-circuits.
(CDS 303) that is intended for use with an IPM compressor
motor and cannot be replaced with any off the shelf VFD. Table 54: Compressor Drive Model & Frame Size
The compressor drive is mounted in the main control box. Compressor Frame Size
Model Drive Model
208-230V 460V
The compressor drive and the LCP (local control panel) are
VZH-088B CDS303-15kW B4 B3
preset with parameters from the factory and should not need
VZH-117B CDS303-18kW C3 B4
to be changed in the field. The LCP is removable and is
VZH-170B CDS303-22kW C3 B4
interchangeable with any of the compressor drives used by
any of the VFD compressors. If the need arises to replace the
compressor drive, the parameters can be downloaded from the Refer to the VFD operational manual for more information.
LCP to the new compressor drive.
The compressor drive is preset to run the compressor
clockwise and must be connected as shown in the unit
schematic.
The compressor drive is preset for an open loop configuration
with 0-10Vdc reference corresponding to 1500-6000 Rpm.
The compressor drive generates a soft start with an initial ramp
of 2 seconds. In-rush current (or LRA) to the VFD compressor
is typically not more than a few percent more than rated
nominal Current.
Compressor Speed, modulation signal %, frequency signal,
compressor amperage are all displayed in real time on the
compressor drive screen. Alarms and descriptions will also be
visible on the compressor drive screen.

www.DaikinApplied.com 123 OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER

 All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Operator’s Guide

Variable Speed Scroll Compressor

WARNING Figure 22: Compressor Nameplate Information
The compressor must only be used for its designed
purpose(s) and within its scope of application (refer
to the Operating Limits). Consult the Application
Guidelines. Under all circumstances, the EN378 (or
other applicable local safety regulations) requirements
must be fulfilled.

Daikin units with variable speed inverter compressor are

engineered with fixed speed compressor(s) in such a way
that the unit delivers only the required energy to satisfy space
conditions and provides you with exceptional energy savings.
It improves comfort through precise temperature and humidity
control. Variable speed compressor enhances energy efficiency
and capable of providing unit capacity modulation down to 20%
and reduces compressor cycling and wear on compressor. A. Model number
B. Serial number
Daikin rooftop units with variable speed Inverter compressors C. Refrigerant
are provided with Internal Permanent Magnet (IPM) motors. D. Supply voltage to CDS303 frequency converter
Compressors are designed to vary capacity by modulating E. Housing service pressure
the speed of the scroll set. The speed ratio for the IPM motor F. Factory charged lubrication
compressor is 4:1 (25 rps to 100 rps). Condenser fans staging G. Compressor frequency and MaxMust trip current
and an oil management/monitoring system are provided for
reliable operation. The VFD compressor will always be on the Figure 23: Compressor Components
“lead” circuit and will be the first one ON and last one OFF.

OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER 124 www.DaikinApplied.com

 All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Operator’s Guide

Oil Injection Control Optical Oil Level Sensor

The VFD compressor contains an oil injection valve and An optical oil sensor is used to monitor oil level in VFD
solenoid (SV11) as standard. The oil injection valve provides compressor sump. The sensor is mounted directly to a fitting
lubrication to the scroll set under low speed/low refrigerant on the VFD compressor shell and can be removed without
velocity situations. The oil injection valve is a normally closed having to depressurize/reclaim the refrigeration system.
valve. Below 50 rps (100 Hz) the valve is closed and directs oil Optical oil indication signal is sent to MTIII Expansion Module
to the scroll set suction port. Above 50 rps (100 Hz) the solenoid ‘C’ (terminals X3 & M). Normal oil indication will provide a
is bypassed and sends oil into sump. The oil injection valve/ contact closure from relay R40. Relay R40 will de-energize
solenoid is mounted directly on the compressor and is controlled during low oil indication, removing signal to terminal X3 and
by the Compressor VFD (relay 1 output, terminals NO & Com). will start the unit in an oil boost sequence. Refer to Figure 26
The coil voltage for the oil injection solenoid is 24 Vac. and Figure 27
The coil can be removed if required by carefully prying off
the valve stem. The wiring connector is attached to the coil Figure 26: Sightglass for Optical Oil Sensor/Switch
by a screw in the center of the housing. Refer to Figure 24
and Figure 25.

Figure 24: Assembly Components

Figure 27: Optical Oil Level Sensor/Switch

Electrical Connections and Wiring

Basic Connections
Depending on the frequency converter version, the physical
Figure 25: Oil Injection Control Dismanteling position of individual connectors may differ. Always make sure
that the compressor terminals, U, V and W are connected to
the frequency converter terminals, 96, 97 and 98 respectively.
The compressor motor cable is shielded and the armoured
part of the cable is connected to a ground on both cable ends;
at the side of the compressor and at the side of the frequency
converter.

www.DaikinApplied.com 125 OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER

 All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Operator’s Guide

Condenser Fan Control

RPS Units
There are up to four condenser fans per circuit. The first fan on Condenser Fan Output 2 is turned ON when any
each circuit is always turned on when any compressor on the compressor is ON and the OAT rises above the Condenser
circuit is turned on through auxiliary switches on the compressor Fan B Set Point. Condenser Fan Output 2 is turned OFF
contactors. The second two fans on each circuit (if applicable) when all compressors are OFF or the OAT drops below the
are controlled by outputs from the Main Controller. These are Condenser Fan 2 Set Point by more than the Condenser
controlled via Condenser Fan Output 1 and Condenser Fan Fan Differential (Default = 5°F). External relays allow
Output 2. The last fan on each circuit (if applicable) is controlled operation of condenser fans associated with a specific
by an external refrigerant pressure switch. circuit only when a compressor on that circuit is ON.
Condenser Fan Output 1 is turned ON when any Condenser Fan Output 3 is turned ON when any

m
compressor on is on and the OAT rises above the compressor is ON and the OAT rises above the Condenser
Condenser Fan A Set Point. Condenser Fan Output 1 is Fan 3 Set Point. Condenser Fan Output 3 is turned OFF
turned OFF when all compressors are OFF or the OAT drops when all compressors are OFF or the OAT drops below the
below the Condenser Fan 1 Set Point by more than the Condenser Fan 3 Set Point by more than the Condenser Fan
Condenser Fan Differential (Default = 5°F). External relays Differential (Default = 5°F). External relays allow operation of

.co
allow operation of condenser fans associated with a specific condenser fans associated with a specific circuit only when a
circuit only when a compressor on that circuit is ON. compressor on that circuit is ON.

The Condenser Fan default setpoints vary by unit size according to the following tables:

Table 55: 410A Condenser Fan Setpoints Table 56: R22 Condenser Fan Setpoints
es
CondFanOutput1 CondFanOutput2 CondFanOutput1 CondFanOutput2 CondFanOutput3
Unit PC13/PC231 Unit
(MCB-DO7) (MCB-DO8) (MCB-DO7) (MCB-DO8) (MCB-DO6)
Size Size
Setpoint Differential Setpoint Differential Setpoint Differential Setpoint Differential Setpoint Differential Setpoint Differential
015 70 5 — — — — 015 60 5 — — — —
016 75 5 — — — — 018 60 5 — — — —
020 70 5 — — — — 020 60 5 — — — —
021 75 5 — — — — 025 65 5 — — — —
025 60 5 — — — — 030 65 5 — — — —
uid

026 70 5 — — — — 036 70 5 — — — —
030 75 5 — — — — 040 65 5 — — — —
031 75 5 — — — — 045 65 5 — — — —
035 70 5 — — — — 050 60 5 — — — —
040 65 5 — — — — 060 25 5 — — 70 5
042 70 5 — — — — 070 40 5 — — 70 5
045 65 5 — — — — 075 65 5 0 5 75 5
050 65 5 — — — — 080 65 5 0 5 75 5
051 70 5 — — — — 090 65 5 0 5 75 5
-g

060 60 5 — — — — 105 0 5 70 5 45 5
062 70 5 — — — —
063 70 5 — — — — Table 57: R407C Condenser Fan Setpoints
068 70 5 — — — —
070 75 5 — — 90 35 CondFanOutput1 CondFanOutput2 CondFanOutput3
Unit (MCB-DO7) (MCB-DO8) (MCB-DO6)
071 75 5 — — 90 35 Size
Setpoint Differential Setpoint Differential Setpoint Differential
all

075 65 5 85 5 90 35
015 60 5 — — — —
079 65 5 80 5 90 35
018 0 5 — — — —
080 75 5 — — 90 35
020 0 5 — — — —
081 75 5 — — 90 35
025 65 5 — — — —
085 70 5 — — 90 35
030 65 5 — — — —
090 60 5 85 5 90 35
036 65 5 — — — —
091 60 5 85 5 90 35
040 60 5 — — — —
100 60 5 85 5 90 35
045 55 5 — — — —
101 60 5 85 5 90 35
050 50 5 — — — —
105 50 5 80 5 90 35
060 15 5 — — 70 5
110 65 5 90 5 90 35
070 30 5 — — 70 5
120 65 5 85 5 90 35
075 65 5 0 5 75 5
125 65 5 85 5 90 35
080 65 5 0 5 75 5
130 60 5 85 5 90 35
090 50 5 0 5 75 5
140 55 5 80 5 90 35
105 0 5 70 5 35 5

OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER 126 www.DaikinApplied.com

 All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Operator’s Guide

MPS Standard Condenser Fan Control

Standard Condenser Fan Control
Two, three or four condenser fans are provided. Two When the “new” four condenser fan method is used
condenser fans are provided on 15, 17.5, 20 and 25 ton units. (Condenser Control=Standard Method 2), the condenser
Three condenser fans are provided on 26, 30 and 35 ton units. fan control is circuit specific. The first fan on each circuit is
Four condenser fans are provided on 40 and 50 ton units. The turned ON using compressor contactor auxiliary switches.
first condenser fan is always turned ON when any compressor The second fan on each circuit is turned ON if a compressor
is turned ON using compressor contactor auxiliary switches in the circuit is ON and the OAT is above the corresponding
external to the controller. condenser fan setpoint and is turned off when the OAT drops
When two condenser fans are provided, the second condenser below the corresponding setpoint by more than the Condenser
fan (CondFanOutA) is turned ON when the OAT rises above Fan Differential (Default = 5°F). Condense Fan 1 Setpoint
the Condenser Fan 1 Set Point. This fan is turned OFF when corresponds to the second fan on Circuit 1 and Condenser Fan
the OAT drops below the setpoint by more than the Condenser 2 Setpoint corresponds to the second fan on Circuit 2.
Fan Differential (Default = 5°F). The default condenser fan setpoints vary by unit size as
When three condenser fans are provided, the second indicated in Table 59:
condenser fan is turned ON when the OAT rises above the
Condenser Fan 1 Set Point and the third fan is turned ON Table 59: CondenserFan Setpoints
when the OAT rises above the Condenser Fan 2 Set Point. Condenser Fan Setpoints
These fans are turned OFF when the OAT drops below that Unit Size
Cond Fan 1 Spt Cond Fan 2 Spt Cond Fan Spt
corresponding setpoint by more than the Condenser Fan 15 70°F/21.11°C — —
Differential (Default = 5°F). 17 70°F/21.11°C — —
When four condenser fans are provided, there are two 20 65°F/21.11°C — —
different methods for control due to a redesign of the model 25 65°F/21.11°C — —
040 and 050. 26 40°F/4.44°C 60°F/15.56°C —
30 40°F/4.44°C 60°F/15.56°C —
When the “old” four condenser fan method is used (Condenser
35 35°F/1.67°C 60°F/15.56°C —
Control=Standard Method 1) is used, two outputs (Condenser 40 (Cond Ctrl=Std
Fan Output1 and Condenser Fan Output 2) on the controller Method 1) 25°F/-3.89°C 45°F/7.22°C 60°F/15.56°C

are used to provide three additional stages as shown in Table 50 (Cond Ctrl=Std
35°F/1.67°C 45°F/7.22°C 55°F/12.78°C
Method 1)
58. The second through fourth stages are turned on when the
40 (Cond Ctrl=Std
corresponding setpoint is exceeded by the OAT and turned Method 2) 70°F/21.11°C 70°F/21.11°C N/A
OFF when the OAT drops below the corresponding setpoint by 50 (Cond Ctrl=Std 70°F/21.11°C 70°F/21.11°C N/A
more than the Condenser Fan Differential (Default = 5°F). Method 2)

Table 58: Fan Staging

Operating Fan 1 Fan 2 Fan 3 and 4 On

(On with any (Cond Fan (Cond Fan
Fans (Stage) compressor) Out A) Out B) Condition

1 On Off Off Any

Comp On

2 On On Off Cond Fan

1 Spt

3 On Off On Cond Fan

2 Spt

4 On On On Cond Fan
3 Spt

www.DaikinApplied.com 127 OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER

 All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Operator’s Guide

Evaporative Condensing Control (RTU)

The evaporative condensing option for rooftop units uses The Staging Type can be set to either Standard or Alternate.
the heat absorbed by evaporating water as well as air drawn Standard:
across a bank of tubes with refrigerant flowing through them
to condense hot refrigerant to a liquid. Water is pumped from The two circuits are loaded up and unloaded as evenly as
a sump beneath the condenser tubes to nozzles above the possible. When a stage up is required, the circuit operating at
coil that spray water onto the bank of tubes. The refrigerant in the lower stage is staged up. If both circuits are operating at
the tubes is cooled and condensed as some of this water is the same stage, the lead circuit is staged up if it is not at its
evaporated when it strikes the hot tubes and is carried away maximum stage.
by condenser fans. Using this method, the refrigerant can be When a stage down is required, the circuit operating at the
cooled to a lower temperature than is the case with a normal higher stage is staged down if it is not at stage zero. If both
finned condenser that transfers heat directly to the air. circuits are operating at the same stage, the lag circuit is
A unit equipped with evaporative condensers cannot operate staged down if it is not at stage zero.
in the cooling state with the outdoor air temperature below Alternate:
40°F. If the OAT Compressor Lockout Temperature on units
with evaporative condensing is lowered below 40°F, it will One circuit is loaded completely before the first compressor
immediately be set back up to 40°F. in the other circuit is turned ON, and one circuit is unloaded
completely before the other circuit begins to be unloaded.
The first condenser fan on each circuit is turned on and off When a stage up is required and the lead circuit is not at its
via ModBus communications with a single VFD. The speed of maximum stage, the lead circuit is staged up.
these two fans is controlled via ModBus communications with
the VFD. These two fans always operate at the same speed. When a stage up is required and the lead circuit is already at
its maximum stage, the lag circuit is staged up. When a stage
The second and third condenser fans on each compressor down is required and the Lag circuit is at a stage greater than
circuit are turned ON and OFF using the two outputs on the zero, the lag circuit is staged down. When a stage down is
Main Board that are used for standard condenser fans. Relays required and the lag compressor is at stage zero, the lead
are driven by each of these outputs so that fans associated compressor is staged down if it is not at stage zero.
with a circuit that is not operating will not be turned ON.
A disabled circuit remains at stage zero. If the other circuit
Evaporative Condenser Compressor Staging Sequences is enabled, it is staged up whenever a stage up is required,
and down whenever a stage down is required. If a previously
There are two cooling staging configurations available for
disabled circuit becomes enabled, the staging is re-aligned
evaporative condenser units. Both employ reciprocating
according to the staging tables upon the next call for stage
compressors and so require pumpdown operation. When there
increase or decrease.
is a first call for cooling on a circuit, the liquid line solenoid
valve output is first energized and then as soon as the low NOTE: During this re-alignment, the cooling stage time
pressure switch for that circuit closes the first compressor in guaranteed ON and OFF times must be observed as
the sequence is turned ON. If the low pressure switch fails to well as a minimum of 10 seconds between starting
more than one compressor
close within the low pressure compressor delay timer setting
the low pressure alarm for that circuit is generated. When dehumidification is active staging reverts to Alternate
The circuit that has the fewer run hours is the lead circuit if regardless of the normal Staging Type setting. When
Lead Circuit is set to Auto. The lead circuit is changed only dehumidification is not active staging is according to the
when all compressors are off or at the maximum stages for the Staging Type setting.
unit. If Lead Circuit is set to #1 then circuit #1 always leads if
it is available. If Lead Circuit is set to #2 then circuit #2 always
leads if it is available.

OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER 128 www.DaikinApplied.com

 All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Operator’s Guide

Table 60: Dehumidification Staging

Two Compressors and Six Stages (CompCfg=4 & Cond Ctrl=2 or 3)
Circuit # 1 Circuit # 2
Stage Comp Liq Line Valve Comp # 1 Comp # 1 Comp Liq Line Valve Comp # 2 Comp # 2
#1 #1 Unl # 2 Unl # 1 #2 #2 Unl # 2 Unl # 1
0 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
1 ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON
2 ON ON ON OFF ON ON ON OFF
3 ON ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF
Four Compressors and Eight Stages (CompCfg=E & Cond Ctrl=2 or 3)
Circuit # 1 Circuit # 2
Stage Comp Liq Line Valve Comp # 1 Comp # 1 Comp Liq Line Valve Comp # 2 Comp # 2
#1 #1 Unl # 2 Unl # 1 #2 #2 Unl # 2 Unl # 1
0 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
1 ON ON OFF ON ON ON OFF ON
2 ON ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF
3 ON ON ON* ON ON ON ON* ON
4 ON ON ON OFF ON ON ON OFF
* Note: A 20 second delay will be provided after unloading compressor #1 or #2 prior to starting Compressor #3 or Compressor #4.

Pumpdown If any unloaders on a reciprocating compressor are de-

Pumpdown is accomplished by closing the liquid line solenoid energized when that compressor is required for pump down,
valve on a circuit and operating a compressor on that circuit they are energized and the circuit is pumped down using one
until the circuit low pressure switch opens. The compressor completely unloaded compressor.
pumps most of the refrigerant into the condenser and then NOTE: A reciprocating compressor is mechanically
shuts OFF. prevented from pumping down the circuit if the oil
pressure switch is open.
When pump down is required for a circuit, the liquid line
solenoid valve for that circuit is closed (its output is OFF) Sump Pump Control
and a compressor operates until the low pressure switch
The Sump Pump Output is turned ON whenever the unit
opens at which time the compressor is turned OFF. If the low
is in the Cooling state and the Sump Water Level Input is
pressure switch does not open in 180 seconds, pump down is
present (ON). The Sump Pump Output is turned ON before
terminated by turning OFF the compressor and its unloaders.
any compressor or condenser fan is turned ON. The Sump
If a compressor in a circuit is operating, the circuit is pumped Pump Output remains ON for 10 minutes (adjustable) after unit
down when the last compressor is to shut OFF due to normal leaves the Cooling operating state before turning OFF as long
staging, or when the pump down switch for that circuit is placed as the Sump Water Level Input is present (ON).
in the Pumpdown (Open) position, or when the circuit or entire
A Sump Water Level problem alarm is generated if the unit has
unit is shutdown due to any alarm other than the High Pressure
been in the Cooling operation state for 5 minutes and the Sump
Alarm. Of course, the conditions for completing pump down
Water Level Input is not present (OFF). If this occurs, the Sump
are met if the low pressure alarm shuts down the circuit so no
Pump output is turned off and mechanical cooling is disabled.
pump down occurs as a result of this alarm.
To prevent problems related to Sump Water Level Switch
Pumpdown is also initiated if no compressors are operating
fluctuations, there is a 5 second “to OFF” time on the switch.
in a circuit, and the Pumpdown Switch is moved from the ON
(Auto) position to the OFF (Pumpdown) position twice in less If Dolphin= Yes, the sump pump is run every day to reduce
than 20 seconds, and the low pressure switch is closed. In this scaling. The Sump Pump Output is turned ON for one hour if
case the first compressor on the circuit is used to pump down all of the following are true:
the circuit. • Dolphin System= Yes
If two compressors on one circuit are operating when pump • Sump Pump Output has been off for more than 24 hours
down is required for that circuit, the lag compressor in that but less than 120 hours.
circuit is turned OFF immediately and the circuit is pumped
• The OAT is greater than 35°F.
down using the lead compressor.
• The Sump Drain Valve is closed.

www.DaikinApplied.com 129 OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER

 All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Operator’s Guide

Sump Drain Valve Control A single Condenser Fan Output A is controlled to turn ON the
When the sump temperature gets too cold, the sump needs to second condenser fan on both circuits. A single Condenser Fan
be emptied to prevent freezing. The Sump Drain Valve Output Output B is controlled to turn ON the second condenser fan
is used to control a sump drain valve. This output is turned ON on both circuits. The second and third fans on the circuits are
if the sump temperature drops below the Sump Dump Setpoint, mechanically prevented from operating when no compressor
default = 35°F for more than 30 seconds. on that circuit is operating. When compressors are operating
on both circuits, the number of fans operating on the two
This output is turned back OFF if the sump temperature rises circuits is the same.
above this setpoint by more than the Sump Dump Differential,
2°C (hardcoded), and the unit is in the Cooling state. The number of fans operating per circuit will increase if the
time since the last change in the number of operating fans
If Dolphin System= Yes and the pump does not run for five exceeds the Evap Condensing Stage Time and the sump
days, the sump needs to be emptied. This would occur when temperature exceeds the Max Sump Temperature setpoint.
cooling is not required and the OAT remains below 35°F. Sump This condenser fan stage increase may occur as soon as the
heaters are used to keep the sump temperature above 35°F temperature rises above the Maximum Sump Temperature.
when the OAT drops below that value so an additional means The temperature does not have to remain above the Maximum
of turning on the Sump Drain Valve is required. In addition to Sump Temperature for longer than the stage timer.
the requirement that the Sump Drain Valve Output be turned
The number of fans operating per circuit will decrease if the time
ON to open the valve when the sump temperature drops below
since the last change in the number of operating fans exceeds
35°F, the Sump Drain Valve Output is also turned ON if both of
the following are true: the Evap Condensing Stage Time, and the sump temperature
drops below the Min Sump Temperature setting. This condenser
• Dolphin System= Yes fan stage decrease may occur as soon as the temperature drops
• The Sump Pump Output has been off for 120 hours or below the Minimum Sump Temperature setting. The temperature
more. does not have to remain below the Minimum Sump Temperature
setting for longer than the stage timer.
Once on the Sump Drain Valve is turned back OFF as
described above. After the two lead condenser fans are turned OFF via the VFD,
they are turned back ON as soon as the sump temperature
Separator Flush Valve Control rises above the Maximum Sump Temperature setting. This
transition from stage zero to stage one is the only transition
On units equipped with a Dolphin System the system
that does not require the Stage Timer to expire.
Separator needs to be flushed of its collected solids every
so often. An ON/OFF flush valve actuator is used to flush the All of the condenser fans need to be run periodically when
separator. Every 8 hours the Purge Valve Binary Output is evaporative condensing is used to prevent damage to the
turned ON for the Separator Flush Time (default 1 minute). motors due to their high humidity environment. As indicated
above, the condensing fans controlled by the VFD always run
Sump Temperature Control when evaporative operation is in effect so no special control
Two configurations of evaporative condensing units are of these fans is required. The fan motors controlled directly
provided. One will have two condenser fan outputs per circuit through the Condenser Fan A and Condenser Fan B outputs
(Unit Size<110), and one will have three condenser fan outputs are turned ON and OFF based on time ON and time OFF.
per circuit (Unit Size≥110). The two lead condenser fans are When a condenser fan output must be turned ON for normal
controlled through a single VFD. operation, the output that has been OFF for the longest period
of time is started. When a condenser fan must be turned
Whenever any compressor is turned ON, the lead condenser
OFF for normal operation, the output that has been on for the
fan on both circuits is turned ON by the Microtech III controller
longest period of time is turned OFF.
sending a signal to the VFD via Modbus. The lead condenser
fans on both circuits are turned OFF when all compressors are
OFF or they are turned OFF as described in paragraphs that
follow when the sump temperature gets low.
Whenever any condenser fan is ON, a signal is sent to the
VFD to control connected fans to a setpoint. The speed
setpoint is calculated based on the sump temperature.

OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER 130 www.DaikinApplied.com

 All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Operator’s Guide

Heating Control
Entering Heating Operating State Heating: Staged Zone Control
The unit enters the Heating operating state from the Fan Only When the unit first enters the Heating operating state the unit
operating state when the control temperature falls below the goes directly to Stage # 1.
Occupied or Unoccupied Heating Set Point by more than The number of heating stages increases when the time since
half the Occupied or Unoccupied Heating Dead Band. The the last stage change exceeds the stage time, the Projected
unit transitions from the Heating to Fan Only operating state Control Temperature and the actual Control Temperature are
when the control temperature rises above the Occupied or less then the Occ Htg Spt (minus ½ the deadband), and the
Unoccupied Heating Set Point by more than half the Occupied DAT is less than the Max DAT Htg Spt.
or Unoccupied Heating Dead Band. The unit will also transition
from the Heating to Fan Only operating state if heating The number of heating stages decreases when the time

m
operation is disabled due to OA ambient lockout. since the last stage change exceeds the stage time, and the
Projected Control Temperature and actual Contro Temperature
Morning Warmup Control are greater then the Occ Htg Spt (plus ½ the deadband).
The unit does not enter a specific morning warmup operating The number of heating stages also decreases when the time
state to accomplish the morning warmup function. Instead since the last stage change exceeds the stage time, and the

.co
the unit enters the Heating operation state when morning DAT is greater than the MaxDATHtgSpt.
warmup operation is required. The dampers are held at zero
percent open for Zero OA Timer after the SAF starts. The Zero Heating DAT Staging or MinDAT Staging
OA Timer should be set long enough to accomplish morning When the unit enters the Heating or Minimum DAT states and
warmup with the dampers closed to minimize energy usage all heating is off, the unit goes directly to Heating Stage # 1 so
during the warmup period. that the first stage of heat is turned on immediately.
Zone Control Units The number of heating stages increases when the time since
es
the last stage change exceeds the stage time, and DAT is less
When a Zone Control Unit (Ctrl Typ=Zone) first starts in the
than the effective DAT setpoint (DAT staging) or the Min DAT
morning it enters the Heating operating state if the Control
limit (MinDAT staging) by ½ the deadband. One exception
Temperature is below the Occupied Heating Setpoint by more
to this is that if the current heating stage is zero, the heating
that ½ the heating dead band. In this case The Occupied
stage can increase without regard to the stage timer.
Heating Setpoint is the “morning warmup setpoint”.
The number of heating stages decreases when the time since
uid

DAT Control Units the last stage change exceeds the stage time, and the DAT is
For Discharge Temperature Control units (Ctrl Type=DAC) greater than the effective DAT setpoint (DAT staging) or the
there are two additional morning warmup related adjustable MIN DAT limit (MinDAT staging) by ½ the deadband.
parameters; MWU Heating Setpoint and MWU Sensor. When The unit enters the Min DAT operating state during occupied
a Discharge Temperature Control unit first starts in the morning operation when neither cooling nor heating is required based
it enters the Heating operating state if the sensor selected by on the unit heat/cool changeover function but the discharge air
the MWU Sensor parameter (RAT or Space) is below the MWU temperature falls below a minimum discharge temperature limit
Heating Setpoint by more that ½ the Heating dead band. The by more than ½ the deadband. The Min DAT operating state
-g

MWU Sensor can also be set to None. If the MWU Sensor is prevents cold discharge air temperatures during what would
set to None the MWU Heating Setpoint has no effect and the normally be the Fan Only operating state.
unit only enters heating based on the Occupied Setpoint in the
normal manner.
all

www.DaikinApplied.com 131 OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER

 All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Operator’s Guide

Modulating RTU Gas Heating

Entering Heating Operating State When a unit is equipped with modulating gas heating and is
in the Heating operating state, the gas valve is modulated
The unit enters the Heating operating state from the Fan Only to maintain the discharge air temperature at the Discharge
operating state when the Control Temperature falls below Heating Set Point. Differences in the control of modulating
the Occupied or Unoccupied Heating Set Point by more than gas heat are described in the following sections. On units
half the Occupied or Unoccupied Heating Dead Band. The equipped with modulating gas heat, the Discharge Heating
unit transitions from heating to Fan only when the Control Set Point is limited according to a maximum heat exchanger
Temperature rises above the Occupied or Unoccupied Heating temperature rise limit. This factory set limit varies depending
Set Point by more than half the Occupied or Unoccupied on the unit burner model and can be found on the gas heat
Heating Dead Band. The unit will also transition from the data plate attached to the unit. The controller does not allow
Heating to Fan Only operating state if heating operation the Discharge Heating Setpoint to be set above the current
is disabled due to OA ambient lockout. When the unit is in temperature entering the discharge fan (EFT) by more than this
the Heating operating state, heating capacity is modulated maximum heat exchanger temperature rise limit.
to maintain the discharge air temperature at the Discharge
Heating Set Point.
Min DAT
There are several different modulating heating types available
with this equipment. There are some differences in the control If heating is enabled and there is no heating load (normally Fan
sequence depending on the heat type installed. The different Only operating state), the controller activates the units heating
types are described in the following sections. equipment as required to prevent the discharge air temperature
from becoming too cool if the Min DAT Control Flag (DAT
Steam or Hot Water Heat: Face and Bypass Damper units only) is set to yes via the Heating menu. The unit enters
Control the Min DAT operating state during occupied operation when
When a unit is equipped with steam or hot water with face and neither cooling nor heating is required based on the heat/
bypass damper heating there are two different methods used cool changeover function but the discharge temperature falls
for controlling the heating arrangement. These are the “Open below a minimum discharge temperature limit. If the discharge
Valve” and “Modulating Valve” methods and are described in air temperature falls below the this minimum discharge
the following sections. temperature limit by more than half the discharge heating
deadband, the unit operating state changes from Fan Only to
Open Valve Min DAT.
When the unit enters the Heating operating state, the steam NOTE: On VAV or CAV discharge control units, the DAT
or hot water valve is driven fully open. The face and bypass cooling setpoint parameter in the Cooling menu acts
dampers are then modulated to maintain the discharge air as the minimum discharge temperature limit. On CAV
temperature at the discharge heating set point. zone control units the Min DAT Limit parameter in
the Heating menu acts as the minimum discharge
Modulating Valve temperature limit.

When the outdoor air temperature is below the F&BP Typical Sequence of Operation (20-1 gas burner)
changeover temperature, the Heating valve is driven to 100%
When 120V power is furnished through the system ON/OFF
open to protect the coil. The face and bypass dampers are
switch (S1), through the burner ON/OFF switch (S3), and
then modulated to satisfy the heating load. When the outdoor
through the high limit control (FLC), terminal #6 on the flame
air temperature rises above the F&B Changeover temperature
safeguard (FSG) is powered on a call for heat. Whenever
by a differential of 2.0ºF, the face and bypass dampers are set
power is restored to the flame safeguard, the flame safeguard
at 100% open to the face of the coil and the Heating valve is
will go through a 10 second initiation period before the
modulated to satisfy the heating load. The default value for the
prepurge period will begin. The burner air control valve will be
changeover temperature is 37°F.
at minimum position during OFF cycles. Upon a call for heat
or any other time that a prepurge cycle occurs, the air control
valve will be repositioned to the maximum position for prepurge
and then returned to the minimum position for low fire start.

OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER 132 www.DaikinApplied.com

 All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Operator’s Guide

Upon a call for heat, the controller will close digital output Typical Sequence of Operation (3-1 Gas)
(EXPB-DO1) and energize the R20A relay. Once the normally
When 120V power is furnished through the system ON/OFF
open contacts of the R20A relay close 120V power is supplied
switch (S1), through the burner ON/OFF switch (S3), and
to terminal # 6 on the FSG. The FSG then energizes its
through the high limit control (FLC), terminal #6 on the flame
terminal #4, which powers the burner combustion air blower
safeguard (FSG) is powered on a call for heat. Whenever
motor (BM) and starts the 90 second prepurge cycle. The
power is restored to the flame safeguard, the flame safeguard
controller will reposition the burner air valve to its maximum
will go through a 10 second initiation period before the
open position via analog output EXPBAO_X7 for prepurge.
prepurge period will begin. The burner air control valve will be
When the burner air valve reaches the full open position switch at minimum position during OFF cycles.
(LS2) will ‘make’ and provide a digital input to the controller
Upon a call for heat, the controller will close digital output
(EXPB-DI_X3). This digital input will initiate a 20 second timing
(EXPB-DO1) and energize the R20A relay. Once the normally
period in the controller. At the completion of the timing period,
open contacts of the R20A relay close, 120V power is supplied
the controller will begin to drive the burner air valve to its
to terminal # 6 on the FSG. The FSG then energizes its
minimum (low fire) position.
terminal #4, which powers the burner combustion air blower
When the valve reaches the minimum position switch LS1 will motor (BM) and starts the FSG prepurge cycle.
‘make’ and provide a digital input to the controller (EXPB-DI_
After completion of the FSG prepurge period there will be a 10
X2) indicating the controller’s prepurge sequence is complete.
second trial for ignition during which terminal #8 (combination
As soon as the FSG prepurge time expires FSG terminal #8
gas valve - GV1) and terminal #10 (ignition transformer - IT)
will energize relay R22 which will turn ON a digital input to the
will be energized. If flame is being detected through the flame
controller (EXPB-DI-X1). As soon as this digital input is ‘made’
rod (FD) at the completion of the 10 second trial for ignition
the controller will close digital output (EXPB-DO2) allowing the
period, terminal #10 (ignition transformer - IT) will be de-
combination gas valve(s) (GV1) to be energized.
energized and terminal #9 (main gas valves - GV4 and GV5)
After completion of the FSG prepurge period there will be a 10 will be energized and the control system will be allowed to
second trial for ignition during which terminal #8 (combination control the firing rate once the heating stage timer (default 5
gas valve - GV1) and terminal #10 (ignition transformer - IT) minutes) has passed.
will be energized. If flame is being detected through the
After the flame has lit and been proven and the heating stage
flame rod (FD) at the completion of the 10 second trial for
time has passed, the controller will modulate (VM1) to the
ignition period, terminal #10 (ignition transformer - IT) will be
required firing rate via analog output EXPBAO_X7. In the
deenergized and terminal #9 (main gas valves - GV4 and
event the flame fails to ignite or the flame safeguard fails to
GV5 depending on burner size) will be energized and the
detect its flame within 10 seconds, terminals #4, 8, 9, and
control system will be allowed to control the firing rate once the
10 will be de-energized, thus de-energizing the burner. The
heating stage timer (default 5 minutes) has passed.
FSG will then lockout and require manual resetting. If the
After the flame has lit and been proven and the heating stage FSG lockout occurs, FSG terminal #3 will energize the R24
time has passed, the controller will modulate (VM1) to the alarm input status relay which will ‘make’ a digital input to the
required firing rate via analog output EXPB-AO_X7. In the controller (EXPB-DI_X4). When this digital input is ‘made’ the
event the flame fails to ignite or the flame safeguard fails to controller will drive VM1 to the closed position. If the FSG
detect its flame within 10 seconds, terminals #4, 8, 9, and 10 terminal 8 de-energizes relay R22 (EXPBDI_X1) after having
will be de-energized, thus de-energizing the burner. The FSG it turned ON and the FSG is not OFF on safety lockout the
will then lockout and would require manual resetting. If the controller will drive VM1 to the closed position. If an attempt
FSG lockout occurs, FSG terminal #3 will energize the R24 is made to reset the FSG or if an automatic restart is initiated
alarm input status relay which will ‘make’ a digital input to the after flame failure, the FSG prepurge cycle will be repeated.
controller (EXPB-DI_X4). If the unit overheats, the high limit control (FLC) will cycle the
When this digital input is ‘made’ the controller will drive VM1 burner, limiting furnace temperature to the limit control set
to the closed position, de-energize digital output EXPB-DO2 point. The flame safeguard contains ‘LEDS’ (lower left corner)
and the prepurge sequence will be disabled and reset. If that will glow to indicate operation.
the FSG terminal # 8 de-energizes R22 (EXPB-DI_X1) after
having it turned ON and the FSG is not OFF on safety lockout,
the prepurge sequence will start over. If an attempt is made
to restart the burner by resetting the FSG or if an automatic
restart is initiated after flame failure the earlier described
prepurge cycle with the wide open air valve will be repeated.
If the unit overheats, the high limit control (FLC) will cycle the
burner, limiting furnace temperature to the limit control set
point. The flame safeguard contains ‘LEDS’ (lower left corner)
that will glow to indicate operation.

www.DaikinApplied.com 133 OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER

 All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Operator’s Guide

Special Start Sequence for 100% Outdoor Air Units The unit remains in either the Heating or Minimum DAT
with Gas Heat operating state for the duration of the Hold Period (Default
A special start sequence is used for units 100% outdoor air = 240 seconds). The gas heating valve does not modulate
units with gas heat. The special start sequence applies to both from its calculated value to allow the temperature to approach
Zone Control and DAT Control units. If heat is required at unit equilibrium with modulating gas heating valve at a fixed
startup, the furnace enters a special burner startup sequence position.
as the unit enters its Startup operating state. Pre-firing the The unit reverts to normal modulation of the gas heating valve
burner allows the gas heat pre-purge sequence to occur and when the Hold Period has elapsed since the unit entered
the burner to fire and warm up so that tempered air is available Heating or MinDAT.
immediately when the fans start.
Return Air Units
Once a 100% Outdoor Air unit equipped with gas heat
completes one of the start up sequences described below the When the unit enters the Heating operating state, the controller
gas heat operates the same for both return air units and 100% first holds the gas valve at the minimum fire position (5%
outdoor air units. or 33% depending on the burner model) until the Heating
Interstage Timer expires. Then, the controller modulates the
The sequence described in the following paragraphs is initiated gas valve to maintain the discharge air temperature at the
for a 100% OA Zone Control unit any time during the Startup Discharge Heating Set Point.
operating state when the Control Temperature is less than
the Effective Occupied or Unoccupied Heating Setpoint† by
½ the Occupied or Unoccupied Heating Deadband or the MPS Gas Heating
OAT is less than the Min DAT Limit by the amount of the DAT
Htg Deadband. The sequence described in the following
Sequence of Operation (Staged Control)
paragraphs is initiated for 100% OA DAT Control units during 2-Stage Control
the startup operating state when the Min DAT Ctrl parameter is
set via the keypad and the OAT is less than the DATClgSpt by The following details the sequence of operation for the low
the amount of the DAT Htg Deadband. heat option.

The Effective Occupied or Unoccupied Heating Setpoint • Unit controller calls for heat
equals the Occupied or Unoccupied Heating Setpoint for • Furnace DDC control module receives a call for heat
Zone Control units. Otherwise it equals the Morning Warmup • High limit switch is checked for safe condition
Heating Setpoint (DAT Control units). The special start up • Proof of airflow switch is checked for combustion airflow
sequence is initiated during the Startup operating state.
The fans will remain off. The main gas valve is energized • 60 second prepurge cycle starts
so the burner starts during the Warmup Time (default = 240 • Spark ignitor is activated for 3 seconds
seconds) and operates at low fire. • Gas valve receives a command for stage 1 of heat
At the end of the Warmup Time, the modulating gas heating • Burner is ignited
valve is set to a calculated position. This calculated position is • Unit controller calls for stage 2 of heat
based on the “Application Discharge Air Temperature Setpoint”, • Furnace DDC controller receives a stage 2 heat
the outdoor air temperature, and the Maximum Temperature command
Rise of the gas heat exchanger using the following formula:
• Gas valve receives a command for stage 2 of heat
Gas Heat Actuator Position = 100% x (Setpoint - Outdoor Air
Temp) / Temp Rise 4-Stage Control

The Application Discharge Air Temperature Setpoint is the For a unit with the optional high heat the above sequence is
Occupied or Unoccupied Heating Setpoint if the control followed for the first two stages. For the remaining 2 stages the
temperature initiated the special start sequence. If the OAT above procedure is repeated on the second furnace module.
initiated the special start sequence, the setpoint is the Min DAT
Limit for Zone Control units and the Eff DAT Clg Spt for DAT
Control units. The Temp Rise is the Maximum Temperature
Rise of the gas heat exchanger that is entered at the factory
for the specific unit. After the modulating gas heating valve is
set to the calculated position, there is a HeatUpDelay (default
= 60 second) to allow the heat exchanger to heat up. After this
delay, since the unit is 100% Outside Air, the unit immediately
transitions from Startup to the Fan Only state. As soon as
the unit enters the Fan Only state, the unit will immediately
transition to either the Heating state or the MinDAT state.

OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER 134 www.DaikinApplied.com

 All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Operator’s Guide

Sequence of Operation (Modulating Burner) Discharge Air Temperature Setpoint Reset - Heating
5–1 Gas Burner The Heating DAT Setpoint may be reset for units with DAT
Heating Control. The Discharge Air Temperature Setpoint
The following details the sequence of operation for the low will never be set below the Minimum DAT Heating Setpoint
heat option. or above the Maximum DAT heating Setpoint on the Heating
• Unit DDC controller calls for heat Reset menu. The reset type may be set to one of the following:
• Furnace DDC control module receives a call for heat • None: Discharge Heating Spt is user adjustable
• Furnace safety switches and DDC control are checked for • Network: Discharge Heating Spt is equal to the Network
safe conditions DAT Htg Setpoint when it is valid
• 45 second prepurge cycle starts. Proof of airflow switch is • Space: Discharge Heating Spt is based on the Space
checked for combustion airflow Sensor
• Spark ignitor is activated • Return: Discharge Heating Spt is based on the Return
• Gas valve receives a signal to open fully Air Sensor
• Burner is ignited and runs for 20 seconds in high fire • OAT: Discharge Heating Spt is based on the Outdoor Air
NOTE: If call for heat is interrupted during this timing, the Temperature
furnace will be locked in for the 20 seconds cycle. • Ext mA: Discharge Heating Spt is determined by a 0-20
or 4-20 mA signal
• Gas valve and induction blower motor receives a signal
to modulate burner output to match the unit discharge air • Ext V: Discharge Heating Spt is determined by a 0-10 or
temperature setting 2 - 10 VDC signal

10-1 gas burner Reset reverts from Return to None when the return air sensor
opens or shorts. Reset reverts from Space to None when the
• Unit controller calls for heat.
space sensor opens or shorts. Reset reverts from OAT to None
• Top furnace DDC receives call for heat. when the outdoor air sensor opens or shorts.
• Steps 3-9 from Low Heat Option are followed.
When Space, Return, OAT, Ext mA, or Ext V is selected, the
• If top furnace is unable to meet the unit controllers DAT Discharge Heating Spt equals the Max Htg Spt when the
heating setpoint then the furnace DDC calls for 3rd stage selected value equals the Max Htg Spt @ value. Similarly,
of heating the Discharge Heating Spt equals the Min Htg Spt when the
• Top furnace is reduced to low fire selected value equals the Min Htg Spt @ value.
• Bottom furnace receives a call for heat and sequences When Space, Return, or OAT is selected, the reset schedule
similar to steps 3-9 from Low Heat Option. should be set so that the DAT Heating setpoint decreases as
• Staged burner gas valve receives a signal to open 50%. the selected temperature increases as shown in the graph.
• Top furnace receives a signal to modulate the gas valve When Ext mA is selected, the values “Min Htg Spt @” and
to meet the unit controllers DAT heating setpoint. “Max Htg Spt @” are entered as mA values. When Ext VDC is
• If stage 3 and modulating furnace are unable to meet selected, the values “Min Htg Spt @” and “Max Htg Spt @” are
DAT heating setpoint then stage 4 heat initiates entered as VDC values.
• The bottom furnace stages up to high fire and the top If Ext mA or Ext V is selected as the type of reset, the Min Htg
furnace reduces to low fire Spt @ value may be set above the Max Htg Spt @ value to
• Mod gas valve and inducer blower motor receive a cause a decrease in the DAT setpoint as the external signal or
signal to modulate to match the unit controllers DAT the Min Htg Spt @ value may be set below the Max Htg Spt @
heating setpoint value to cause an increase in the DAT setpoint as the external
signal increase.
When ever the Clg Reset Type or Engineering Units is
changed, the Min Clg Spt @ and Max Clg Spt @ values revert
to default values as follows:
• None: Min Clg Spt @=0NA, Max Clg Spt @=100NA
• Network: Min Clg Spt @=0NA, Max Clg Spt @=100NA
• Space, Return: Min Clg Spt @=73.0F, Max Clg Spt
@=71.0F
• OAT: Min Clg Spt @=90.0F, Max Clg Spt @=70.0F
• ExtmA: Min Clg Spt @=4.0mA, Max Clg Spt @=20.0mA
• ExtVDC: Min Clg Spt @=0.0V, Max Clg Spt @=10.0V

www.DaikinApplied.com 135 OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER

 All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Operator’s Guide

An example of discharge temperature reset based on outdoor Supply Fan Capacity Control (VAV)
air temperature is illustrated in Figure 28 (Cooling Reset Type
The speed of a modulating supply fan is controlled by a
Flag is set to “OAT” in this example). When the current outdoor
0-100% signal provided to the VFD via an internal Modbus
air temperature is greater than or equal to the Minimum
network. Supply Fan Capacity Control for a modulating fan
Cooling Set Point Reset Value (90°F in this example), the
is controlled to either maintain the duct static pressure at a
Discharge Cooling Set Point is set equal to the Minimum
desired value or maintain a fixed speed based on a signal
Discharge Cooling Set Point (55°F in this example). This is
provided via a network.
shown as Point C in Figure 28. When the current outdoor air
temperature is less than or equal to the Maximum Cooling The choice of control method, SF Cap Ctrl, may be set to
Set Point Reset Value (70°F in this example), the Discharge Duct Pressure or Speed via the keypad. After the supply fan is
Cooling Set Point is set equal to the Maximum Discharge started, a speed signal of 33% is sent to the variable frequency
Cooling Set Point (65°F in this example). This is shown as drive for the DSPCtrlDelay (Default=30 seconds). Control

m
Point A in Figure 28. When the current outdoor air temperature reverts to either duct pressure or speed after the fan has been
is between the Minimum Cooling Set Point Reset Value and on for the duration of the DSPCtrlDelay time. The VFD speed
the Maximum Cooling Set Point Reset Value, the Discharge is not controlled below the minimum SAF speed setting (default
Cooling Set Point varies linearly between the Minimum 33%) while the fan is operating.
Discharge Cooling Set Point and Maximum Discharge Cooling NOTE: Units supplied with Daikin MD2, MD3, and MD6

.co
Set Point. This is shown as Point B in Figure 28. drives will have a user editable maximum supply fan
hertz setpoint (default 60 Hz) located in the SAF Set
Figure 28: Discharge Temperature Reset Based on Up menu. This parameter can be changed when job
Temperature site conditions require the speed of the drive to be
above 60 Hz.

Duct Static Pressure Control

The supply air fan speed is controlled by a VFD. The control
es
parameter for the fan speed is the duct static pressure setpoint.
If the duct static pressure is below the duct static pressure
setpoint by more than ½ the deadband, the fan speed will
increase. Likewise if the duct static pressure is above the
duct static pressure setpoint by more than ½ the deadband
the fan speed will decrease. Example - if the duct static
pressure setpoint is 1.2" and the deadband is 0.1",the duct
uid

static pressure must reach 1.14 before the fan will increase in
Indoor Air Fan - ON/OFF Control speed. The Duct Static Pressure setpoint may be set through
the keypad or via a network signal. The active setpoint is
A supply fan is provided on every unit. That may be the only
changed whenever either of these values changes so it equals
fan, but either a return fan or an exhaust fan, or fans, can
whichever value was changed most recently.
be provided also. The start/stop signal and the speed signal
for fans that are controlled by variable frequency drives are Speed/Network
provided via an internal ModBus network. Constant volume
-g

supply and return fans are started and stopped through digital When speed control is selected, the fan operates at the larger
outputs. of its minimum speed or a value provided via a connected
network or the keypad/display.
Supply Fan
Single Zone VAV Control (1ZnVAV)
The supply fan is turned ON when the unit enters the
When space temperature control is selected, the supply fan
all

Recirculation state. The supply fan is turned OFF when

the unit transitions to the OFF state, but it stays on for a VFD is controlled with a PI_Loop to maintain the Control
OffHtClDelayTime (Default- 120 seconds) if the unit is turned Temperature input at the Occupied or Unoccupied Cooling
OFF while DX cooling or staged heating is active. The Setpoint or Occupied or Unoccupied Heating Setpoint. This
OffHtClDelayTime function is overridden when and Emergency control choice is designed for DAC control type and will be
Off or Duct High Limit fault is active. used in applications where the unit will act as a single VAV box
to control space temperature. Cooling and heating discharge
Return Fan air temperature control and outside air damper control will
function in the normal manner as with VAV units.
A return fan driven by a variable frequency drive is started
four seconds after the supply fan is started to reduce the amp
draw peak on startup. A constant volume return fan is turned
ON through the same output as the supply fan. An external
Fan Delay Relay is used to provide a delay between startups
if required.

OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER 136 www.DaikinApplied.com

 All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Operator’s Guide

Cooling/Economizer Carbon Dioxide Control (CO2 )

When the Unit State is Cooling or Econo the Single Zone VAV CO2 supply fan control is available on 100% OA units that have
Control PI_Loop will be set for direct acting control to modulate the Control Type set to Zone or DAC.
the supply fan VFD to maintain the Control Temperature at CO2 supply fan control is not available if the Control Type
the Occupied Cooling Setpoint. As the Control Temperature set to 1ZnVAV. When CO2 is selected as the SAF capacity
rises, the VFD speed will be increased and as the Control control method, the supply fan VFD is controlled based on a
Temperature falls, the VFD speed will be decreased. An CO2 input. The supply fan speed varies linearly between the
adjustable Minimum Cooling Speed and Maximum Cooling Minimum PPM Speed and the Maximum PPM Speed value
Speed value limits the range of modulation of the VFD. as the PPM input varies from the Minimum SAF PPM and the
Heating Maximum SAF PPM value. A CO2 Input parameter allows for
selecting None, VDC or mA as the type of input for the CO2
When the Unit State is Heating the Single Zone VAV Control sensor in this case.
PI_Loop will be set to reverse acting control to modulate
the supply fan VFD to maintain the Control Temperature at If CO2 Input is set to None then no monitoring or control based
the Occupied Heating Setpoint. As the Control Temperature on CO2 is possible. All menu items related to CO2 control and
falls, the VFD speed will be increased and as the Control scaling are removed from the HMI in this case. If CO2 Input is
Temperature rises, the VFD speed will be decreased. An set to VDC then the CO2 input is available for control and/or
adjustable Minimum Heating Speed and Maximum Heating monitoring purposes and the sensor scaling parameters are in
Speed value limits the range of modulation of the VFD terms of volts DC. If CO2 Input is set to mA then the CO2 input
is available for control and/or monitoring purposes and the
Fan Only/MinDat sensor scaling parameters are in terms of milliamps.
When the Unit State is FanOnly or MinDat, the supply fan Airflow Control (CFM)
speed will be held fixed at the speed the VFD was operating
upon entering the FanOnly or MinDat state. This will be either Airflow supply fan control is available on 100% OA units that
the Minimum Cooling Speed or the Minimum Heating Speed have the Control Type set to Zone or DAC. Airflow supply
depending on the state the unit enters FanOnly/MinDat from fan control is not available if the Control Type set to 1ZnVAV.
When CFM is selected as the SAF capacity control method,
Building Static Pressure Control (BSP) the supply fan VFD is controlled to maintain a CFM input at a
Minimum Outside Air CFM Setpoint using a PI Loop.
Building static pressure supply fan control is available on
100% OA units that have the Control Type set to Zone or DAC. A CFM Input parameter allows for selecting None, VDC or mA
Building static pressure supply fan control is not available if the as the type of input for the CFM sensor in this case.
Control Type set to 1ZnVAV (2). When BSP is selected as the If CFM Input= is set to None then no monitoring or control based
SAF capacity control method, the supply fan VFD is controlled on CFM is possible. All menu items related to CFM control and
to maintain a building static pressure input at a building static scaling are removed from the HMI in this case. If CFM Input
pressure setpoint using a PI Loop. is set to VDC then the CFM input is available for control and/
A BSP Input parameter allows for selecting No or Yes for supply or monitoring purposes and the sensor scaling parameters are
fan building static pressure control. If BSP Input is set to No then in terms of volts DC. If CFM Input is set to mA then the CFM
no monitoring or control based on BSP is possible. All menu input is available for control and/or monitoring purposes and the
items related to BSP control are removed from the HMI in this sensor scaling parameters are in terms of milliamps.
case. If BSP Input is set to Yes then the building static pressure
input is available for control and monitoring purposes.

www.DaikinApplied.com 137 OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER

 All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Operator’s Guide

Modulating Return and Exhaust Fan Control (RTU, To set the four parameters as described, the airflow and return
MPS) vane positions are adjusted until maximum airflow and proper
Four different approaches may be used to maintain the building indoor conditions are met. The supply fan is controlled normally
static pressure at acceptable levels. An analog signal is as the VAV boxes are adjusted to obtain maximum airflow. The
provided to the VFD to control return or exhaust fan to: return fan is adjusted using the Remote RF/EF setting on the
keypad. The user then uses the key to set the Supply Fan Max
• Maintain the speed of a return fan based on supply fan values and Return Fan @ Supply Fan Max to the observed
speed (Fan Tracking) values. The process is repeated at minimum airflow to set
• Maintain the building static pressure at a desired value Supply Fan Min and Return Fan @ Supply Fan Min values.
• Maintain a fixed speed based on a signal provided by a
Building Automation System via a network. Low/High Fan Differential
• Vary the speed of an exhaust fan based on OA Damper
When a return fan is running slower than the supply fan it is
position.
limited to a Lo Fan Diff value below the supply fan to prevent
Any of the first three methods may be selected for a return the supply fan from overloading the return VFD or ECM motor
fan. Building Static Pressure, Speed, or OA Damper may be fan drive. When the return fan is running faster than the supply
selected for an exhaust fan. fan it is limited to a Hi Fan Diff value above the supply fan to
prevent the return fan over pressurizing the return fan plenum.
When the unit is in the OFF or Startup state, the variable
frequency drive for the return or exhaust is driven to 0%.
Building Static Pressure Control
After the return or exhaust fan is started, a speed signal of 5%
A PI control loop is used to modulate the variable frequency
for exhaust fan or 33% for return fan is sent to the variable
drive of the exhaust fans to maintain a measured building static
frequency drive for the BSPCtrlDelay (Default=30 seconds)
pressure at a setpoint. The BSP Gain, Project Ahead Time, and
and the VFD will increase its speed to 5% (or 33%). Control
Sample Time are editable via the keypad
reverts to one of the methods below after the fan has been on
for the BSPCtrlDelay. The VFD speed is not controlled below The Building Static Pressure setpoint may be set through
5% (or 33%) while the fan is operating. the keypad or via a network signal. The active setpoint is
changed whenever either of these values changes so it equals
During non-OFF states when the outdoor air damper is closed,
whichever value was changed most recently.
the speed of the return fan is set equal to the supply fan speed.
Under these conditions, the return fan is set to 100% if the
supply fan is a constant volume fan. To provide a “bumpless Speed/Network Control
transfer” when the outdoor air damper opens the return fan will Single zone VAV control is available when the unit Control Type
start to control building static pressure from its speed when the is Single Zone VAV (1ZnVAV). When single zone VAV control
damper was closed. Exhaust fans do not use this feature. is selected as the SAF capacity control method, the supply fan
NOTE: Units supplied with Daikin MD2, MD3, and MD6 VFD or ECM motor is controlled with a PI_Loop to maintain the
drives will have a user editable maximum return fan/ Control Temperature input at the Occupied Cooling Setpoint
exhaust fan hertz setpoint (default 60 Hz) located or Occupied Heating Setpoint. This option is designed for
in the RF/EF Set Up menu. This parameter can be discharge control applications where the unit will act as a
changed when job site conditions require the speed single VAV box to control space temperature. OAT is not
of the drive to be above 60 Hz. allowed as the Control Temperature when SAF capacity control
method is set to 1ZnVAV. Cooling and heating discharge air
Fan Tracking Control temperature control and outside air damper control will function
For units with variable frequency drives, the return fan may in the normal manner as with VAV units.
be controlled such that the return fan speed tracks up and NOTE: Single zone VAV control of SAF is not available when
down with the supply fan speed. The user defines the position the Control Temperature Source is set to None.
of the return fan with respect to the supply fan for minimum
and maximum positions. When the supply fan is between the
minimum and maximum positions, the fan varies proportionally
between its minimum and maximum values. There are four
adjustable parameters to define this relationship. They are:
Supply Fan (DF) Value Return Fan (RF) Value
1. Supply Fan Max
2. Return Fan @ Supply Fan Max
3. Supply Fan Min
4. Return Fan @ Supply Fan Min

OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER 138 www.DaikinApplied.com

 All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Operator’s Guide

Exhaust Fan - Speed Control Exhaust Fan - Speed Control

The exhaust fan is turned ON when the OA Dampers are When speed control is selected, the fan operates at the larger
at least open to the Minimum Exhaust OA Position (default of its minimum speed or a value provided via a connected
5%), the SAF capacity is above the Minimum Exhaust SAF network or the keypad/display.
capacity (default 10%), and the Remote Exhaust Fan capacity The exhaust fan is turned ON when the OA Dampers are
is commanded to a value above the minimum value (Default at least open to the Minimum Exhaust OA Position (default
= 5%) by a BAS for longer than the Minimum Exhaust Fan On 5%), the SAF capacity is above the Minimum Exhaust SAF
Time (Default = 120 seconds). capacity (default 10%), and the Remote Exhaust Fan capacity
The exhaust fan is turned OFF when the Supply Fan is turned is commanded to a value above the minimum value (Default =
OFF when the Remote Exhaust Fan capacity is commanded 5%) by a BAS for longer than the Minimum Exhaust Start Time
to less than or equal to its minimum value (Default = 5%) for (Default = 120 seconds)
longer than the MinExhStopTime (Default = 120 seconds). The exhaust fan is turned OFF when the supply fan is turned off
Modulating Propeller Exhaust- OA Damper Control when the Remote Exhaust Fan capacity is commanded to less
than or equal to its minimum value (Default = 5%) for longer than
When the unit is equipped with a modulating propeller exhaust the Minimum Exhaust Stop Time (Default = 120 seconds).
fan arrangement and the Return/Exhaust Fan Capacity Control
Method is set to OA Damper, the exhaust fan is turned on at Staged Exhaust (MPS Units) Exhaust Fan - OA
an adjustable outdoor air damper position (default 40%), and Damper Control
is turned back off when the dampers are below this setting When the Return Fan Type is set to 1StgExh, 2StgExh or
for more that the minimum exhaust stop time (Default = 120 3StgExh and the Return/Exhaust Fan Capacity Control Method
seconds). When on the fan is modulated linearly between is set to OA Damper, one, two or three exhaust fans are turned
the minimum exhaust fan speed and 100% as the dampers on and off based on the outdoor air damper position. Refer to
vary between the Exhaust On OA Position and the Exhaust Table 61 for the number of fans versus unit size.
Maximum OA Position.

Exhaust Fan - Building Static Pressure Control Table 61: Fan Configuration
An exhaust fan, or fans, driven by a variable frequency drive is MPS Unit Size Number of Fans
started based on building static pressure. A constant volume 15 1
exhaust fan is turned ON through the same output as the 18 1
supply fan. An external Fan Delay Relay is used to provide a 20 2
delay between startups if required. 25 2
30 2
A VAV exhaust fan is turned ON when the OA Dampers are at
35 2
least open to the Minimum Exhaust OA Position (default 5%),
40 3
the SAF capacity is above the Minimum Exhaust SAF capacity
50 3
(default 10%), and the building static pressure is above the
building static pressure setpoint by more than the deadband
for longer than the Minimum Exhaust Fan Start Time (Default = The default exhaust fan ON and OFF values are as follows:
120 seconds).
Table 62: Fan Settings
A VAV exhaust fan is turned OFF when the supply fan is turned
off or when the building static pressure is below the building Action Default OA Setting Adjustable Range
static pressure setpoint by more than the deadband, or the OA Exh Fan Stg 1 ON 40% 0–100%
Dampers are open less than the Minimum Exhaust OA Position Exh Fan Stg 1 OFF 30% 0–100%
(default 5%), or the SAF capacity is below the Minimum Exhaust Exh Fan Stg 2 ON 55% 0–100%
SAF capacity (default 10%), and the Exhaust Fan capacity is at Exh Fan Stg 2 OFF 40% 0–100%
or below its minimum value (Default = 5%) for longer than the Exh Fan Stg 3 ON 70% 0–100%
Min Exhaust Fan Stop Time (Default = 120 seconds). Exh Fan Stg 3 OFF 50% 0–100%

www.DaikinApplied.com 139 OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER

 All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Operator’s Guide

Troubleshooting
Fan Failure Codes
HLL = Hall Sensor Error
First occurrence:
Power fluctuations may be responsible.
Corrective: Reset the failure; re-start the motor and observe it. If applicable, filter out the source of the disturbing
voltage.
Repeated occurrence:
Question: Do other fans show the same failure?
Yes: Systematically search for voltage peaks.
No: It seems to be a hardware problem of the fan. Fan need to be replaced.

TFEI = Electronics Interior Overheated

First occurrence:
Too high ambient temperature may be responsible.
Question: • Could ambient temperature have been too high?
• Is it possible to connect the fan to EC Control in order to display the temperature? If so, is the
displayed temperature within the expected temperature range?
Corrective: If the displayed temperature is above 95°C (the electronics switches off at 105°C), double-check the
ambient temperature in each operating mode.
Reset the failure; re-start the motor and observe it.
Repeated occurrence:
Question: Do other fans show the same failure?
Yes: Systematically search for the cause of excessive ambient temperature. Perhaps use a data logger
or read out the electronics temperature via EC Control.
No: It seems to be a hardware problem of the fan. Fan need to be replaced.

TFM = Motor Overheated

First occurrence:
Excessive ambient temperature may be responsible.
Question: • Could ambient temperature have been too high? Or is the motor overloaded?
• Is it possible to connect the fan to EC Control in order to display the motor temperature?
• Is the displayed temperature within the expected temperature range?
Corrective: If the displayed temperature is too high:
• Double-check the motor temperature in each operating mode.
• Check of the fan load: Measure the input power at max. load/ operating point and compare the
measured value with nominal data on the label. Is there any discrepancy?
• Reset the failure; re-start the motor and observe it.
Repeated occurrence:
Question: Do other fans show the same failure?
Yes: systematically search for the cause of excessive ambient temperature. Perhaps use a data logger
or read out the electronics temperature via EC Control.
No: It seems to be a hardware problem of the fan. Fan need to be replaced.

OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER 140 www.DaikinApplied.com

 All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Operator’s Guide

TFE = Power Mod Overheated

First occurrence:
Excessive ambient temperature may be responsible.
Question: • Do other fans (temporarily) show the same failure within the arrangement? Could ambient temperature
have been too high? Or is the motor overloaded?
• Is it possible to connect the fan to EC Control in order to display the temperature?
• Is the displayed temperature within the expected temperature range?
Corrective: If the displayed temperature is too high:
• Check the module temperature during operation in each operating mode (Tmodule <110°C;

m
switching-off temperature 115°C)
• Check the fan load and supply voltage: Measure the input power at max. load/ operating point and
compare the measured value with nominal data on the label. Is there any discrepancy?
• Reset the failure; re-start the motor and observe it.

.co
Repeated occurrence:
Question: Do other fans show the same failure?
Yes: Systematic search for the reason of too high ambient temperature, overload, overvoltage or low
voltage. Perhaps use a data logger.
No: It seems to be a hardware problem of the fan. Fan need to be replaced.
es
BLK = Locked Motor
First occurrence:
Question: • Is it possible that the motor was locked by an obstruction or ice?
• Do other fans show the same behaviour?
uid

Corrective: Remove the reason for blocking. Caused by ice: activate the shake-loose functionality (starting with
ModBus 5) or increase the starting phase control factor.
Repeated occurrence:
Question: Does increasing the starting phase control factor improve the situation?
No: It seems to be a hardware problem of the fan. Fan need to be replaced.
-g

SKF = Communication Error

First occurrence:
Power fluctuations may be responsible.
Corrective: Reset the failure; re-start the motor and observe it. If applicable, filter out the source of the
all

disturbing signal.
Repeated occurrence:
Question: Do other fans show the same failure?
Yes: systematic search for peaks of disturbance voltage
No: It seems to be a hardware problem of the fan. Fan need to be replaced.

www.DaikinApplied.com 141 OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER

 All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Operator’s Guide

PHA = Phase failure

UzLow = DC-Link Undervoltage
UzHigh = DC-Link Overvoltage
UeHigh = Mains Overvoltage
UeLow = Mains Undervoltage
Question: Can the main voltage be measured at any spot; a data logger may be helpful.
No: Measure the voltage at the power supply input of the concerned fan.
Corrective: • Reset the failure; re-start the motor and observe it.
• If applicable, filter out the source of disturbing signal.
Repeated occurrence:
Question: • Do other fans show the same failure?
• How often does the failure occur?
• Get big electrical consumer loads switched at the same time when the failure occurs in the
surrounding area?
• Are compressors or large asynchronous motors applied within the arrangement?
Yes: Systematic search for external disturbance voltage peaks; If applicable, usage of data logger for
a longer period and analysis of the measured values.
• Are the voltage values within the specified range?
No: It seems to be a hardware problem of the fan. Fan need to be replaced.

OM 920-6 • MICROTECH UNIT CONTROLLER 142 www.DaikinApplied.com

All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
 All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com

Daikin Applied Training and Development

Now that you have made an investment in modern, efficient Daikin equipment, its care should be a high
priority. For training information on all Daikin HVAC products, please visit us at www.DaikinApplied.com
and click on Training, or call 540-248-9646 and ask for the Training Department.

Warranty

All Daikin equipment is sold pursuant to its standard terms and conditions of sale, including Limited
Product Warranty. Consult your local Daikin Applied representative for warranty details. To find your
local Daikin Applied representative, go to www.DaikinApplied.com.

Aftermarket Services

To find your local parts office, visit www.DaikinApplied.com or call 800-37PARTS (800-377-2787).
To find your local service office, visit www.DaikinApplied.com or call 800-432-1342.

This document contains the most current product information as of this printing. For the most up-to-date
product information, please go to www.DaikinApplied.com.

Products manufactured in an ISO Certified Facility.

OM 920-6 (06/15) ©2015 Daikin Applied | (800) 432–1342 | www.DaikinApplied.com